TM 9-2350-230-35 - 2

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL MANUAL
DIRECT SUPPORT, GENERAL SUPPORT,
AND DEPOT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TURRET, ELEVATIG AND TRAVERSING SYSTEMS,
CUPOLA, GUN-LAUNCHER AND MOUNT
FOR
ARMORED RECONNAISSANCE/AIRBORN ASSAULT VEHICLE:
FULL-TRACKED, 152MM, M551 (2350-00-873-5408),

M551A1 (2350-00-140-5151), AND
OPPOSING FORCES (OPFOR) (2350-01-115-1579)
This copy is a reprint which includes current

pages from Changes 1 through 13.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
JULY 1966
WARNING
CARBON MONOXIDE POISONING CAN BE DEADLY
CARBON MONOXIDE IS A COLORLESS, ODORLESS, DEADLY POISONOUS GAS, WHICH,

WHEN BREATHED, DEPRIVES THE BODY OF OXYGEN AND CAUSES SUFFOCATION.
EXPOSURE TO AIR CONTAMINATED WITH CARBON MONOXIDE PRODUCES SYMPTOMS OF
HEADACHE, DIZZINESS, LOSS OF MUSCULAR CONTROL, APPARENT DROWSINESS, COMA.
PERMANENT BRAIN DAMAGE OR DEATH CAN RESULT FROM SEVERE EXPOSURE.
IT OCCURS IN THE EXHAUST FUMES OF FUEL-BURNING HEATERS AND

INTERNALCOMBUSTION ENGINES AND BECOMES DANGEROUSLY CONCENTRATED UNDER
CONDITIONS OF INADEOUATE VENTILATION. THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS MUST BE
OBSERVED TO INSURE THE SAFETY OF PERSONNEL WHENEVER THE PERSONNEL HEATER,
MAIN, OR AUXILIARY ENGINE OF ANY VEHICLE IS OPERATED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES
OR TACTICAL USE.
1. DO NOT OPERATE HEATER OR ENGINE OF VEHICLE IN AN ENCLOSED AREA UNLESS

IT IS ADEQUATELY VENTILATED.
2. DO NOT IDLE ENGINE FOR LONG PERIODS WITHOUT MAINTAINING ADEQUATE
VENTILATION IN PERSONNEL COMPARTMENTS.
3. DO NOT DRIVE ANY VEHICLE WITH INSPECTION PLATES, COVER PLATES, ENGINE
COMPARTMENT DOORS REMOVED UNLESS NECESSARY FOR MAINTENANCE
PURPOSES.
4. BE ALERT AT ALL TIMES DURING VEHICLE OPERATION FOR EXHAUST ODORS AND
EXPOSURE SYMPTOMS. IF EITHER ARE PRESENT, IMMEDIATELY VENTILATE
PERSONNEL COMPARTMENTS. IF SYMPTOMS PERSIST, REMOVE AFFECTED
PERSONNEL FROM VEHICLE AND TREAT AS FOLLOWS: EXPOSE to FRESH AIR; KEEP
WARM; DO NOT PERMIT PHYSICAL EXERCISE; IF NECESSARY, ADMINISTER
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION.
5. DO NOT EXPECT THE GAS-PARTICULATE FILTER UNIT OR THE MASK TO PROTECT
YOU AGAINST CARBON MONOXIDE POISONING.
THE BEST DEFENSE AGAINST CARBON MONOXIDE POISONING IS ADEQUATE VENTILATION.

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 13
CHANGE ) HEADQUARTERS,
) DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 13 ) WASHINGTON, DC, 22 January 1986
Direct Support, General Support, and
Depot Maintenance Manual
TURRET, ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEMS,
FOR
ARMORED RECONNAISSANCE/AIRBORNE
ASSAULT VEHICLE:
FULL-TRACKED, 152-MM, M551 (2350-00-873-5408),
M551A1 (2350-00-140-5151), AND
OPPOSING FORCES (OPFOR) (2350-01-115-1579)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2, 22 July 1966, is changed as follows:
1. The title is changed as shown above.
2. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below.
3. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page.
4. Revised figures are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the changed material. Revised artwork is indicated by a
miniature pointing hand adjacent to the changed artwork. New figures are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the
figure title. Revised areas of schematic diagrams are highlighted by screened borders.
5. This change incorporates updated information from MWO 9-2350-230-50-3, MWO 9-2350-230-50-5, and DA Form
2028's furnished.
Remove pages Insert pages
i through iii i through iii (iv blank)
2-4.1 and 2-4.2 2-4.1 and 2-4.2
3-9 through 3-12 3-9 through 3-12
5-1 and 5-2 5-1 and 5-2
5-11 and 5-12 5-11 and 5-12
6-16.1 through 6-20 6-16.1 through 6-20
6-23 and 6-24 6-23 and 6-24
7-1 and 7-2 7-1 and 7-2
8-17 and 8-18 8-17 and 8-18
10-1 and 10-2 10-1 and 10-2
10-11 and 10-12 10-11 and 10-12
10-15 and 10-16 10-15 and 10-16
10-17 and 10-18 10-17 and 10-18
10-37 and 10-38 10-37 and 10-38
10-41 (10-42 blank) 10-41 through 10-48
11-7 and 11-8 11-7 and 11-8
11.1-1 and 11.1-2 11.1-1 and 11.1-2
11.1-33 and 11.1-34 11.1-33 and 11.1-34
11.1-45 (11.1-46 blank) 11.1-45 and 11.1-46
12-1 (12-2 blank) 12-1 (12-2 blank)
12-9 through 12-12.2 12-9 through 12-12.2
None 12-14.1 through 12-14.9
(12-14.10 blank)
None 12-20.1 and 12-20.2
12-23 (12-24 blank) 12-23 and 12-24
None 12.1-1 through 12.1-5
(12.1-6 blank)
I-1 through I-4 I-1 through I-3 (I-4 blank)
Figure 6-8 through 6-8.2 (fold out) Figure 6-8 through 6-8.2 (fold out)
Figure 6-24 through 6-26 (fold out) Figure 6-24 through 6-26 (fold out)
None Figure 6-34 through 6-37 (fold out)
Front cover and warning page Front cover and warning page
6. File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
JOHN A. WICKHAM, JR.

General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
MILDRED E. HEDBERG
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-37, Direct Support, General Support and Depot Maintenance
Requirements for Vehicle, Armored Reconnaissance Assault, M551, M55A1, M551NTC.
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
XM81E12 and XM551 are changed to M81 and M551 respectively throughout the manual.
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 12
No. 12 ) WASHINGTON, DC, 23 June 1975

FOR
ARMORED RECONNAISSANCE/AIRBORNE
ASSAULT VEHICLE:
FULL-TRACKED, 152-MM, M551 (2350-00-873-5408)
AND M551A1 (2350-00-140-5151)
The title is changed as shown above.

1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in
the margin of the page. Added or revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the identification
number.
Remove Pages Insert Pages

2-4.1 and 2-4.2 2-4.1 and 2-4.2
5-10.3 and 5-10.4 5-10.3 and 5-10.4
6-13 and 6-14 6-13 and 6-14
None 6-16.1 and 6-16.2
6-17 and 6-18 617 and 618
7-9 and 7-10 7-9 and 7-10
None 7-11 and 7-12
7-13 and 7-14 7-13 and 7-14
11.1-3 and 11.1-4 11.1-3 and 11.1-4
Figure 6-24 (fold out) Figure 6-24 (fold out)
Figure 6-28 (fold out) Figure 6-28 (fold out)
None Figure 6-28.1 (fold out)
FRED C. WEYAND
Chief of Staff
Official:
VERNE L. BOWERS
Major General, United States Army
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 1237A, (qty rqr block No. 679) Direct and General Support
maintenance requirements for Armored Reconnaissance assault M551.
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 11
No. 11 ) WASHINGTON, DC, 5 December 1974
Direct Support, General Support, and Depot Maintenance Manual

CUPOLA, GUN-LAUNCHER, AND MOUNT FOR
ARMORED RECONNAISSANCE/AIRBORNE ASSAULT VEHICLE:
FULL-TRACKED, 152MM, M551 (235000-873 5409)
AND M551A1 (235000-140-5151)
NOTE
Convert all Federal stock numbers to National stock numbers (NSN) by adding a hyphen and two
zeros between the FSC and the FIIN of each Federal stock number.
EXAMPLE: Convert Federal stock number 2350-873-5408 to National stock number 2350-00-873-
5408.
Title is changed as shown above.

1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in
the margin of the page. Added or revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the identification
number.
10-15 and 10-16 10-15 and 10-16
10-37 through 10-40 10-37 through 10-40
11.1-1 and 11.1-2 11.1-1 and 11.1-2
FRED C. WEYAND
Chief of Staff
Official:
VERNE L. BOWERS
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-37A (qty rqr block No. 679), direct and general support
maintenance requirements for Armor Reconnaissance Assault M551.
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 10
No. 10 ) WASHINGTON, DC, 14 June 1974

FOR
ARMORED RECONNAISSANCE/AIRBORNE ASSAULT VEHICLE:
FULL-TRACKED, 152-MM, M551 (2350873-5408)
AND M551A1 (2350-140-5151)
1. Title is changed as shown above.

2. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page. The addition of chapter 11.1 is
indicated by a vertical bar in the margin beside the chapter title.
3. Added or revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the identification number.
i through iv i through iv
1-1 and 1-2 1-1 and 1-2
None 3-14.1 and 3-14.2
5-15 and 5-16 5-15 and 5-16
None 5-16.1 and 5-16.2
5-21 and 5-22 5-21 and 5-22
6-23 and 6-24 6-23 and 6-24
7-7 and 7-8 7-7 and 7-8
7-8.1 and 7-8.2 7-8.1 and 7-8.2
8-3 and 8-4 8-3 and 8-4
8-6.1 and 8-6.2 8-6.1 and 8-6.2
8-12.9 and 8-12.10 8-12.9 and 8-12.10
8-45 thru 8-48 8-45 thru 8-48
9-3 and 9-4 9-3 and 9-4
10-26.1 and 10-26.2 10-26.1 and 10-26.2
None 10-26.3 and 10-26.4
10-27 and 10-28 10-27 and 10-28
10-28.1 and 10-28.2 10-28.1 and 10-28.2
10-29 through 10-36 10-29 through 10-36
11-1 and 11-2 11-1 and 11-2
None 11.1-1 through 11.1-46
A-1 through A-4 None
I-1 through I-4 I-1 through I-4
Figure 6-24 (fold in) Figure 6-24 (fold in)
None Figure 6-28 (fold in)
By Order of the Secretary of the Army: CREIGHTON W. ABRAMS
Official: Chief of Staff
VERNE L. BOWERS
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-37A (qty rqr block No. 679) direct and general support maintenance
requirements for AR/AAV M551.
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 13
TECHNICAL MANUAL ) HEADQUARTERS,

No. 9-2350-230-35/2 ) WASHINGTON, DC, 22 JULY 1966
DS, GS, AND DEPOT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CUPOLA, GUN-LAUNCHER, AND MOUNT
FOR
ARMORED RECONNAISSANCE/AIRBORNE ASSAULT
VEHICLE, FULL-TRACKED, 152mm, M551
(2350-00-873-5408), M551A1 (2350-00-140-5151),
AND OPPOSING FORCES (OPFOR) (2350-01-115-1579)
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
Section 1-1. Scope, Maintenance Allocation, and Reports .......................................................................... 1-1

1-2. Description and Data............................................................................................................... 1-3
CHAPTER 2. PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND EQUIPMENT....................................................................... 2-1
CHAPTER 3. TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................................ 3-1
CHAPTER 4. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND REPAIR DATA
Section 4-1. Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-2. Inspection and Repair Data ..................................................................................................... 4-3
CHAPTER 5. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF TURRET AND TURRET MAJOR COMPONENTS
Section 5-1. Turret and Turret Traverse Bearing Assembly......................................................................... 5-2

5-2. Gun-Launcher Elevating and Turret Traverse Mechanisms ..................................................... 5-6
5-3. Gun-Launcher with Mount ....................................................................................................... 5-8
5-4. Gun-Launcher From/In Mount ................................................................................................. 5-11
5-5. Commander's Power Assist Cupola......................................................................................... 5-15
CHAPTER 6. REPAIR OF TURRET ELECTRIC CONTACT RING, ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES,

AND WIRING HARNESSES
Section 6-1. Electric Contact Ring .............................................................................................................. 6-1

6-2. Turret Ventilating Fan ............................................................................................................. 6-5
6-3. Azimuth Indicator Power Supply Switch Assembly .................................................................. 6-6
6-4. Circuit Cutout Box................................................................................................................... 6-7
6-5. Wiring Harnesses.................................................................................................................... 6-8
6-6. Turret Electrical System.......................................................................................................... 6-24
i
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Page
CHAPTER 7. REPAIR OF CONVENTIONAL WEAPONS CONTROL SYSTEM
Section 7-1. Functional Operation............................................................................................................... 7-1

7-2. Telescope Reticle Emergency Power Supply .......................................................................... 7-9
7-3. Relay Box ............................................................................................................................... 7-10
7-4. Loader's Control Box Assembly............................................................................................... 7-16.2
7-5. Blasting Machine Assembly .................................................................................................... 7-18
7-6. Telescope Reticle Dimmer Box Assembly............................................................................... 7-19
CHAPTER 8. REPAIR OF ELECTRIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM
Section 8-1. Functional Operation............................................................................................................... 8-2

8-1.1. Functional and Technical Description .................................................................................... 8-6.3
8-2. Accessory Box Assembly ........................................................................................................ 8-13
8-3. Amplifier Integrator Assembly ................................................................................................. 8-15
8-4. Power Supply.......................................................................................................................... 8-17
8-5. Gun and Turret Control Selector ............................................................................................. 8-20
8-6. Gunner's or Commander's Control Handle Assembly .............................................................. 8-23
8-7. Gyro Selector Assembly.......................................................................................................... 8-27
8-8. Elevation Limit Switch Assembly............................................................................................. 8-29
8-9. Motor-Generator ..................................................................................................................... 8-33
CHAPTER 9. REPAIR OF GUN-LAUNCHER ELEVATING AND TURRET TRAVERSE MECHANISMS
Section 9-1. Gun-Launcher Elevating Mechanism....................................................................................... 9-1

9-2. Turret Traverse Mechanism .................................................................................................... 9-14
9-3. Servo motor............................................................................................................................ 9-33
CHAPTER 10. REPAIR OF 152MM GUN-LAUNCHER M81E1 AND MOUNT
Section 10-1. Breech Mechanism ................................................................................................................. 10-1

10-2. Gun Mount Assembly.............................................................................................................. 10-25
10-3. Closed Breech Scavenging System - Weapon Mounted.......................................................... 10-37
10-4. Retubing/Rechambering (On Vehicle) and Cannon Pressure Vessel (CPV)
Replacement Procedures........................................................................................................ 10-42
CHAPTER 11. REPAIR OF COMMANDER'S POWER ASSIST CUPOLA (M551 ONLY)
Section 11-1. Electrical System .................................................................................................................... 11-1

11-2. Cupola Bearing Assembly ....................................................................................................... 11-5
11-3. Traverse Mechanism Assembly .............................................................................................. 11-6
11-4. Support Assembly and Switch Assembly................................................................................. 11-17
CHAPTER 11.1. REPAIR OF COMMANDER'S POWER ASSIST CUPOLA (M551AI ONLY)
Section 11.1-1. Functional Operation of Cupola Equipped With Laser Range Finder AN/VVG-1...................... 11.1-1
11.1-2. Electrical System .................................................................................................................... 11.1-6
11.1-3. Traverse Mechanism Assembly. ............................................................................................. 11.1-27
ii
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 13
Page
CHAPTER 12. REPAIR OF TURRET MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
Section 12-1. Elevation Quadrant Bracket .................................................................................................... 12-2.1

12-2. Turret Traverse Bearing Assembly ......................................................................................... 12-2.2
12-3. Turret Rotatable Floor Bearing................................................................................................ 12-3
12-4. Gun Trunnion Bearings ........................................................................................................... 12-4
12-5. M119 Telescope Mounting Bracket ......................................................................................... 12-4
12-6. Gunner's Control Handle Bracket Assembly . .......................................................................... 12-5
12-7. Grenade Launcher Electrical Control Assembly....................................................................... 12-6
12-8. Grenade Launcher Tube Assembly ......................................................................................... 12-8
12-9. Closed Breech Scavenging System - Vehicle Mounted ........................................................... 12-10
12-9.1. Closed Breech Scavenging System - Slave Charging ............................................................. 12-14
12-9.2. Closed Breech Scavenging System (M551A1 Only)................................................................ 12-14.1
12-10. Portable Fire Extinguisher and Hose Guard Bracket................................................................ 12-15
12-11. Turret Protective Screens ....................................................................................................... 12-16
12-12. Transmitter Protective Cover. ................................................................................................. 12-17
12-13. Searchlight Adaptation Kit....................................................................................................... 12-18
12-14. Commander's Upper and Lower Control Handle Brackets ....................................................... 12-19
12-15. Rear Ballistic Shield Assembly................................................................................................ 12-20
12-15.1. Commander's Ballistic Shield Posts (M551A1 Only)................................................................ 12-20.1
12-15.2. Bustle Rack (M551A1 Only) .................................................................................................... 12-20.2
12-16. Commander's Platform ........................................................................................................... 12-21
12-17. Oddment Stowage Box ........................................................................................................... 12-22
12-18. 7-62-MM Machine Gun Ammunition Box................................................................................. 12-23
12-19. Gas-Particulate Filter Unit....................................................................................................... 12-24
CHAPTER 12.1 REPAIR OF TURRET MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS (OPFOR VEHICLE ONLY)
Section 12.1-1. Limit Switch Cam (No. 3) ........................................................................................................ 12.1-1

12.1-2. Safe to Fire Limit Switch ......................................................................................................... 12.1-2
12.1-3. Main Weapon Relay Box Wiring Harness................................................................................ 12.1-3
12.1-4. Firing Circuit Tester ................................................................................................................ 12.1-3
12.1-5. Electrical Cover ...................................................................................................................... 12.1-4
12.1-6. Bar (Short Tube Configuration) ............................................................................................... 12.1-4
12.1-7. Bar and Collar (Long Tube Configuration) ............................................................................... 12.1-5
CHAPTER 13. REPAIR OF MATERIEL USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH MAJOR ITEM

Electronic Systems Test Set ................................................................................................... 13-1
Extractor Assembly ................................................................................................................. 13-2
INDEX................................................................................................................................................................. I-1
iii/(iv blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 10
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Section 1-1. SCOPE, MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION, AND REPORTS
1-1. Scope 1-3. Forms, Records, and Reports
a. This technical manual contains instructions for a. General. Officers of maintenance units. are
direct support, general support, and depot maintenance responsible for executing forms, records, and reports.
of turret, elevating and traversing systems, cupola, and
gun-launcher and mount for the Armored b. Authorized Forms. Forms applicable to
Reconnaissance/Airborne Assault Vehicle: (AR/AAV) operation of maintenance units are listed in the
Full-Tracked, 152-MM, M551 and M551A1 (fig. 1-1 and Appendix and DA Pamphlet 310-2. For instructions on
1-2). use of these forms refer to TM 38-750.
b. Refer to TM 9-1430-465-30 for troubleshooting c. Weapon Record Book. For instructions,

of the Shillelagh guidance and control system using the procedures, and precautions in recording of pertinent
guided missile system test set AN/MSM-93 (XO-1). data, process DA Form 2408-4 in accordance with
instructions contained in TM 38-750.
c. A list of applicable publications is contained in
TM 9-2350-230-L. d. Field Report of Accidents
d. Report of errors, omissions, and (1) Injury to personnel or damage to materiel

recommendations for improving this publication by the is to be reported in accordance with
individual user is encouraged. Reports should be instructions in AR 385-40 .
submitted on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes
to Publications) and forwarded direct to the
(2) Any accident or malfunction involving the
Commander, US Army Armament Command, Attn:
use of ammunition must be reported in
AMSAR-MAS, Rock Island, IL 61201.
accordance with AR 75-1.
1-2. Maintenance Allocation
e. Equipment Improvement Recommendations.
Maintenance responsibilities as allocated in the Report defective or unsatisfactorily designed materiel on
maintenance allocation chart (TM 9-2350-230-12) are Maintenance Request Form DA 2407 following
reflected in this technical manual. instructions contained in TM 38-750.
1-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 10
Figure 1-1. Armored reconnaissance/airborne assault vehicle:

FT, 152-mm - left front view (M551 shown).
Figure 1-2. Armored reconnaissance/airborne assault vehicle:

FT, 152-mm - right rear view (M551 shown).
1-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Section 1-2. DESCRIPTION AND DATA
1-4. Description 1-5. Data
A description of the M551 vehicle is contained in TM Data furnished in table 1-1 is supplemental to data
9-2350-230-12. contained in TM 9-2350-230-12. Weights are included
for major components since this information is not
furnished on drawings.
Table 1-1. Characteristics and Data

Component Characteristics and Data
ELECTRIC DRIVE Type .................................................................. Gyro-stabilized weapon and turret

CONTROL SYSTEM electric drive control system
Power Requirements.........................................................................18 to 30 volts dc
Nominal standby current ....................................................(approx.) 4.5 amperes
Nominal idling current (control handle
palm switch depressed) .....................................................(approx.) 60 amps
Maximum traverse slew current ............................................. (approx.) 170 amps
Maximum elevation slew current..............................................(approx.) 80 amps
Turret Maximum Rotation Rate Non-Stabilized ................................................. 4 rpm
Turret Maximum Rotation Rate Stabilized.......................................... (approx.) 8 rpm
Elevation or Depression (Minimum Rate) .................................................71 mils/sec.
ELEVATING Gross weight - mechanism......................................................................... 104.52 lbs

MECHANISM Gross weight - installation .......................................................................... 174.58 lbs
Power train ratio (Nominal) ................................................................................510:1
Manual response (Minimum).................................... 9.5 mils/revolution of handwheel
Manual handwheel effort (Average) ....................................................................7 lbs
(Maximum) ................................................................ 11 lbs
Mode selector clutch voltage.................................... 18-30 volts DC (internal ground)
Elevation and depression rate (Minimum) ........................................ 71.0 mils/second
TURRET Gross weight installation ............................................................................ 146.65 lbs

TRAVERSE Power train ratio (Manual) .............................................................................639.89:1
MECHANISM (Power)...............................................................................844.47:1
Manual response (Minimum)..................................... 10 mils/revolution of handwheel
Manual handwheel effort (Average) .................................................................. 14 lbs
(Maximum)........................................................................................... 17 lbs
Traverse rate (Minimum)........................................................... 427 mils/sec. (4 rpm)
Manual drive disconnect clutch ........................................................... 18-30 volts DC
voltage .............................................................. 18-30 volts DC (Internal ground)
152MM Breech Actuation...................................................... .Electrical or manual - separable

GUN-LAUNCHER sliding-rotating breech chamber
M81 Breech Chamber....................................................... Left-hand 20°buttress threads -
30°interruptions
Firing Method.......................................................................... Electrical impulse only
Length .................................................................................................116.22 inches
Bore Size ....................................................................................... 152MM (6 inches)
Weight:
Complete............................................................................................... 1,121 lbs
Breech Mechanism ................................................................................... 400 lbs
Tube ......................................................................................................... 721 lbs
1-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 1-1. Characteristics and Data - Continued

Component Characteristics and Data
152MM Tube Rifling:

GUN-LAUNCHER Length ..............................................................................................95.65 inches
M81 - Continued Depth of Groove ..........................................................................................0.050
Width of Groove ................................................................................0.245/0.253
Width of Land ............................................................................................0.1434
Number of Grooves ......................................................................................... 48
Twist RH.............................................................................1 turn in 41.2 calibers
TURRET Weight ........................................................................................................... 410 lbs

BEARING Outside Diameter.......................................................................... .79.875 ± 0.062 in.
ASSEMBLY Pilot Diameter ................................................................................ 77.515 ± 0.020 in.
Inside Diameter...........................................................................................73,000 in.
ROTATABLE Weight ............................................................................................................. 15 lbs

FLOOR BEARING Outside Diameter........................................................................... 28.000 ± 0.002 in.
ASSEMBLY Inside Diameter.............................................................................. 26.500 ± 0.002 in.
Lubrication ................................................................................... Packed 1/2 full with
Grease 9150-261-
8297 at assembly
GUN MOUNT Type ......................................................Concentric-Differential Area Hydro-Spring

ASSEMBLY Length of Recoil.......................................................................................... 15 inches
Overall Length ...................................................................................... 84-1/4 inches
Gross Weight:......................................................................................... .1,337. 6 lbs
Weight Without Gun Shield .................................................................. .814.5 lbs
Weight of Gun Shield ............................................................................... 523 lbs
Hydraulic Fluid Capacity:
Recoil Mechanism .................................................................................19 quarts
Replenisher .......................................................................................2-1/4 quarts
Buffer .................................................................................................. 22 ounces
Nominal Precharge Pressure .......................................................................... 850 psi
Nominal Recoil Pressure............................................................................. .3,000 psi
Nominal Recoil Cycle Time ...................................................................... 0.6 second
Operating Temperature Range........................................................ -65°F. to +125°F.
1-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
CHAPTER 2
PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND EQUIPMENT
2-1. Parts manual and is not to be used for requisitioning

replacement. Use TM 9-2350-230-25P/2 for
Repair parts authorized for direct, general support requisitioning Special Tools and Equipment.
and depot maintenance are listed in TM 9-2350-230-
25P/2. Parts not listed are not available; therefore, 2-4. Improvised Tools
some assemblies must be replaced in their entirety. If
possible, determine what replacement parts are required The improvised tools listed in Table 2-2 apply only
and their availability before disassembling a component. to direct support and general support maintenance
shops to enable these maintenance organizations to
2-2. Common Tools and Equipment fabricate the tool locally, if desired. These tools are of
particular value to organizations engaged in repairing a
Standard tools and equipment having general number of identical components.
application to turret items are authorized by tables of
allowance (TA) and tables of organization and NOTE
equipment (TOE). Improvised tools are not available for
issue.
2-3. Special Tools and Equipment
2-5. Test Set
Tools and equipment specially designed for
supporting maintenance are tabulated in Table 2-1. Refer to Chapter 13 for repair of test set.
Table 2-1 contains only those tools described in this
Table 2-1. Special Tools and Equipment

Ref. No.
Item Identifying No. Fig. Par. Use
Sling Assembly, Turret 4933-929-0851 5-3 5-1 Used to remove/install turret.

Lifting 11605509
Tool Kit, Gun and Turret: 4933-921-7334

Supplemental, DS, GS, and 5910334
depot maintenance
Consisting of:
Adapter, Pressure Gage 4933-152-2404 Use with pressure gage 6685-068-8573

11635750 to check pressure in recoil cylinder,
and calibrate safe-to-fire indicator.
Adapter, Socket Wrench 5120-227-8088 To remove firing mechanism.

3/4" Female, 1/2" dr. GGG-W-641 Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.
Adapter, Socket Wrench 5120-227-8104 To remove/install chemical air

Male to Female sq. end GGG-W-641 drier cartridge cap nut.
male end 1" female 3/4"
Adapter, Recoil Mech. 5120-472-1987 10-23 10-3 Use with 3/4-inch drive torque wrench
Torque Wrench 11664905 to remove/install and torque gun-
launcher mount recoil cylinder front
and rear follower retaining nuts.
2-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C8
Table 2-1. Special Tools and Equipment - Continued

Ref. No.
Alignment Tool 5120-227-7291 To adjust balance potentiometers in
GGG-A-450 accessory box, amplifier integrator
and turret drive system power supply.
Bit, Screwdriver: male 5120-921-0574
hex, 7/64" across flats GGG-W-641
Bolt, Eye: Gun Shield 5306-901-6184 5-8 5-1 To remove/install gun-launcher and/or
Lifting (2) 10954670 gun shield. 1 used with Hoist 3950-
092-9064 (SC 4933-95-CL-E19) to
position gun in recoil.
Crimping Tool, Terminal 5120-928-3801 8-3 8-1 To replace terminals 5940-919-3518

11602938 and 5940-919-6494. To remove/install.
Extractor, Contact 4933-929-0849 8-2 8-1 To extract terminals 5940-919-3518

Electrical 11602936 and 5940-919-6494 from quad-type
printed circuit board connectors.
Extractor, Contact 4933-929-0850 8-2 8-1 To extract terminals 5940-919-3518

Electrical 11602937 and 5940-919-6494 from dual-type
printed circuit board connectors.
Fixture Positioning Brush 4933-062-4500 5-20 5-1 To align commander's cupola electrical
Holder Contact Ring 11605044 contact ring and brush assemblies.
Gage, Measuring, Switch 4933-415-1518 To measure limit switch (LS-3) gap

Breech Mechanism 11665289 and gun-launcher ball screw to rear
of spindle.
Gage, Pressure 6685-068-8573 Use with adapter 4933-152-2404, to

4302 (70462) check pressure in recoil cylinder and
calibrate safe-to-fire indicator.
Holder, Planet Carrier 4933-915-8558 10-7 10-1 Used with spanner wrench assembly
11576798 to remove/install breech mech. ring
gear retaining spanner nut to planet
carrier.
Kit Inspection, 4933-006-4092 For inspection of tube detent hole

Tube Detent Hole 11578500 and installation/removal of inner seal
Consisting of:
Case Assembly, For transporting kit items

Attache 11578499
Inspection Gage, Comparison gage for surface

Surfaces 8665947G4 roughness
Inspection Acceptance Booklet for inspection procedures

Criteria 11578501
2-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C8

Ref. No.
Lamp, Incandescent 13BB Spare bulb for inspection light
Light, Inspection 4933-489-7432 For magnified illumination of surfaces

11578465
Mirror, Inspection 5120-006-3350 Calibrated to inspect upper surface of tube

11578466 detent hole
Sanding strips To be used with tool 11578467 for cleaning

11578467-3 detent hole
Cleaning Tool, 4933-489-7439 For cleaning and polishing detent hole

Detent 11578467
Inserting and Removing 4933-478-0759 10-13.1 To install and remove Type III detent assy
Tool: detent seal 11578471 10-13.2
Multimeter 6625-553-0142 As required.

MIL-M-4269
Pliers, Electrical 5120-624-8065 Loosen and tighten electrical harness

AT508K connectors as required.
Pliers, Lg. Rn. Nose, 5120-247-5177 As required.

W/Cutter 6" size GGG-P-471
Pliers, Retaining Ring 5120-464-4777 Remove check valve retaining ring.

11578314
Prod, Test: 6625-678-0657 Use with multimeter 6625-553-0142.

10394564-010
Puller Tool: Check Valve 4933-117-9351 Pull check valve from striker.
11578228
Screwdriver: Jeweler 5120-180-0728 To adjust balance potentiometers and time
Swivel Knob MS15230-4 delay elements in accessory box, amplifier
integrator ,conventional weapons relay
box, and turret drive system power supply.
Servicing Tool, Check 4933-464-4776 Install and clean check valve and metal
Valve 11578313 seals.
Socket Wrench Attachment 5120-585-6237

GGG-W-641
Socket Wrench Attachment 5120-596-1199

Socket Head Screw GGG-W-641
Socket Wrench Attachment 5120-596-8508 To remove or install optical tracker (use

Socket Head Screw GGG-W-641 with torque wrench 5120-595-9073)
2-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6

Ref. No.
Socket Wrench Attachment, 5120-683-8597 To install firing mechanism cover

Socket Head Screw GGG-W-641 and guard.
Socket, Socket Wrench, 5120-189-7916 To remove/install chemical air

2-1/2" 1" sq. dr.: GGG-W-641 drier cartridge cap nut.
Chemical Air Dryer
Socket, Socket Wrench: 5120-261-2823 To remove or install firing

MS16253-34 mechanism receptacle nut.
Test Set Electronic 4933-909-9356 To check turret electric drive control

System 11586473 system.
Unlocking Tool: Thrust 4933-915-8531 For Thrust Collar

Collar 11576774
Wrench Assembly: Ball 4933-915-8540 10-8 10-1 To correct position gun-launcher

Screw 11576794 breech mechanism actuating cam
cylinder, ball nuts, ball nut screw
and spindle assembly.
Wrench Assembly: Ring 4933-915-8559 Used with holder 11576798 to remove/

Gear Unit 11576784 install gun-launcher breech mechanism
ring gear retaining spanner nut to
planet carrier.
Wrench Assembly: 4933-915-8560 To remove and replace breech

Spanner Nut 11576797 mechanism firing mechanism nut.
Wrench Assembly: Check 4933-111-6734 To remove/install check valve

Valve Plug 11578063 plug.
Wrench, Evacuator 4933-930-1843 5-10 To remove evacuator and thrust

Removing 11577250 5-11 collar.
Wrench, Lock Nut 4933-687-8504 9-17 9-1 To remove/install turret traverse

Torquing: Turret Traverse 10942154 mechanism gearshaft gear retaining
lock nut from/on gearshaft in upper
housing group.
Wrench, Lock Nut 4933-687-8507 11-9 11-1 To remove/install cupola traverse

Torquing: Cupola Traverse 10942347 mechanism drive gearshaft-to-lower
housing group lock nut, from/on
drive gearshaft.
Wrench, Spanner, Drive 5120-915-8572 To remove and replace breech

Motor Unit 11577226 mechanism drive motor.
Wrench, Spanner, 5120-917-6017 11-9 11-1 To remove/install cupola traverse

Elevation Mechanism 11604985 mechanism brake assembly lock nut
from/on drive gearshaft.
2-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 13
Ref. No.
Wrench Spanner: 5120-00-930-7784 9-11 9-1 To remove/install turret traverse

Traversing Mechanism 11604983 mechanism bevel gear retaining lock
nut from/on gearshaft in lower
housing group.
Wrench Spanner: Turret 5120-00-930-7785 9-17 9-1 To remove/install turret traverse

Traversing Mechanism 11604984 mechanism gearshaft bearing retaining
lock nut from/on gearshaft in upper
housing group.
Wrench Spanner: Turret 512000-930-7783 9-5 9-1 1. Elev. mech. magnetic clutch,
Traversing 11604981 idler spur gear lock nut from/on
gearshaft.
9-13 9-1 2. Turret trav. mech. manual drive

bevel gear lock nut from/on
manual drive shaft.
9-15 9-1 3. Turret trav. mech. magnetic

clutch idler spur gear lock nut
from/on gearshaft.
9-20 4. Adjustment of traverse mech.

slip clutch.
Wrench Torque: 3/4" 5120-00-242-3263 As required.

drive cap 350 ft. lbs. GGG-W-686
Wrench Torque: 3/8 sq. 5120-00-821-3441 As required.

drive 100-750 in. lbs. GGG-W-686
Wrench Torque: 5120-00-970-8648 To install trunnion bearings

multiplier, 3/4 in Line T26030 and as required
female sq. drive
Airflow Tester, M39 6680-00-436-4212 12-21 12-19 Testing airflow of

gas-particulate filter
unit.
Change 13 2-4.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Table 2-2. Improvised Tools for Direct Support and General Support Maintenance
Item Figure Ref. Use
Turret Improvised 2-1 To place turret after removal from vehicle

Stand hull.
Gun-Launcher and Mount 2-2.1 To support gun-launcher mount after removal

Support Fixture from turret.
Clutch Arbor Tool 2-2.2 To align traverse and elevation mechanism

Assembly clutch and idler spur gear.
Recoil Sleeve Holding Tool 2-2.3 To remove/install gun-launcher recoil

sleeve.
Gun-Launcher Holding 2-2.4 To hold breech during removal,/installation

Tool of gun-launcher and mount.
Turret Floor Lifting 2-2.5 To support turret rotatable floor during

Fixture turret removal/installation.
2-4.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
FIGURE 2-2)
Figure 2-1. Turret improvised stand
2-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
FIG. 2-1).
Figure 2-2. Turret stand floor support
2-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Figure 2-2.1. Gun-launcher and mount support fixture
2-6.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Figure 2-2.2. Clutch arbor tool assembly
2-6.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Figure 2-2.3. Recoil sleeve holding tool
2-6.3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Figure 2-2.4. Gun-launcher holding tool
2-6.4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Figure 2-2.5. Turret floor lifting fixture
Pages 2-7 and 2-8 including figures 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, and 2-6 - deleted.
2-6.5/(2-6.6 blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
CHAPTER 3
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-1. Purpose d. Inspect for authorized or required modifications.
Information in this chapter is to be used in e. Use any test equipment or test procedures
conjunction with and is a supplement to the available, when necessary to establish specific source of
troubleshooting section in the operator's and trouble.
organizational maintenance manual (TM 9-2350-230-
12).
3-3. Troubleshooting Tests
3-2. General Instructions and Procedures
Troubleshooting tests and specific methods to
correct malfunctions of turret, weapon and
Visually inspect deadlined vehicles before any
miscellaneous components are listed in table 3-1.
operation to avoid additional damage to components or
possible injury to personnel. Careful inspections of
3-4. Additional Troubleshooting Information
components, whether mounted in the vehicle or
removed, can often reveal the specific defective area.
Generally, the following procedure will help locate this a. Refer to section 6-6 for schematics of the
area. complete turret electrical system.
b. Refer to table 8-2 for additional information on
a. Carefully operate components manually, where testing, malfunctions, and remedies for turret electric
applicable, to determine normal or abnormal function. drive control system.
b. Inspect for any evidence of misuse or c. Refer to Section 8-1 for functional operation of
malfunction such as dents, cracks, bent or broken tubes electric drive control system which will help troubleshoot
or parts, moisture, corrosion, dirt, foreign matter, system.
excessive wear, oil stains, bare wires, worn insulation, d. Refer to figures 7-1 through 7-6 for functional
or signs of tampering. operation of conventional weapon system which will
c. Check for completeness of components. help troubleshoot system.
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting

MALFUNCTION PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
AZIMUTH INDICATOR
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
1. Azimuth indicator light a. No electrical power. a. Operate dome lights; if

does not illuminate dome lights operate,
after lamp has been proceed to b.
checked.
b. Faulty switch or resistor. b. Check continuity through
switch assembly (fig. 6-6).
Repair switch assembly
if defective.
c. Faulty connector at c. If a. and b. above were

switch assembly. correct, check for
electrical power at
connector. Replace
connector (fig. 6-6) if
defective.
3-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting - Continued

ELECTRICAL CONTACT RING
2. No electrical power in Loose terminal or broken ring. Check continuity from pin
turret (vehicle MASTER of lower housing con-
SWITCH on). nector to identical pin
of upper housing connec-
tor (fig. 6-2 and 6-3).
Repair if defective.
3. Excessive voltage drop in Excessive voltage drop is due Check voltage drop:
a circuit. to worn brushes or defective 1. Signal circuit-
wiring between lower and 300 MV max at 3
upper housing connectors. amps.
2. Power circuit -
Refer to fig. 6-4 for schematic 600 MV max at 400
of circuit. With multimeter amps.
and prescribed load, check 3. Ground circuit -
voltage drop. 30 MV max at 400
amps.
Repair if defective (fig.
6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4, and
line 1, fig. 6-24).
4. Excessive rotational Cover tightened. Clearance between cover

torque. and upper housing should
be .010 to .030-inch with
cover in place.
Tighten nut to 75 pounds-
feet maximum.
CIRCUIT CUTOUT BOX
5. No electrical power to Defective circuit to missile system. With either missile or power
missile system. on control selector in ON
position, check voltage out-
put at connector J2 (28vdc).
If voltage output, check
harness to missile system.
If no voltage output, check
connector J1 (A-C, B-C).
If voltage at contacts of har-
ness, repair circuit cutout
box (fig. 6-7). If no voltage
between A and C, check
power harness (fig. 6-11).
If no voltage between B and
C, check fire control selec-
tor switch and wiring (line
29, fig. 6-24 and fig. 8-14),
also check wiring, connec-
tions, and circuit board A10
in accessory box (line 37,
fig. 6-24 and fig. 8-6).
3-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6

CONVENTIONAL WEAPONS
SYSTEM
6. Failure-to-fire, READY a. Firing control circuit a. Defective ammunition or

lights illuminated (mis- open. electrical malfunction
sile or conventional) (line 85, fig. 6-24,
fig. 7-4, 7-5, and
7-6.4).
b. Firing mechanism circuit b. Check continuity firing

open. mechanism circuit
(line 85, fig. 6-24,
fig. 7-4, 7-5, and
7-6.4)
7. Misfire with blasting ma- Blasting machine firing Check continuity of blasting
chine (conventional circuit open. machine circuit (line 93,
only) fig. 6-24, fig. 7-6, and
7-6.4).
8. READY lights fail to il- Firing control circuit open. Check continuity of firing
luminate (missile or control circuit (line 72,
conventional) fig. 6-24, fig. 7-4, 7-5,
and 7-6.4).
9. Coaxial machine gun fails Firing control circuit open. Check continuity of coaxial
to fire firing control circuit
(line 81, fig. 6-24,
fig. 7-6 and 7-6.4).
9.1. CBSS fails to operate CBSS control circuit Check system circuit (line
electrically defective. 109, fig. 6-24, fig. 7-3.1
and 7-6.4).
10. Breech fails to automatic a. Automatic open circuit a. Check continuity of auto-
open on return to battery defective. matic open circuit
(line 109, fig. 6-24,
fig. 7-3, 7-3.1, and
7-6.4).
b. Breech motor power cir- b. Check continuity of power

cuit defective. circuit (line 121, fig.
6-24, line 122, fig.
6-25, fig. 7-1, 7-2,
7-6.4).
11. Breech fails to open/ a. Breech motor control a. Check continuity of control
close electrically circuit defective. circuit (line 118, fig.
6-24, fig. 7-1, 7-2,
and 7-6.4).
b. Breech motor power b. Check continuity of power

circuit defective. circuit (line 121, fig.
6-24, line 122, fig.
6-25, fig. 7-1, 7-2,
and 7-6.4).
3-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6

CONVENTIONAL WEAPONS
SYSTEM - Continued
12. Telescope missile or Missile or conventional select Check continuity of missile

conventional reticle control circuit defective. or conventional select con-
fails to illuminate trol circuit (line 52, fig.
6-24, fig. 7-5 and 7-6.4).
ELECTRIC DRIVE CONTROL

SYSTEM
NOTE:
Use electric drive control test set checkout procedure (table 8-2) along with troubleshooting tests
to analyze and/or isolate trouble areas.
13. POWER-light and READY a. No electrical power to a. Check for voltage at

light do not illuminate turret. control selector (line
after lamps have been 27, fig. 6-24). If no
checked voltage, check wiring
harness (fig. 6-10,
line 1, fig. 6-24, and
fig. 7-6.4) and/or trou-
bleshoot contact ring
(fig. 6-4 and line 1,
fig. 6-24). If there is
voltage, proceed to b.
b. Defective gun and turret b. Check continuity of switch

control selector. (line 29, fig. 6-24 and
fig. 8-14).
c. Defective circuit breaker c. If control selector

CB1 or relay A8K1 in functions check circuit
accessory box. breaker and/or relay
A8K1 in accessory box
(line 5, fig. 6-24 and
fig. 8-6).
14. POWER light illuminates Short in system. Check system circuit (line 8,
but then goes out. fig. 6-24 and fig. 8-1).
15. POWER light illuminates a. Defective gun and turret a. Check circuitry (line 18,
but READY light does control selector. fig. 6-24 and fig. 8-1).
not illuminate after If system operates,
lamp has been checked. check diode CR7 in
control selector (line
18, fig. 6-24, fig. 8-14,
8-15, and 8-16).
b. Defective component in b. Check relay A5K1 and

accessory box. A1K2. Check timer
A-11 (lines 7, 14, and
17, fig. 6-24, fig. 8-1,
8-4, 8-5, and 8-6).
3-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C

SYSTEM - Continued
16. READY light illuminates Defective or misadjusted timer Adjust timer A-11 so that
but more or less than in accessory box. READY light illuminates
timer tolerance (18- 18 to 22 seconds after
22 seconds). POWER SWITCH is turned
NOTE: on. Replace timer A-11
Timer will not function if adjustment can not be
properly unless entire obtained (line 14, fig. 6-24
system is connected. and fig. 8-1).
17. With POWER and READY a. Defective control handle. a. Operate other control han-
lights illuminated, dle. If other handle
squeezing palm switch operates, replace de-
does not activate fective control handle.
system or system If neither handle oper-
operation is degraded ates, proceed to step b.
or erratic.
b. Defective component in b. Check relays A1K2 and

accessory box A8K4 if neither motor-
generator or servomotor
fans operate. Check
relay A8K2 if motor-
generator does not start.
Check relay A1K1 if
servomotor fans do not
start (lines 14, 18, and
19, fig. 6-24, lines 137,
139, 142, 146, 156, and
158, fig. 6-25, fig. 8-1,
8-4, 8-5, and 8-6).
c. Defective generator control c. If relay A8K2 functions,

field amplifier or motor- circuit harness to motor-
generator. generator functions (table
8-3 and section 8-9), re-
place motor-generator
control field amplifier.
If malfunction continues,
replace motor-generator
(TM 9-2350-230-12).
d. Defective servomotor. d. If relay A1K1 functions and

circuit to servomotor
functions, replace defec-
tive servomotor
(table 8-2.2 and line 471,
fig. 6-27).
3-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6


SYSTEM - Continued
18. With POWER and READY Defective elevating/traverse Check for voltage at clutch
lights illuminated, palm mechanism clutch, clutch brush (+13 to 30vdc). If
switch depressed, and brush, or circuit to clutch. no voltage, check relay 4K1
motor-generator oper- in accessory box (line 162,
ating, control handle fig. 6-25, fig. 8-1 and 8-6).
does not drive gun and/ If voltage, check clutch
or turret. (TESTS brush (continuity) (fig. 9-1
(TM 9-2350-230-12) and 9-14). Hand operate
have indicated no mechanize. Gun/turret
system malfunction). should not move when palm
switch is depressed. If
there is movement, clutch
is defective. Repair mecha-
nism. If no movement, and
there is motor-generator
output (table 8-2.2), switch
servomotors from one
mechanism to other. If
malfunction is corrected,
replace defective motor.
If not corrected, repair
mechanism.
19. Two-second dropout delay Defective component in Check relays A2K2 and A8K3.
inoperative when palm accessory box. Replace timer A-11 in
switch released. accessory box (fig. 8-1,
8-4, 8-5, and 8-6).
NOTE
The timer will not function
properly if entire system
is not connected.
20. Gun-launcher elevates or a. Defective control handle. a. Check circuit to control

depresses but speed handle (line 339, fig.
erratic. 6-26, fig. 8-1, 8-19,
and 8-20). If manual
function continues,
switch control handles.
Repair defective handle
as necessary (fig. 8-17
and 8-18).
b. Defective servomotor b. Remove servomotor and

replace with traverse
servomotor. If mal-
function is corrected,
replace defective motor.
c. Defective motor-generator c. Perform b. above. If

(see malfunction 17 malfunction is not
above). corrected, replace
motor -generator.
3-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting -Continued

SYSTEM - Continued
20. Gun-launcher elevates or d. Loose/disconnected d. Check wiring and connec-

depresses but speed wiring on connectors. tors of system (fig. 6-8.2
erratic - continued and section 6-5).
21. Turret traverses but Same probable causes as for Perform same corrective
speed erratic. malfunction 20 above. actions except for b. Use
elevating servomotor to
check traversing servo-
motor.
22. STAB light does not il- a. Rate sensor or power a. Check installation and con-
luminate after lamp has supply of missile system nections of rate sensor,
been checked. Turret not installed or connected. missile system, or
POWER and READY power supplied (line 25,
lights are illuminated. fig. 6-24 and fig. 8-1).
b. Defective gyro selector. b. Check relay 11K1 in gyro

selector (lines 23 and
30, fig. 6-24, fig. 8-1
and 8-22).
c. Defective accessory box. c. Check relay A6K2 in ac-

cessory box (line 25,
fig. 6-24 and fig. 8-6).
d. Defective gun and turret d. Check control selector

control selector. STAB circuit (line 25,
fig. 6-24, fig. 7-6.4,
8-1, and 8-14).
e. Defective wiring and/or e. Check wiring and harness-

harnesses. es. Repair or replace
as required (fig. 6-8.2
and section 6-5).
f. Circuit cutout relay not f. Check for voltage (input

energized. and output). Repair as
required (fig. 6-7 and
7-6.4).
23. Gun-launcher drives a. Elevation limit switches, a. Adjust (line 168, fig. 6-25,
against elevation or traverse interference fig. 8-1, 8-25, 8-26,
depression stops. zone switch, or cams not and 8-27).
properly, adjusted.
3-7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6

SYSTEM - Continued
23. Gun-launcher drives b. Defective elevation limit b. Check for voltage at plug
against elevation or switch connector. Check con-
depression stops - tinuity of each switch.
continued Replace if defective.
Check circuit board
4A15 in accessory box
and associated circuits
(line 168, fig. 6-25,
fig. 8-1, 8-6, and
8-24).
24. No override when com- a. Defective relay A7K1 a Check relays. Replace
mander's palm switch (system operation) or defective relay assembly
is depressed. relay A4K1 (firing (line 20, fig. 6-24, fig.
trigger circuit (see 8-1, 8-4, 8-5, and 8-6).
malfunction 6 above))
in accessory box
b. Defective control handle. b. Switch control handles

(gunner's to command-
er's). Repair if handle
is defective (fig. 8-17,
8-18, 8-19, and 8-20).
25. Excessive drift (creep) a. Defective control handle. a Check potentiometers and
in traverse and/or circuit of handles. Re-
elevation. Test pro- pair if defective (fig.
cedure (TM 9-2350- 8-17, 8-18, 8-19, and
230-12) could not bal- 8-20).
ance system.
b. Loose or broken wires or b. Check system wiring and
connectors. connectors. Recheck
system balance
(table 8-2).
26 Stabilization mode does a. Defective control selector. a. Check STAB circuitry in

not operate but non- control selector (line
stab does. Stab light 25, fig. 6-24, fig.
illuminated in stabilized 8-1, and 8-14).
mode.
b. Defective gyro selector. b. Check gyro selector cir-
cuitry. Repair if defec-
tive (lines 25 and 30,
fig. 6-24, fig. 8-22,
and 8-23).
c. Loose or broken wiring c. Check wiring and connec-

or connectors. tors.
3-8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6

SYSTEM - Continued
26. Stabilization mode does d. Defective relays in ac- d. Check relays 4A2K2 and
not operate but non- cessory box. 4A7K3 in accessory
stab does. Stab light box (lines 18 and 25,
illuminated in stabilized fig. 6-24 and fig. 8-1).
mode - continued
27. In STAB mode gun/turret Amplifier unbalanced. Refer to checkout procedure

drift after handle is re- test points 8, 9, 10, and
turned to null position 11 with STAB switch on
(palm switch still de- (table 8-2).
pressed). System oper-
ates correctly in non-
stab mode
ELEVATING MECHANISM
(Figs. 9-1 thru 9-9)
28. Operation sluggish or a. Mechanism installed with a. Reinstall mechanism in

erratic in manual or incorrect shims or support, using shims to
power mode. damaged bearings in provide free movement
mounting support caus- of mechanism through-
ing binding as a result out entire operating
of misalignment. range. Replace bear-
ings if defective (fig. 5-5)
b. Damaged gears or gears b. Disassemble mechanism,

incorrectly shimmed. replace damaged gears,
and shim to correct
clearances.
c. Defective reverse lock c. Disassemble mechanism,

clutch or magnetic check clutches for oper-
clutch. ation. Repair or re-
place as necessary.
d. Defective gun trunnion d. Replace gun trunnion

bearings. bearings (fig. 12-4)
29. Manual handwheel turns a. Sheared spring pin in a. Replace spring pin (item 1,
freely, but mech- handwheel shaft. fig. 9-3)
anism is inoperative
b. Defective reverse lock b. Disassemble mechanism,
(No-Back) clutch or check clutches for
magnetic clutch. operation. Repair or
replace as necessary
c. Bent gearshaft, incorrect c. Disassemble mechanism,

shimming adjustment, check shimming adjust-
or worn or stripped ment, or replace bevel
teeth on bevel gearshaft gear set as necessary
and bevel gear
3-8.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
ELEVATING MECHANISM
(Figs. 9-1 thru 9-9) - Continued
30. Noisy operation. Incorrect shimming or Disassemble mechanism,

defective gears and check shimming adjust-
bearings. ments, and replace de-
fective gears and bear-
ings as necessary.
31. Failure to operate in a. Servomotor brushes or a. Replace brushes or

power mode. motor defective. servomotor.
b. Defective electrical contact b. Remove and inspect brush;

brush. replace if defective.
c. Malfunction in electric drive c. Check harnesses for voltage

control system. (28vdc) from clutch
brush to accessory box
(fig. 6-14) and check
harness from motor-
generator to servomotor
(continuity). (fig. 6-15).
Refer to electric drive
control troubleshooting.
3-8.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
ELEVATING MECHANISM
(Figs. 9-1 thru 9-9)
- Continued
31. Failure to operate in d. Defective magnetic clutch. d. To check clutch, disconnect

power mode - cont'd. lead to brush and connect
a test lead from dome
light lead to brush. Turn
vehicle master switch on
and listen for action of
clutch or check magnetic
clutch with ohmmeter.
Connect positive lead to
brush and negative lead
to mechanism housing.
Meter should read 2 ohms.
If different, clutch
pull-in coil or static
switch is defective.
Replace magnetic clutch.
31.1. Defective magnetic a. Defective clutch pull-in coil a. Using ohmmeter, connect
clutch. or static switch. positive lead to clutch slip
ring and negative lead to
magnetic body. Reading
should be 2 ohms.
Depress switch and read-
ing should be 50 ohms. If '
other than above reading
replace clutch.
b. Clutch plates engaged during b. If clutch plates teeth are

high speed elevation/ damaged, replace clutch.
depression (palm switch
depressed).
TURRET TRAVERSE MECHANISM

(Figs. 9-10 thru 9-21)
32. Operation sluggish or a. Mechanism installed with a. Reinstall mechanism and

erratic in manual or incorrect shims resulting shim to obtain 0.008 to
power mode. in insufficient backlash 0.013-inch backlash
between gear shaft and between gear shaft and
turret ring gear. turret ring gear.
b. Damaged gears or gears b. Disassemble mechanism,

incorrectly shimmed. replace damaged gears,
and shim to correct
clearances.
3-8.3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5

(Figs. 9-10 thru 9-21)
-Continued
32. Operation sluggish or c. Defective reverse lock, slip, c. Disassemble mechanism,

erratic in manual or or magnetic clutch. check clutches for opera-
power mode - cont'd. tion, and repair or re-
place, as necessary.
d. Damaged turret bearing d. Remove turret and replace

ring gear. turret bearing ring gear.
e. Gears not properly e. Refer to LO 9-2350-230-12

lubricated. for proper lubrication.
f. Turret traverse main bearing f. Remove turret; inspect,

contaminated. clean and lubricate main
bearings.
33. Manual drive handle a. Sheared shaft, keys, or a. Disassemble manual drive
turns freely but mech- gears in manual drive housing group. Replace
anism is inoperative. housing group. damaged components and
assemble with proper
shimming procedure.
b. Sheared drive gear shaft or b. Disassemble mechanism

defective reverse lock and repair or replace
clutch, slip clutch, or gear shaft or clutches.
magnetic clutch.
c. Clutch stuck. c. Disassemble, clean and

inspect clutch.
d. No-back installed backwards. d. Disassemble no-back and

install properly.
34. Noisy operation. a. Defective or improperly a. Disassemble mechanism and

shimmed gear ing, or check all shimming adjust
bearings. ments. Inspect all gear-
ing and replace chipped,
cracked, or worn gears.
Replace defective bearings.
b. Lack of lubrication. b. Refer to LO 9-2350-230-12

for proper lubrication.
c. Oil low in gear housing. c. Refer to LO 9-2350-230-12

for proper lubrication.
3-8.4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5

(Figs. 9-10 thru 9-21)
- Continued
35. Failure to operate in a. Defective electrical contact a. Remove and inspect brush;
power mode. brush. replace if defective.
b. Defective magnetic clutch. b. To check clutch, disconnect

lead to brush and connect
a test lead from dome
light lead to brush. Turn
vehicle master switch on
and listen for action of
clutch or check magnetic
clutch with ohmmeter.
Connect positive lead to
brush and negative lead
to mechanism housing.
Meter should read 2 ohms.
If different, clutch
pull-in coil or static
switch is defective.
Replace clutch.
c. Malfunction in electric drive c. Check harnesses from clutch

control system or power brush to accessory box
and accessory system. (Fig. 6-14) and harness
from motor-generator to
servo motor for voltage
or continuity (fig. 6-15).
Refer to electric drive
control troubleshooting.
d. Defective accessory box d. Check relay K1 and replace

relay K1. if defective.
35.1. Defective magnetic a. Defective clutch pull-in coil a. Using ohmmeter, connect
clutch. or static switch. positive lead to clutch
slip ring and negative
lead to magnetic body.
Reading should be 2 ohms.
Depress switch and read-
ing should be 50 ohms.
If other than above read-
ing, replace clutch.
b. Clutch plates engaged b. If clutch plates teeth are

during high speed traverse damaged, replace clutch.
(palm switch depressed).
3-9
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13

(Figs. 9-10 thru 9-21)
- Continued
36. Excessive backlash be- a. Incorrect shimming be- a. Use proper shims to ob-
tween spur drive gear- tween mechanism and tain 0.008 to 0.013 back-
shaft and turret bearing turret bearing outer lash between mechanism
outer ring gear. ring gear. and turret bearing gear.
(figs. 9-12 and 9-18 and/or
fig. 5-6).
b. Damaged anti-backlash b. Replace anti-backlash

gear or torsion bar. gear or torsion bar.
M81E1 GUN-LAUNCHER
(Figs. 10-3 thru 10-16)
37. Gun-launcher failed to Short circuit in firing Check firing circuit to de-
fire electrically after circuit. termine malfunction
firing probe and harness (figs. 7-4 and 7-5). If a
were replaced. short circuit was found,
also replace relay K1 in
conventional relay box
(fig. 7-7).
38. Breech-open/close limit a. Worn or defective switch a. Remove switch bracket, re-
switches inoperative. actuating plunger, move plunger group and
spring, or retaining replace defective parts.
ring.
b. Worn or defective motor b. Disassemble breech mech-

shutoff actuating rod. anism and replace motor
shutoff actuating rod.
39. Breech mechanism fails a. Defective hand crank a. Replace hand crank assem-
to open manually. assembly. bly.
b. Breech mechanism b. Completely disassemble

jammed. breech mechanism, in-
spect all components,
and repair or replace
as necessary.
40. Breech mechanism oper- a. Damaged teeth on gear

ation sluggish or er- segment. Completely disassemble
ratic. breech mechanism,
b. Breech carrier binds on clean and inspect all
spindle. components. Repair or
replace all items found
c. Damaged teeth in plane- worn or defective.
tary gear group.
3-10
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
M81E1 GUN-LAUNCHER
(Figs. 10-3 thru 10-16)
-Continued
40. Breech mechanism oper- d. Damaged cam paths and/

ation sluggish or er- or gear teeth on cam
ratic- Continued nut.
e. Damaged ball retainer Completely disassemble

segment or balls. breech mechanism,
clean and inspect all
f. Damaged ball nut and/ components. Repair or
or ball screw group. replace all items found
worn or defective.
g. Spindle slides galled.
h. Segment gear slide

galled.
i. Carrier guide key galled.
GUN MOUNT
(Figs. 10-18 thru 10-25)
41. Gun-launcher hangs out of a. Piston seized to front a. Free-up components,

battery. follower or recoil dress mating surfaces,
cylinder. or replace if badly
damaged.
b. Recoil sleeve seized to b. Free-up components,

front or rear follower. dress mating surfaces,
or replace if damaged.
42. Rapid loss of precharge a. Front and rear follower a. Replace seals.
pressure in recoil seals leaking (visible).
mechanism.
b. Piston seals leaking (not b. Replace seals.

visible - leakage into
spring washer set
chamber).
c. Front follower defective. c. Replace front follower.

Fluid escapes through
crack or porosity
defect.
3-11
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
GUN MOUNT
(Figs. 10-18 thru 10-25)
- Continued
43. Rupture plug in recoil a. Overpressure during re- a. Replace recoil mechanism
cylinder blows. coil caused by piston defective components.
jammed in front
follower or recoil
cylinder resulting in
hydrostatic lockup.
b. Overpressure during re- b. Replace safe-to-fire

coil caused by defec- indicator switch.
tive safe-to-fire indi-
cator limit switch.
c. Defective rupture plug. c. Replace rupture plug.
d. Automatic relief valve d. Check performance before

not functioning disassembly to deter-
properly. mine calibration and
repair (fig. 10-26.1).
Remove and repair
(fig. 10-26).
44. Gun-launcher recoils a. Insufficient fluid in recoil a. Replace recoil mechanism

with excessive force. mechanism even though defective components.
safe-to-fire indicator Replace safe-to-fire
pin is in proper posi- indicator.
tion (caused by mech-
anism internal leakage
or defective safe-to-
fire indicator).
b. Air emulsified in hyrau- b. Bleed off all pressure and

lic fluid caused by air replace hand pump or
entering hand pump tube.
pressure tube.
45. Gun-launcher returns to a. Excessive pressure in a. Replace safe-to-fire

battery with excessive recoil mechanism even indicator.
force. though safe-to-fire in-
dicator is in correct
position (defective
safe-to-fire indicator).
b. Defective buffer. b. Remove and repair buffer

(figs. 10-19 and 10-22).
46. Safe-to-fire indicator a. Indicator rod or stem a. Replace indicator rod or

pill shows high pres- failure. stem.
sure which can not be
relieved by bleed b. Internal damage in re- b. Disassemble recoil mech-
valve. Firing circuit coil mechanism. anism and replace de-
is open. fective parts.
3-12
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
COMMANDER'S POWER
ASSIST CUPOLA
47. Split hatch covers will not a. Loose or defective seals. a. Reseal or replace seals
close properly. (fig. 5-16).
b. Defective lock and/or b. Replace defective locks

catch assemblies. or catch assemblies
(fig. 5-16).
48. Cupola leaks. a. Loose or defective seals. a. Reseal or replace seals

(fig. 5-17).
b. Vision blocks not sealed b. Reseal vision blocks

properly. (fig. 5-17).
49. Cupola will not traverse a. No voltage to control a. If light does not illuminate,
or traverses erratically assembly. check for voltage (+28v)
in power mode. at control assembly
connector J1F.
b. Defective cupola electri- b. Troubleshoot cupola

cal system. electrical system.
c. Defective traverse c. Troubleshoot cupola

mechanism. traverse mechanism.
d. Defective cupola bearing d. Refer to figure 5-17 for

assembly. removal and figure 11-6
for repair of cupola
bearing assembly.
CUPOLA ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
CAUTION
Do not hold cupola rotation switch
energized if motor can be heard
"humming" and cupola does not
rotate. It will damage the motor.
50. Cupola does not rotate a. Loose or damaged a. Tighten all connectors.
when power control harnesses and con- Perform continuity
switch or switches on nectors. check and repair or re-
machine gun handle are place harnesses as
actuated. required (line 195, fig.
6-25).
b. Defective power control b. Perform continuity check

assembly or control on power control or
box. control box and repair
or replace as necessary
(line 195, fig. 6-25).
3-13
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
CUPOLA ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM - Continued
50. Cupola does not rotate c. Malfunction in control c. Disassemble, check

when power control box. components for func-
switch or switches on tional operation (line
machine gun handle are 195, fig. 6-25), and
actuated - continued replace those found
to be defective or
replace control box.
d. Defective switches, loose d. Replace switches, tighten

connectors, or open connectors, and per-
circuit in harness. form harness con
tinuity checks (line
195, fig. 6-25).
51. Cupola does not rotate Open circuit at terminal Perform continuity checks
when switches on board, contact ring, or and tighten, repair, or
machine gun handle brush holders. replace defective cir-
are actuated. cuits or components (line
195, fig. 6-25).
52. Cupola electrically rotates a. Defective wiring to ma- a. Check circuit to machine
in only one direction chine gun switches. gun (line 195, fig. 6-25
without pushing direc- and fig. 11-3).
tional switch.
b. Defective control box b. Check circuit (line 195,
and/or wiring. fig. 6-25 and fig. 11-3).
c. Defective control assem- c. Check control assembly

bly. (line 195, fig. 6-25
and fig. 11-3).
53. Cupola electrically rotates Defective electrical Check circuit (line 195,
in only one direction circuit. fig. 6-25 and fig. 11-3).
when directional switch-
es are actuated.
54. Cupola does not rotate a. Magnetic brake not re- a. Check circuit to brake
when electrically leased. (line 195, fig. 6-25
operated. and fig. 11-3).
b. Broken wires or solder b. Check circuit (line 195,

joints. fig. 6-25 and fig. 11-3).
3-14
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
CUPOLA ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM- Continued
54.1 (M551A1) Loud noise Magnetic clutch does not Replace relay (fig. 11.1-2).
created when rotation switch disengage because of defec-
actuated. tive relay K2 in traverse
mechanism control box.
54.2. (M551A1) Magnetic Cupola directional control Replace cable (fig. 11-13).
clutch engages when cupola cable severed or grounded
power switch is turned on. out.
54.3. (M551A1) Cupola tra- Cupola directional control Replace cable (fig. 11-13).
verses immediately when cable severed or grounded
power switch is turned on. out.
54.4. (M551A1) Magnetic a. Actuating finger on drive a. Straighten actuating

clutch engages before drive motor speed switch bent. finger (fig. 11.1-14).
motor slows.
b. Inoperative speed switch b. Replace switch assembly
assembly. (fig. 11.1-14).
54.5. (M551A1) Automatic a. Defective switch. a. Replace switch (fig. 11.1-9).

align/stop switch inoper-
ative.
b. Inoperative limit switch b. Replace defective switch(es)

(es) LS1, 2, or 3 in traverse (fig. 11.1-17).
mechanism.
c. Defective relay K1 or K2 c. Replace defective relay

in traverse mechanism (fig. 11.1-2).
control box.
d. Inoperative diode CR2 d. Replace diode (fig. 11.1-2)

in traverse mechanism
control box.
e. Open circuit in wiring e. Check connections; re-

harness or connector. place unserviceable parts.
54.6. (M551A1) Cupola drive Defective relay K1 in res- Replace relay (fig. 11.1-10)
motor runs at slow speed istor box.
only.
54.7. (M551A1) Cupola drive Defective resistor R1 in Replace resistor (fig. 11.1-10).
motor stops before front resistor box.
position during automatic
align cycle.
3-14.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
CUPOLA ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM- Continued
54.8. (MN551A1) Automatic Defective relay K1 or K2 in Replace defective relay

align mode stops when align traverse mechanism con- (fig. 11.1-2).
switch is released. trol box.
54.9. (M551A1) Automatic a. Defective align/stop a. Replace switch (fig. 11.1-9).

align function does not op- switch.
erate.
b. Defective semiconductor b. Replace semiconductor
CR1 in laser range finder (fig. 11.1-6).
control box.
c. Defective or malad- c. Adjust switch (par a. 11.1-19b).

justed limit switch LS1 in
traverse mechanism.
3-14.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
CUPOLA TRAVERSE
MECHANISM
55. Operation sluggish or a. Mechanism installed with a. Position mechanism to

erratic during elec- incorrect backlash. obtain 0.006 to 0.010-
trical or manual inch backlash between
operation. mechanism gear and
cupola ring gear
(fig. 5-19).
b. Damaged gears. b. Disassemble mechanism

and replace damaged
gears.
c. Magnetic clutch shimmed c. Follow shimming proce-

incorrectly or defec- dure in figure 11-11.
tive. Repair or replace mag-
netic clutch as necessary
(fig. 11-9).
d. Governor centrifugal d. Adjust switch (fig. 11-8).

switch not adjusted
properly.
e. Defective safety switch. e. Replace safety switch

(fig. 5-19).
f. Defective electric motor f. Replace brushes or motor

brushes or motor. (fig. 11-8).
56. Noisy operation. Incorrect shimming or de- Disassemble mechanism

fective gears and bearings. (figs. 11-7 through 11-11),
check shimming adjust-
ments, or replace
defective gears and
bearings.
57. When operating electrically Incorrect rotating switch Position rotating switch of
and releasing switch, adjustment. centrifugal switch away
brake action takes place from housing (fig. 11-8).
at too high a motor
speed.
58. When operating electrically a. Incorrect rotating switch a. Position rotating switch of
and releasing switch, adjustment. centrifugal switch to-
brake action does not ward housing (fig. 11-8).
take place.
b. Malfunction in control b. Check relay K2 and wir-
box. ing (line 198, fig. 6-25).
3-15
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
CUPOLA TRAVERSE
MECHANISM - Continued
59. Traverse mechanism a. Defective manual tra- a. Inspect for looseness or

does not operate in verse handle group. broken part and repair
manual mode. part as required
(fig. 11-7).
b. Defective cam pins. b. Inspect and replace as

required (fig. 11-7).
c. Incorrect safety switch c. Check adjustment (fig. 5-19).

adjustment.
60. In manual mode, cupola Loose parts of manual Inspect for looseness and
rotates opposite traverse handle group. repair as required (fig. 11-7).
of intended direction.
61. Magnetic brake does not a. Incorrect shimming ad- a. Shim correctly (fig. 11-11).
release when operating justment.
electrically.
b. Low voltage. b. Check voltage (28vdc).
Voltage less than 18vdc
could prevent magnet
from drawing the non-
rotating disc to the
magnet.
c. Malfunction in control c. Remove and repair control

box. box.
d. Broken wire or cable. d. Check wiring (line 195,

fig. 6-25 and fig. 11-3).
Repair or replace as,
required.
62. Brake does not hold in Broken springs in magnet Replace as required (fig. 11-9).
locked position. body..
3-16
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
CHAPTER 4
MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND REPAIR DATA
Section 4-1. MAINTENANCE
4-1. General items of issue and serviceable parts will

be returned to stock. Parts or assemblies
a. Materiel received for repair should be which can not be repaired, selective-fitted,
thoroughly cleaned to facilitate inspection and repair. or reclaimed to the standards contained in
this manual will be salvaged or new parts
used to replace them.
b. Refer to TM 9-2350-230-35/1 and TM 9-237 for
aluminum welding instructions and welding materials.
(2) If a required new part is not available,
reconditioning of the old part should be
c. Paint surfaces as prescribed in TM 9-213. considered. Such part will be inspected
carefully after reconditioning to determine
d. Maintain bearings in accordance with TM 9-214. its suitability and probable service life.
Replacement parts should be
4-2. Repair Maintenance requisitioned immediately.
a. Disassembly and Assembly Procedure. (3) Replace the following parts during repair:
(1) Complete disassembly of a component is (a) Damaged keys, screws, washers, or

not always necessary to make a required nuts.
repair or replacement.
(b) Gaskets, packings, wipers, and
(2) In disassembling a unit, first remove as seals.
many major components and
subassemblies as possible. These are (c) Lockwire.
further disassembled into individual parts.
Reassemble in reverse manner.
(d) Springs if broken, kinked, or do not
conform to inspection and repair
(3) Tag parts such as shims, bearings, and data.
electrical harnesses to facilitate
reassembly.
(4) Deprocess turret traverse bearing.
(4) Mark gears on mating teeth by
scribemarks, dye, indelible ink, or paint to c. Replacement of Electrical Parts.
be certain of correct positioning at
assembly. Avoid use of chalk or crayon (1) Before removing any unserviceable parts
for marking because of the lack of requiring unsoldering or removal of
permanence. several wires, code terminals to which
they are connected.
(5) Record repair or replacement.
(2) When making voltage and continuity
b. Replacement of Parts. checks be sure connectors are tight and
solder joints correctly soldered. Open
circuit can occur in enclosed
(1) Unserviceable assemblies that are
beyond repair will be broken down into
4-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
relay, within connectors, at cold solder b. A number (unit designation) represents in which
joints, add even in turret assembly or box a component is contained. It may be
electrical/harnesses if they have been omitted when the unit is obvious by context.
subjected to severe abuse.
c. Subassemblies (printed circuit boards) are
(3) Refer to figures 4-1 and 4-2 for designated by the letter A and a sequential number. If
replacement of single lead, receptacle, no subassembly is indicated, the component is
and plug connectors which are typical assembled directly to the unit.
types used in this turret.
d. A component is represented with a letter (s);
(4) When determined necessary to replace then a sequential number.
insulating sleeving or a solder sleeve,
refer to figure 4-3. e. A typical example is: 4A7K1
4-3. Turret Electrical Component Designations

4 - Designates unit 4 (accessory box)
a. Electrical components in this manual are coded
A7 - Designates a subassembly (printed circuit board)
by symbol or unit designations. Table 4-1 provides
K1 - Designates a relay (the component being identified)
information to identify and/or locate components by
these designations.
So, component 4Ak1 is a relay on a printed circuit board
mounted in accessory box.
Table 4-1. Turret Electrical Component Symbol

Symbol Designation Component
A w/number subassembly/printed circuit board

BT w/number battery
C w/number capacitor
CB w/number circuit breaker
CR w/number diode semiconductor
DC-dc direct current
DS w/number light
E w/number terminal connection
F w/number fuse
J w/number receptacle connector
K w/number relay
KT dump timer
L w/number coil (inductance)
LS w/number limit switch
N. C. normally closed
N. O. normally open
P w/number plug connector
PTT push-to-test
Q w/number transistor
R w/number resistor
S w/number switch
T w/number transformer
TD w/number time delay
TP w/letter test point - pin location
V volt
V w/number vacuum tube
W w/number harness
4-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Table 4-1. Turret Electrical Component Symbols-Continued
Unit Designation Assembly/Box

1 test set
2 amplifier integrator
3 electric drive power supply
4 accessory box
5 motor-generator
6 elevation servomotor
7 traverse servomotor
8 commander's control handle
9 gunner's control handle
10 gun and turret control selector
11 gyro selector
12 rate sensing unit
13 conventional weapon relay control
14 U-cord cable assembly
15 loader's control
16 reticle power
17 air compressor and dump timer
18 gun elevation/depression limit and traverse
interference switches
19 telescope reticles
20 reticle dimmer
21 safe-to-fire indicator
22 cupola traverse mechanism
23 cupola control
24 cupola traverse drive motor
25 grenade launcher control
Section 4-2. INSPECTION AND REPAIR DATA
4-4. General d. The letter "L" following the fit of mating parts
indicates a loose (clearance) fit. The letter "T" following
a. Inspection and repair data is included in repair the fit of mating parts indicates a tight (interference) fit.
chapters. Wear limits on data indicate the point to
which parts may be worn before replacement. Normally e. Inspection and repair data information for parts
all parts which have not been worn beyond dimensions that are defective from physical damage or deterioration
given in the "Repair limit" Column, or 'damaged by are not included in the repair chapters. Refer to
corrosion, will be approved for service. paragraph 4-6 for electrical parts inspection procedures.
b. An asterisk (*) in the "Repair limit" column 4-5. Mechanical Parts Inspection
indicates a part should be replaced when worn beyond
the dimensions given in the "Size and fit of new parts" a. Castings. Inspect for cracks, breaks, or
column. fractures and inspect interiors for scores and burs.
c. A double asterisk (**) in "Repair limit" column b. Covers. Inspect for punctures or deep dents.
indicates parts may be used if selective fitting the Also check for damaged fastener devices, corrosion,
clearance between two parts meets the required and damage to finish.
clearance shown in the "Size and fit of new parts"
column.
4-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 4-1. Replacement of Connectors (1 of 2)
4-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 4-2. Replacement of connectors (2 of 2)
4-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 4-3. Replacement of solder sleeve or insulation sleeving
c. Gears. connections. Inspect for contacts that are broken,

deformed or out of alignment.
(1) Inspect for broken, chipped or badly worn
teeth. b. Printed Circuit Boards. Inspect for any evidence
of damage, such as burns, breaks, or cracks. Inspect
(2) Inspect gear bodies for cracks and for complete moisture sealant coating. Inspect for loose
deformation. mounting.
(3) Inspect and remove minor nicks with a c. Switches. Perform continuity check to assure
fine stone or crocus cloth that has been proper operation of switch. Check to see that switch
dipped in dry-cleaning solvent or mineral moves or rotates properly without binding. Check for
spirits. proper soldering.
d. Splined Parts. Inspect splines and shafts for d. Soldered Terminal Connection.
cracks, fractures, scores, and deformation.
(1) Inspect for cold-solder or "rosin" joints.
e. Threaded Parts. Inspect all screws, bolts, nuts, These joints present a porous or dull,
and threaded holes for worn or damaged threads. rough appearance. Check for strength of
bond using a point of a tool.
4-46. Electrical or Electronic Components
Inspection (2) Examine for excessive solder, protrusions
from the joints, pieces adhering to
adjacent insulation, and particles lodged
a. Connectors. Inspect connector bodies for
between joints or other parts.
broken parts, deformed shells or clamps. Inspect for
corroded, poorly soldered, loose, or broken terminal
4-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
(3) Inspect for insufficient solder and h. Variable Resistors. Inspect for physical
unsoldered strands of wire protruding from damage. Rotate shaft, where possible to determine
components at joints. whether the action is too rough, too loose, or too tight.
e. Transformers and Reactors. Check all parts for j. Wiring. Check insulation for physical damage,
signs of excessive heating, physical damage to case, breakage, charring, or evidence of melted insulation.
cracked or broken insulators and other irregularities. Check for proper insulation in relation to adjacent wiring.
Also check for corroded, poorly soldered, or loose Check for damaged insulating sleeving.
terminals and loose, broken, or missing hardware.
4-7. Inspection and Repair Data Reference Index
f. Electron Tubes. Inspect for deformed, broken,
or misaligned base contacts. Refer to Table 4-2.
g. Tube Sockets. Check for damaged or broken

contacts, loose or poorly soldered connections.
Table 4-2. Inspection and Repair Data Reference Index
Item Description Figure
Elevating Mechanism 9-3 through 9-6

Turret Traverse Mechanism 9-10 through 9-17
Gun-Launcher Breech Mechanism 10-13 through 10-16
Cupola Traverse Mechanism 11-7 through 11-10
4-7/(4-8 blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
CHAPTER 5
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF TURRET AND TURRET

MAJOR COMPONENTS
5-1. General
Refer to Chapter 4 for maintenance, inspection, and repair data prior to removal of the following components.
Table 5-1. Turret and Turret Major Components - Removal/Installation
Assembly or Component Section Reference

Adjust Replace
Turret and Turret Traverse Bearing

Assembly 5-1 Figs. 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4
Gun- Launcher Elevating and Turret

Traverse Mechanisms 5-2 Figs. 5-5, 5-6
Gun-Launcher with Mount 5-3 Figs. 5-7, 5-8, 5-9
Gun-Launcher from/in Mount 5-4 Figs. 5-10, 5-11, 5-12
Commander's Power Assist Cupola 5-5 Fig. 5-20 Figs. 5-13, 5-14, 5-15,
5-16, 5-17, 5-18, 5-19
5-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 5-1. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION- TURRET AND TURRET TRAVERSE BEARING ASSEMBLY
Figure 5-1. (Superseded) Removal/installation - turret (1 of 3)
5-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Fig. 2-2-5
STEP 15
Figure 5-2. Removal/installation - turret (2 of 3)
5-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figs. 2-1 and 2-2
Figure 5-3. Removal/installation - turret (3 of 3)
5-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figs. 6-12 and 6-13
(Fig. 6-12)
(Fig. 5-5) (Fig. 6-17)
(Fig. 5-6)
(Fig. 6-20)
(Fig. 12-9)
(Fig. 12-11) Fig. 5-3
(Fig. 5-2)
(FIG. 6-10)
(Fig. 12-2)
Figure 5-4. Removal/installation - turret traverse bearing assembly
5-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Section 5-2. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - GUN-LAUNCHER ELEVATING AND TURRET TRAVERSE MECHANISMS
(Fig. 6-12)
(Fig. 6-13)
(Fig. 6-13)
Figure 5-5. Removal/installation - elevating mechanism and mounting bracket.
5-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
(Fig. 6-12)
(Fig. 6-13)
Figure 5-6. Removal/installation - traverse mechanism
5-7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Section 5-3. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - GUN-LAUNCHER AND MOUNT
Table 5-1.1. Removal/Installation - Gun-Launcher and Mount
STEP PROCEDURE FIGURE

1 Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 and remove the following components.
A. 7-62-mm machine gun, machine gun mount, and

ammunition spent brass chute and bag.
B. M119 or M127 telescope headrest and telescope.
C. XM44 or XM44E1 periscope body and headrest.
D. XM44 or XM44E1 periscope head and linkage.
E. Recoil guard cover and screen.
F. Loading tray bracket assembly.
G. Depression stop screw.
2 Disconnect elevation limit switch harness connector and remove 5-7

elevation limit switches.
3 Remove two screws and disconnect transmitter cover door 5-7

control assembly and bracket from turret.
4 Remove ballistic curtain . Two left-bottom nuts also retain 5-7

breech mechanism harness. Right-top of curtain is retained
by one screw of telescope mount.
5 Disconnect rate sensing unit harness connector at rate sensing 5-8

unit and move harness from gun mount area to prevent
entanglement.
6 Disconnect safe-to-fire indicator harness connector. 5-8
7 Remove safe-to-fire indicator. 5-8
8 Disconnect transmitter door switch harness connectors. 6-17
9 Disconnect ground strap on left side of shield.
10 Remove two screws and disconnect limit switch (LS3) bracket 5-8
from rate sensing unit bracket. Move switch with bracket and 10-27
harness from gun mount area to prevent entanglement.
11 Disconnect breech mechanism harness at connector and junction. 5-8
12 Remove harness bracket.
13 Turn closed breech scavenger system (CBSS) air shutoff valve 5-8
OFF (down) position. Bleed any remaining air in hoses with
manual discharge valve.
14 Disconnect CBSS manual discharge valve-to-telescope tube hose 5-8

assembly at manual discharge valve and place hose over top of mount.
5-8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Table 5-1.1. Removal/Installation - Gun-Launcher and Mount - Continued
15 Disconnect CBSS telescope tube at striker housing. 5-8
16 Elevate weapon approximately 90 mils and relieve hydraulic pressure. Close valve and
drain reservoir. Return weapon to zero mils.
17 Remove buffer bleed line. 5-8
18 Remove rate sensing unit bracket and attached telescoping tube body. 5-8
NOTE
Insure that tube assembly, retaining ring, packing assembly, and springs
remain in body.
19 Remove recoil guard assembly with attached hand pump. 10-18
20 Remove check valve and seals. Remove striker housing. 10-27
21 Secure buffer head to gun mount with lock wire. 5-9
22 Remove gun dust shield, seal, and gasket. 5-9
23 Remove two screws and washers from top of gun shield and install two eye bolts. 5-9
24 With muzzle plug installed, install chain hoist from muzzle to one eye bolt. 5-9
25 Screw unlocking tool 4933-915-8531 into thrust collar to unlock spring loaded ball lock
and, using spanner wrench 4933-930-1843, loosen thrust collar 2-1/4 turns.
WARNING
Thrust collar is not to be removed from gun tube or loosened more than
necessary. Gun tube may slip out of recoil housing when handling gun
mount.
26 Move breech mechanism and recoil sleeve out of battery with chain hoist until breech 5-9
motor will clear buffer when breech mechanism is rotated.
WARNING
Do not move breech mechanism or sleeve more than noted above or in

following operations. An excessive imbalance to rear of gun trunnions
will create a hazard to personnel when handling gun mount.
27 Slowly rotate breech mechanism in a clockwise direction (as viewed 5-9

from rear) until handcrank is at 9 o'clock position at left side of
recoil cylinder.
28 Install gun-launcher holding tool at left side of recoil cylinder 5-9.1

housing (refer to fig. 2-2.4 for fabrication of tool). Use two
screws and holes for coaxial machine gun spent brass chute
bracket to attach tool.
5-9
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Table 5-1.1. Removal/Installation - Gun-Launcher and Mount - Continued
29 Apply approximately 100 pounds of weight at muzzle end of gun- 5-9

launcher tube.
30 Install lifting sling on gun shield eye bolts.
31 Disconnect elevating mechanism electrical connectors and 5-9.1

disconnect elevating mechanism with mounting bracket attached.
32 Remove gun shield left and right caps. 5-9.1
33 Carefully move gun-launcher and mount out of turret and lower 5-9.1
onto wood blocks or improvised gun-launcher and mount
support fixture.
34 Remove coupling key nut, lock washer, and coupling mount key
from coupling.
35 To remove gun-launcher from mount apply sling and slide gun-

launcher out of mount.
NOTE
After recoil seals have been replaced (para 10-5) (fig. 10-24) and following
assembly of gun-launcher but before gun-launcher and mount are re-
installed in vehicle, a static pressure test should be made in order to
check for leaks of recoil mechanism.
STATIC TEST PROCEDURE
A. Remove relief valve tube assembly and elbow from top of gun mount.
B. Remove hydraulic check valve tube assembly and elbow from bottom of gun
mount.
C. Temporarily plug top hole and install M3 oil pump or equivalent to bottom
hole.
D. Remove plug at top rear of gun mount and install a pressure gage of at least
1000 psi capacity.
E. Pump up to 850-900 psi; hold for 10 to 15 minutes. Check for oil leak; not to
exceed three drops in 5 minutes. Insure that all air is bled from system.
F. Reduce pressure disconnect oil pump and gage. Install tubes, elbows, and
plug previously removed.
Installation - Reverse numerical sequence.
NOTE
Improvised support may be removed at an appropriate time of

disassembly if gun mount is removed from turret for repair. If gun mount
is being installed, support may be removed when trunnion bearing right
and left cap are secured (fig. 5-9). Support is removed and gun mount
assembled ill reverse of numerical sequence above.
5-10
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
WE 70866
Figure 5-7. Removal/installation - 152 mm gun-launcher and mount from/in turret (1 of 4)
5-10.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
5-10.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
(Table 10-10)
(Fig. 10-27)
5-10.3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C12
(Table 2-1)
5-10.4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 5-4. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION-GUN-LAUNCHER FROM/IN MOUNT
5-2. Removal c. Replace pressure vessel assembly cannon

M81E1 (NSN 1025-00-124-7385) 11578300 at 800
a. Refer to figures 5-10 through 5-12. rounds along with detent assembly (p 10-42).
5-3. Installation
b. Refer to Chapter 4 for maintenance, inspection
and repair data.
Refer to Table 5-2.
Table 5-2. Installation- Gun-Launcher in Mount
1 Install gun-launcher in mount, aligning gun torque key bracket with

recoil guard key. 5-12
2 Align gun-launcher breech coupling to recoil mechanism sleeve and

install lock and retainer. 5-11
3 Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 for checking and adjusting

152 MM gun-launcher recoil mechanism.
WARNING
Make certain all personnel are clear of immediate area around gun-
launcher and mount. As hand pump is actuated, gun-launcher will move
slowly, stop, and then accelerate and quickly move into battery with just a
few additional strokes of hand pump.
NOTE
The Ammunition Detent Assembly - Type m is installed after gun-launcher
is installed in mount. Refer to figures 10-13 through 10-13.3 for
installation procedures.
4 Reverse numerical sequence 7 through 1 and install remaining parts. 5-11 and
5-10
NOTE
Tighten thrust collar to 500 pound-feet.
5-11
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Figure 5-10. Removal/installation - 152 mm gun-launcher from/in mount (1 of 3)
5-12
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Fig. 5-9
Figure 5-11. Removal/installation - 152mm gun-launcher from/in mount (2 of 3)
5-13
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Fig. 5-9
Table 5-2
Figure 5-12. Removal/installation - 152mm gun-launcher from/in mount (3 of 3)
5-14
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 10
Section 5-5. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - COMMANDER'S POWER ASSIST CUPOLA
NOTE
Cupola of M551 vehicle is illustrated in figure 5-13 through 5-18.
Figure 5-13. Removal/installation - commander's power assist cupola (1 of 7).
5-15
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 10
Fig. 5-20
Fig. 11-2
Figure 5-14. Removal/installation - commander's power assist cupola (2 of 7).
5-16
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 10
Figure 5-14.1. Removal/installation - commander’s power assist cupola (3 of 7).

Note
Note. Titles of figures 5-15, 5-16, 5-17, and 5-18 are changed to read 4 of 7, 5 of 7, 6 of 7, and 7 of 7, respectively.
5-16.2 blank/5-16.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 5-15. Removal/installation - commander's power assist cupola (3 of 6)
5-17
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
5-18
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 11-3
Fig. 11-6
5-19
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Fig. 11-4
Fig. 11-5
Fig. 5-19
Fig. 11-3

5-20
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 10
Figure 5-19. Removal/installation - cupola traverse mechanism (M551 shown).
5-21
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C 10
Fig. 5-14
Figure 5-20. Installing cupola electric contact ring and brush assemblies
5-22
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
CHAPTER 6
REPAIR OF TURRET ELECTRIC CONTACT RING, ELECTRICAL

ACCESSORIES, AND WIRING HARNESSES
6-1. General b. Section 6-6 contains schematics for the

a. Refer to chapter 4 for maintenance, inspection, complete turret electrical system. These are to be used
and repair data prior to repair of components in table 6- when troubleshooting (table 3-1).
1.
Table 6-1. Turret Electric Contact Ring, Electrical Accessories, and Wiring Harnesses -Replace and Repair
Reference
Assembly or Component Section Replace Repair Adjust
Turret Electric Contact Ring 6-1 Fig. 6-1 Figs. 6-2, 6-3, 6-4 Figs. 6-1, 6-3
Turret Ventilating Fan 6-2 Fig. 6-5
Azimuth Indicator Power
Supply Switch Assembly 6-3 Fig. 6-6
Circuit Cutout Box 6-4 Fig. 6-7
Wiring Harnesses 6-5 Figs. 6-8 Figs. 4-1, 4-2, 4-3
through
6-23
Section 6-1. REPAIR OF TURRET ELECTRIC CONTACT RING
Fig. 8-27
Figure 6-1. Removal/installation - turret electric contact ring
6-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Fig. 6-1
Figure 6-2. Disassembly/assembly - turret electric contact ring (1 of 2)
6-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Fig. 6-3
Figure 6-3. Disassembly/assembly - turret electric contact ring (2 of 2)
6-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 6-4. Turret electric contact ring electrical schematic
6-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Section 6-2. REPAIR OF TURRET VENTILATING FAN
Figure 6-5. Repair of turret ventilating fan
6-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Section 6-3. REPAIR OF AZIMUTH INDICATOR POWER SUPPLY SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Figure 6-6. Repair of azimuth indicator power supply switch assembly
6-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Section 6-4. REPAIR OF CIRCUIT CUTOUT BOX
Figure 6-7. Repair of circuit cutout box
6-7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Section 6-5. REPAIR OF WIRING HARNESSES
6-2. General b. Figure 6-8 illustrates typical turret harness

a. Turret electrical block diagrams are provided on straps to retain wiring harnesses. To prevent loss of
figure 6-8, 6-8.1 and 6-8.2 to illustrate various turret hardware or strap, install strap and hardware after
electrical wiring systems. removal of harness.
6-8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 6-9. Removal/installation - turret harness straps
6-9
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
FIGURE 6-9
Fig. 6-11
Figure 6-10. Removal/installation - power distribution wiring harnesses
6-10
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Fig. 4-1
Fig. 4-2
Figure 6-11. Power distribution wiring harnesses wiring schematic
6-11
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Fig. 6-9
Fig. 6-14
Figure 6-12. Removal/installation - electric drive control wiring harnesses (1 of 2)
6-12
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Fig. 6-9
Fig. 6-15
Figure 6-13. Removal/installation - electric drive control wiring harnesses (2 of 2)
6-13
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C12
Fig. 4-1
Figure 6-14. Electric (drive control wiring harness wiring schematics (1 of 2)

6-14
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Figure 6-15. Electric drive control wiring harness wiring schematics (2 of 2)
6-15
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Fig. 6-9
Fig. 6-18
Figure 6-16. Removal/installation - conventional weapons system wiring harnesses (1 of 2)

6-16
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C12
Figure 6-16.1. Tie-down of harness assembly - 11635550
6-16.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Fig. 6-9
Fig. 6-19
FIGURE 6-16.1
Figure 6-17. Removal/installation - conventional weapons system wiring harnesses (2 of 2)

6-16.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 6-17.1. Removal/installation - wiring harness shield (M551A1 only)
6-17
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Figs. 4-1 AND 4-2
Figure 6-18. Conventional weapons system wiring harness wiring schematics (1 of 2)
6-18
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
FIGURE 4-1
Fig. 4-2
Figure 6-19. (Superseded) Conventional weapons system wiring harness wiring schematics (2 of 2)
6-19
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Fig. 4-2
Fig. 6-9
Figure 6-20. (Superseded) Removal/installation - communication system wiring harness
6-20
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 6-21. (Added) Removal/installation - open breech bore scavenging system harness
6-21
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 6-22. (Added) Removal/installation - grenade projector wiring harnesses
6-22
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Figure 6-23. Removal/installation - closed breech scavenging system harness
6-23
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 6-6. TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SCHEMATICS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
6-3. Makeup, Organization, and Use of Schematics Each vertical line contains no more than one relay coil.
The line location of each set of contacts of that relay is
a. General. Use schematics, figures 6-24 through indicated in parentheses below the line number. Each
6-33, when troubleshooting the turret electrical system set of relay contacts indicates the line location of its
(table 3-1). Use schematics, figures 6-34 through 6-37, relay coil in parentheses next to the contacts.
when troubleshooting the OPFOR turret electrical
system. These schematics show a complete function d. Symbols and Pin Identification. Each
from battery positive (+) at top of schematic, to battery connection has been labeled its unit designation
negative (-) at the bottom. When a circuit contains component symbol and number, and pin identification.
more components than can be shown on one vertical A complete list of unit and component symbols are in
line, the circuit will be continued on the next vertical line table 4-1. For components mounted to printed circuit
to the right (from top to bottom). boards, and other board connections, only the pin
number is shown. The complete number can be
b. Horizontal Arrangement. An exception to the constructed by prefixing the pin number with J. then with
vertical arrangement was necessary to show circuits of the component symbol and number, then prefix with unit
the electric drive control system. For this system the designator (para 4-3).
schematics have been divided horizontally. The
traverse channel is along the top of the schematic and e. How to Locate a Circuit or Relay. To find a
the elevation channel below. Positive lines are shown circuit for a given function, look for the circuit function
above each channel; negative lines below each channel. across top of schematics (fig. 6-24 through 6-33). To
Signal flow in each channel proceeds left to right. find a relay, or other electronic component, check table
6-2 for the line location.
c. Line Location Number. Each vertical position
has been assigned a number. These numbers are at the
bottom and are continuous across the four schematics.
Table 6-2. Line Locations of Components and Contacts

NOTE: To identify the unit number (name of assembly or box), see table 4-1.
Sub- Relay
Unit assembly Subassembly Subassembly Relay Line Locations
No. No. Description Line Location No. Coil Contacts
2 A1 Traverse power amplifier 442 -- -- -- -- --

A2 Traverse integrator 421 332 -- -- -- --
A3 Elevation power amplifier 442 -- -- -- -- --
A4 Elevation integrator 421 332 -- -- -- --
CR1 403 -- -- -- -- --
CR2 403 -- -- -- -- --
CR3 403 -- -- -- -- --
CR4 403 -- -- -- -- --
R1 402 -- -- -- -- --
R2 402 -- -- -- -- --
R3 449 -- -- -- -- --
R4 449 -- -- -- -- --
C1 422 -- -- -- -- --
C2 422 -- -- -- -- --
6-24
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Table 6-2. Line Locations of Components and Contacts - Continued
Sub- Relay
2 V1 448 -- -- -- -- -- --
V2 448 -- -- -- -- -- --
V3 448 -- -- -- -- -- --
V4 448 -- -- -- -- -- --
3 297 -- -- -- -- -- --
4 CB1 4 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR1 158 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR2 155 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- K1 140 162 --
A1 Relay printed circuit board -- -- -- K1 137 156 158
-- -- -- K2 14 18 19
A2 Relay " " " -- -- -- K1 16 304 --
-- -- K2 17 25 134
A3 Relay " " " -- -- -- K1 80 81 --
-- -- -- K2 144 142 --
A4 Relay " " " -- -- -- K1 21 77 --
-- -- -- K2 33 62 --
A5 Relay " " " -- -- -- K1 7 10 301
-- -- -- K2 34 77 77
A6 Relay " " " -- -- -- K1 12 16 131
-- -- -- K2 39 25 --
-- -- -- K3 24 426 428
-- -- -- K4 18 357 357
A7 Relay " “ “ -- -- -- K1 20 353 353
-- -- -- K2 168 388 --
-- -- -- K3 25 401 401
-- -- -- K4 26 388 --
-- -- -- K2 142 146 --
-- -- -- K3 139 136 --
-- -- -- K4 19 139 --
-- -- -- K2 166 381 386
-- -- -- K3 Not Used --
-- -- -- K4 Not Used --
A10 Diode “ “ “ -- -- -- -- -- -- --
A11 Timer " " " 12 135 -- -- -- -- --
A12 Traverse summing amplifier 382 -- -- -- -- -- --
A13 Elevation summing amplifier 382 -- -- -- -- -- --
A14 Shaping and filter assembly 362 362 -- -- -- -- --
A15 Elevation summing assembly 397 -- -- -- -- -- --
A16 Traverse summing assembly 386 397 -- -- -- -- --
6-25
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Sub- Relay
5 AR1 Elevation control amplifier 462 -- -- -- -- -- --

AR2 Traverse control amplifier 462 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- Elevation generator 468 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- Traverse generator 468 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- Motor 152 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- TD1 148 149 --
-- -- -- K1 146 152 --
-- -- -- K2 149 153 --
6 -- Armature 476 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- Fans and fields 158 -- -- -- -- -- --
7 -- Armature 476 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- Fans and fields 155 -- -- -- -- -- --
8 S1 Thumb switch -- -- -- -- -- -- --
S2 Trigger switch 79 -- -- -- -- -- --
S3 Palm switch 20 -- -- -- -- -- --
R1-9 340 -- -- -- -- -- --
R10-18 340 -- -- -- -- -- --
9 S1 Thumb switch -- -- -- -- -- -- --
S2 Trigger switch 77 -- -- -- -- -- --
S3 Palm switch 19 -- -- -- -- -- --
R1-9 348 -- -- -- -- -- --
R10-18 348 -- -- -- -- -- --
10 S1 Power switch 5 -- -- -- -- -- --
S2 Stabilized mode switch 25 -- -- -- -- -- --
S3 Weapon selector switch 29 -- -- -- -- -- --
DS1-CR1 Power light 8 -- -- -- -- -- --
DS2-CR2 Stabilized mode 24 -- -- -- -- -- --
DS3-CR3 Missile 30 -- -- -- -- -- --
DS4-CR4 Coaxial 29 -- -- -- -- -- --
DS5-CR5 Off 28 -- -- -- -- -- --
DS6-CR6 Conventional 27 -- -- -- -- -- --
DS7-CR7 Ready light 18 -- -- -- -- -- --
11 CR1 31 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR2 24 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- K1 30 25 --
-- -- -- K2 23 327 327
-- -- -- K3 22 327 327
12 324 324 -- -- -- -- --
6-26
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Sub- Relay
13 -- -- -- K1 78 68 85
-- -- -- K2 121 123 --
-- -- -- K3 106 62 106
-- -- -- K5 122 62 106
-- -- -- K6 40 43 71
-- -- -- K8 118 128 --
-- -- -- K9 98 85 --
-- -- -- K10 107 104 --
-- -- -- K11 68 94 --
-- -- -- K12 95 76 --
-- -- -- K13 77 77 --
-- -- -- K14 112 112 113
-- -- -- K15 111 102 --
-- -- -- K16 100 100 102
-- -- -- TD1 79 78 --
-- -- -- TD2 120 121 --
-- -- -- TD3 110 111 --
CB1 122 -- -- -- -- -- --
R1 71 -- -- -- -- -- --
R3 85 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR18 116 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR22 120 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR3 122 -- -- -- -- -- --
14 LS-2 Breech closed limit switch 62 92 -- -- -- -- --
LS-4 Breech open limit switch 65 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- Firing mechanism 87 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- Breech drive motor 125 -- -- -- -- -- --
15 S1 Breech switch 115 116 -- -- -- -- --
S2 Safety switch 62 85 118 -- -- -- --
R1 Collective protector -- -- -- -- -- -- --
DS1 Ready light 71 -- -- -- -- -- --
S3 Compressor switch 43 -- -- -- -- -- --
16 S1 Emergency switch 51 54 -- -- -- -- --
BT1 54 -- -- -- -- -- --
BT2 52 -- -- -- -- -- --
R1 Dimmer resistor 51 -- -- -- -- -- --
DS1 Ready light 74 -- -- -- -- -- --
17 KT Dump Timer 43 -- -- -- -- -- --
Pressure switch 44 -- -- -- -- -- --
Heater 46 -- -- -- -- -- --
Motor 47 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- K1 44 45 47
6-27
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Sub- Relay
18 No. 1 19°elevation 166 -- -- -- -- -- --

No. 2 3.2°depression 168 -- -- -- -- -- --
No. 3 8°depression 165 -- -- -- -- -- --
No. 4 2.7°depression 170 -- -- -- -- -- --
LS-5 Traverse interference (rear deck) 168 170 -- -- -- -- --
19 Conventional reticule 51 -- -- -- -- -- --
Missile reticule 52 -- -- -- -- -- --
20 -- -- -- -- K1 56 51 51
R1 Dimming resistor 51 -- -- -- -- -- --
21 -- Pressure 68 -- -- -- -- -- --
LS-3 Out-of-battery 109 -- -- -- -- -- --
22 CR1 196 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR2 197 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR3 203 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR4 200 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- K1A 194 206 --
-- -- -- K1B 195 206 --
-- -- -- K2 198 201 202
23 S1 Rotation (travel direction) 194 -- -- -- -- -- --
S2 Power switch 194 -- -- -- -- -- --
R1 190 -- -- -- -- -- --
DS1 Power 190 -- -- -- -- -- --
24 Armature
Field
25 S1-1 Right bank switch 187 -- -- -- -- -- --
S1-2 Left bank switch 175 -- -- -- -- -- --
S2 Firing switch 177 -- -- -- -- -- --
S3 Power switch 180 -- -- -- -- -- --
DS1 Power light 173 -- -- -- -- -- --
DS2 Ready light 175 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR1 176 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR2 176 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR3 176 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR4 176 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR5 187 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR6 187 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR7 187 -- -- -- -- -- --
CR8 187 -- -- -- -- -- --
R1 175 -- -- -- -- -- --
R2 173 -- -- -- -- -- --
6-28
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
CHAPTER 7
REPAIR OF CONVENTIONAL WEAPONS SYSTEM
7-1. Maintenance Inspection and Repair b. Refer to figure 7-6.3 for weapon system circuit
diagrams and figure 7-6.4 for wiring diagram.
a. Refer to Chapter 4 for maintenance, inspection
and repair data prior to repair of the following
components.
Table 7-1. Conventional Weapons System - Repair

Replace Adjust Repair
Functional Operation 7-1
Telescope Reticle Emergency 7-2 Fig. 7-7 Fig. 7-7

Power Supply
Relay Box 7-3 Fig. 7-8 thru 7-12
Loader's Control Box 7-4 Fig. 7-14 thru 7-17

Assembly
Blasting Machine 7-5 Fig. 7-18
Telescope Reticle Dimmer 7-6 Fig. 7-20

Box Assembly
Section 7-1. CONVENTIONAL WEAPONS SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL OPERATION
7-2. General 7-5. Deleted.
The functional operating of the conventional 7-5.1. Breech "AUTOMATIC OPEN' Electrical Control
weapons control system is provided to assist in Circuit and Closed Breech Scavenging System
troubleshooting system. Refer to TM 92350-230-12 for Refer to figure 7-3.1.
loading, firing, and unloading the M81/M81E1 gun-
launcher, to understand the general operation of the 7-6. Conventional Ammunition Firing Control
system. Circuit
Refer to figure 7-4.
The function of each operation is subdivided into
circuits. Continuity is necessary to complete a circuit, 7-7. Missile Control Circuit
and using a test light or meter will isolate a malfunction Refer to figure 7-5.
if continuity is not complete.
7-8. Coaxial Machine Gun Firing Control Circuit and
7-3. Breech 'OPEN' Electrical Control Circuit Blasting Machine Firing Circuit
Refer to figure 7-1. Refer to figure 7-6.
7-4. Breech "CLOSE' Electrical Control Circuit
7-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Figure 7-1. Breech "open" electrical control circuit
Pages 7-3 and 7-4 - deleted.
7-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Figure 7-2. Breech “close” electrical control circuit
Figure 7-3 and table 7-2 - deleted.
7-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 7-3.1. Breech “automatic open” electrical control circuit and closed
breech scavenging system.
7-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Table 7-2.1. Breech "Automatic Open" Electrical Control Circuit and Closed Breech
Scavenging System (Refer to Figure 7-3.1)
Purpose: To dispense compressed air into gun-launcher, to scavenge left-over debris after firing and to automatically
open breech.
Initial Condition Prior to "Automatic Open" of Breech
1. Power "on".
2. Fire Control Selector in "Missile" or "Conv" position.
3. Relay 4A4K2 is energized. Relay 4A4K2 contact closed.
NOTE
If in "Missile" position, relay K6 is energized and N.C. contacts open, which open circuit to de-
energize compressor circuit.
4. Safe-Ready switch (S2) in "Ready" position.

5. Relay K12 energizes if fire control selector is in "Conv" position. Contacts close to complete circuit to relay K16.
Relay K16 contacts close.
6. With fire control selector switch in any position other than missile, air compressor on-off switch will activate
compressor, provided system air pressure is below 2, 800 pounds.
Functional Operation
1. When round is fired, gun-launcher recoils and in-battery switch LS3 will transfer from terminal 3 to terminal 2:
a. Relay K3 will be energized -N.C.contacts open, opens firing circuit.

N.O.contacts close, holding relay field coil circuit closed
when LS3 transfers back to terminal 3.
b. Relay K10 will be energized - N. C. contacts open, opens turret blower circuit.
2. Gun-launcher returns to battery and LS3 transfers back to terminal 3:

a. Relay K15 will be energized -N.O. contacts close and air solenoid energized,
through time delay TD3. which dispenses compressed air in breech.
b. Time delay TD3 energized. -After a pulse duration of 1.7 seconds:
N.C. contacts open, which de-energizes air solenoid.
N.O. contacts close, which complete circuit to energize relay
K14, breech solenoid, and time delay TD2.
c. Relay K14 contacts close to hold its own field coil; activate breech solenoid, and time delay TD2.
d. Time delay TD2 contacts close and relay K2 energizes. N.O. contacts close, completing circuit to breech drive
motor and relay K5. Breech begins to open automatically.
e. Relay K5 N.C. contacts open, de-energizing relays K3 and K10. This closes turret blower motor circuit and opens
firing circuit.
3. Breech reaches full open position. Limit switch LS4 opens to interrupt breech solenoid circuit and solenoid de-
energizes. Limit switch LS2 closes.
a. Relay K14 de-energizes and contact points open, de-energizing relay K2.
b. Relay K2 contacts open. Breech drive motor coasts to a stop and relay K5 de-energizes.
7-6.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 7-4. Conventional ammunition firing control circuit
7-6.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 7-3. Conventional Ammunition Firing Control Circuit (Refer to Figure 7-4)
Condition Prior to Firing
1. Vehicle master switch in "on" position.
2. Fire control selector in "CONV" position; indicator light illuminated.

a. Relay A4K2 energized and N.O. contacts closed.
b. Relay K9 energized, N.O. contacts closed and N.C, contacts opened.
c. Relay K12 energized through power supply and N.O contacts closed.
3. Breech fully closed. Limit switch LS2 closed.
4. Safe-to-fire switch closed if gun mount fluid has correct precharge pressure.
5. Safe-Ready switch in "Ready" position; loader's and gunner's lights illuminated.
Firing Operation
1. Depress gunner's firing trigger (commander's if palm switch depressed) or firing button.
a. Relay K1 is energized through time delay TD1 and N.O. contacts closed.
b. Relay K13 energizes and N.O. contacts closed.
c. Relay K11 energizes through relay K1 contacts and N.O. contacts closed which completes circuit and power supply
discharges (-120 volts) to firing probe.
2. Time delay TD1 remains energized for 2.5 seconds after firing trigger is depressed.
3. When power supply discharges, relay K12 de-energizes. Relay K13 contacts hold circuit until time delay is cycled.
4. When gun-launcher fires, limit switch LS2 opens, which de-energizes firing circuit.
7-7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 7-5. Missile control circuit
7-8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 7-4. Missile Control Circuit (Refer to Figure 7-5).
Condition Prior to Firing
1. Vehicle master switch in "on" position.
2. Fire control selector in "missile" position; indicator light illuminated.

a. Relay A4K2 energized and N.O. contacts closed.
b. Relay A6K2 energized and N.C. contacts opened, which opened "stab" circuit.
c. Relay K6 energizes; N.O. contacts close and N. C. contacts open, which opens CBSS, compressor motor
circuit, and energizes K1 relay. N.O. contacts close to light missile reticle lamp.
d. Missile standby and enable signal energized.
3. Breech fully closed. Limit switch LS2 closed.

4. Safe-to-fire switch closed if gun mount fluid has correct precharged pressure.
5. Transmitter door open. XMTR door switch closed.
6. Safe-Ready switch in "Ready" position; loader's and gunner's lights illuminated.
Launching Operation
1. Depress gunner's firing trigger (commander's if palm switch depressed) or firing button.
a. Relay K1 is energized through time delay TD1 and N.O. contacts closed, which completes circuit to firing
probe and missile fire signal.
b. Relay K13 energizes and N.O. contacts closed (not used in this circuit).
c. Relay K11 energizes through relay K1 contacts (not used in this circuit).
7-8.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figs. 7-4 or 7-5
Figure 7-6. Coaxial machine gun firing control circuit and blasting machine firing circuit
Figures 7-.6.1 and 7-6.2 (foldins) - deleted.
7-8.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Section 7-2. REPAIR OF TELESCOPE RETICLE EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
Figure 7-7. Repair of telescope reticle emergency power supply
7-9
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 7.3. REPAIR OF RELAY BOX
Figure 7-8. Repair of weapon system relay box bottom (1 of 2)
7-10
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Fig. 7-10
Fig. 7-11
page 7-14
Figure 7-9. Repair of weapon system relay box top (2 of 2)
7-11
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Chapter 6
Figure 7-10. Weapon system relay box electrical schematic (bottom) (1of 2)
7-12
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 7-11. Weapon system relay box electrical schematic (top) (2 of 2)
7-13
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Table 7-5. Adjustment of Weapon System Relay Box Time Delay Element
The time delay element must be checked and/or adjusted whenever a malfunction is suspected or replacement is
required.
Adjustment
1. Remove delay element from relay box.
2. Install delay element in socket J14 of turret electrical fault isolation test set. (Refer to TM 9-4933-216-12, change
2.)
3. Connect stop timer kit to test set. (Refer to TM 9-4933-216-12, change 2.)
4. To test the delay element for correct time, check the following: (Refer to TM 9-4933-216-12, change 2.)
a. TD1 should be set at 2.5±025 seconds.
b. TD2 should be set at 100±25 milliseconds.
c. TD3 should be set at 0.8+0.05 seconds.
5. Adjust the multi-turn potentiometer on top of the delay element to obtain the correct time.
6. When correct time is obtained, apply-insulating enamel, MIL-E-22118, to potentiometer and allow 10 minutes to
dry.
7. Remove delay element from test set and install in relay box.
7-14
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 7-12. Tie-down in weapon system relay box
Figure 7-13 - deleted.
7-15
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Suction 7-4. REPAIR OF LOADER'S CONTROL BOX ASSEMBLY
Fig. 7-15
Figure 7-14. Repair of loader's control box assembly.
7-16
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 7-15. Loader's control box electrical schematic
Figures 7-16 and 7-17 - deleted.
7-17
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Section 7-5. REPAIR OF BLASTING MACHINE ASSEMBLY
Fig. 4-3
Figure 7-18. Repair of blasting machine assembly
7-18
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Figure 7-19 - deleted.
Section 7-6. REPAIR OF TELESCOPE RETICLE DIMMER BOX ASSEMBLY
Figure 7-20. Repair of reticle dimmer box assembly
7-19/(7-20 blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
CHAPTER 8
REPAIR OF ELECTRIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM
8-1. General
Refer to Chapter 4 for maintenance, inspection, and repair data prior to repair for the following components.
Table 8-1. Electric Drive Control System -Repair

Replace Repair Adjust
Functional Operation 8-1
Functional/Technical 8-1.1
Description
Accessory Box Assembly 8-2 Figs. 8-4, 8-5 8-6
Amplifier Integrator 8-3 Figs. 8- 7, 8- 8,

Assembly 8-9
Power Supply 8-4 Figs. 8-10, 8-11, 8-12
Gun and Turret Control 8-5 Fig. 8-13 Figs. 8-14, 8-15,
Selector 8-16
Gunner's or Commander's 8-6 Figs. 8-17, 8-20 Fig. 8-21

Control Handle Assembly
Gyro Selector 8-7 Figs. 8-22, 8-23
Elevation Limit Switch

Assembly 8-8 Fig. 8-24 Figs. 8-25 -
8-27
Motor-Generator 8-9 Figs. 8-28 - 8-34
Servo Motor Refer to Section 9-3.
8-2. Test Set 8.3. System Schematic
a. A test set is provided for checking the electric Refer to figure 8-1 for a schematic of the electric
drive control system. It also can locate some defective drive control system to assist in troubleshooting and
internal components. Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 for repairing the system.
installation of test set and test procedure; then refer to
table 8-2 for additional information. 8-4. Replacement of Connector Terminals
b. Refer to figures 2-3 through 2-6 for repair of test Refer to figure 8-2 for removal and installation and
set. to figure 8-3 for replacement of printed circuit connector
terminals used in this system.
8-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Section 8-1. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION OF ELECTRIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM
8-5. General state power supply regulator with a 2KC

square wave oscillator which converts 28
a. The electric drive control system is an electronic Volts DC input to AC for voltage
servo system consisting of two separate circuits that amplification. Three potentiometers are
provide a constant rate of traverse or elevation provided on the regulator to adjust
proportional to gunner's or commander's control handle oscillator frequency and wave form and to
deflection (non-stabilized mode). adjust 28 Volt DC control handle supply.
Oscillator output is fed to power
transformer where it is converted into
b. The system features a gyroscope stabilization
several selective AC voltages. These are
system that maintains weapon and line-of-sight space
fed to a solid state power supply printed
orientation when vehicle is in motion (stabilized mode).
circuit board and rectified to DC. These
voltages are then filtered and fed to the
c. Refer to figure 8-1 for system schematic. output terminals of the unit. The power
supply furnishes the following regulated
8-6. Non-Stabilized Mode DC voltages:
a. Stand-by. + 200 VDC (power amplifier plate

voltage)
(1) The electric drive control system receives
its power (28 Volts DC) through vehicle - 15 VDC (amplifier transistor
master switch and contact ring. With supply)
power switch (10SI) on gun and turret
control selector in "OFF" position, relay + 15 VDC (amplifier transistor
4A8K1 is energized and N.O. contacts supply)
close. This relay is an electrical interlock
to prevent accidental operation of the - 60 VDC (power amplifier bias
system. If vehicle master switch is turned voltage)
"ON" with power switch left in "ON"
position, system will not function until ± 14 VDC (control handle traverse
power switch is turned "OFF" and then supply voltage)
turned "ON" again.
± 14 VDC (control handle elevation
supply voltage)
(2) Turning power switch to "ON" position,
power illuminates indicator light and
b. Ready.
energizes relay 4A5K1.
(1) The time delay (4A11) is a transistorized

(3) Relay 4A5K1 N.O. contacts close and
circuit to provide a 18 to 20 second warm-
power is transmitted to power supply, 28
up interval to prevent system from being
Volts DC to amplifier integrator power
energized until power amplifier output
amplifier tubes, and timer (4A11).
tube filaments are heated. When time
interval has terminated, relays 4A1K2,
(4) The power supply converts 28 Volts DC 4A6K1, and 4A2K1 are energized.
power to selected DC voltages for system.
The power supply incorporates a solid
8-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
(2) When relays 4A1K2, 4A6K1, and 4A2K1 capacitor network 4Al5C1 and
are energized they provide the following 4A15C2. The other set of contacts
functions: provides traverse handle signal to
(a) Relay 4A1K2 two N.O. contacts the summing network and at the
which are in parallel close to supply same time removes the ground
power to gunner's and commander's from capacitor network 4A16C3 and
palm switches, energizes relays 4A16C6.
11K2 and 11K3 and illuminates
ready light. (2) When relays 4A1K1, 4A8K3, 4A8K2, and
(b) One N.O. contact of relay 4A6K1 4K1 energize ( (1) (b) ), they perform the
closes to provide a ground to hold following functions:
relays 4A1K2, 4A6K1, and4A2K1 (a) Relay 4A1K1 N.O. contacts close
energized. The other N.O. contacts which then provide power to servo
close to prepare timer for a 3 motor cooling fans and control field.
second drop-out delay. Servo motor fans are now
(c) Relay 4A2K1 N.O. contacts close to operating.
supply + 200 volts DC to power (b) Relay 4A8K3 N.O. contacts close
amplifiers. which connect with the negative
side of relay coils 4K1,4A8K2,
c. Driving. 4A8K3, and 4A1K1 to the timer for
the 3 second drop-out delay.
(1) When gunner's control handle palm switch (c) Relay 4A8K2 N.O. contacts close
(9Sf) is depressed, relay 4A2K2, 4A8K4, which provide power to energize
and 4A6K4 are energized and perform the relay 5K1 and time delay TD1.
following functions: (d) Relay 4K1 N.O. contacts close to
(a) Relay 4A2K2 has two functions. provide 28 Volts DC to traverse and
One N.O. contacts close which elevation clutches. These clutches
shorts to ground the base of timer are now energized.
transistor 4A11Q4 through resistor
4A11R2. This prepares timer for (3) When relay 5K1 is energized ((2)(c)) N.O.
the 3 second drop-out delay. The contacts close. Motor generator drive
other N.O. contacts close which motor begins to operate but resistor 5R7
complete circuit to energize relays limits current inrush. After 1 to 2 seconds,
4A6K3,4A7K3, and 4A7K4 time delay TD1 energizes relay 5K2 and
(stabilized transfer relays when 28 Volt DC power is applied to drive
system is in stabilized mode). motor.
(b) Relay 4A8K4 N.O. contacts close
which provide a ground to relays (4) When the commander's palm switch
4A1Kl, 4A8K3, 4A8K2, and 4K1. (8S3) is depressed, relays 4A7K1 and
(c) Relay 4A6K4 has two functions. 4A4K1 are energized and through diode
One set of contacts provides 4A10CR10 relays 4A2K2,4A8K4, and
elevation handle signal to the 4A6K4 are energized. (Refer to
summing network and at the same paragraph c(1) above for function of these
time removes the ground from relays.)
8-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
(a.) Relay 4A7K1 two sets of contacts generator output will always be negative
transfer control handle output and vice versa. Since control handle
signals from the gunner's control signal is always of a slightly higher
handle to the commander's control magnitude than servo motor tachometer
handle. generator signal, difference between the
(b) Relay 4A4K1 one set of contacts two, or error signal, will always be a low-
(N.O. and N.C.) transfer the magnitude voltage of same polarity as
operation of the firing trigger switch control handle voltage.
from gunner's to commander's
control handle. To prevent amplifier integrator
preamplifier saturation, error signal is not
(5) Control handle output is dependent on permitted to exceed 0.5 Volts DC, and is
handle deflection and will be a maximum limited to this value by diodes in the
of ±10.5 Volts DC from null (neutral self- amplifier integrator where error signal
centering position in traverse) and ±1.5 could reach high values in non-stabilized
Volts DC from null in elevation. braking mode.
(6) When either control handle is deflected, (9) When control handle is allowed to return
handle output is directed to traverse to neutral (self- centering position) with
and/or elevating summing networks in palm switches still depressed, control
accessory box where handle output is handle signal will go to zero. Error signal
summed with tachometer generator feed- will then consist of only servo motor
back voltage from elevating and/or tachometer generator voltage which will
traversing mechanism servo motors. again be a signal at opposite polarity to
Resultant summed voltage is identified as previously applied control handle voltage
the error signal. This error signal is and will function to bring servo motor to a
directed to preamplifier and power stop (cooling fan motors continue to
amplifier in amplifier integrator and operate). When servo motor stops,
imposed on control field amplifier tachometer generator output will go to
generator control fields in motor generator zero, there will be no error signal in
assembly. summing network, and no drive power to
servo motor. However, elevating
(7) The error signal is the driving and control mechanism and traversing mechanism
signal that operates elevating and magnetic clutches are still energized,
traversing servo motors and maintains servo motor cooling fans are still
motor-generator assembly elevating and operating, and motor-generator drive
traversing generator output to respective motor is still operating.
servo motors proportional to degree of
control handle deflection. (10) When control handle is in neutral (self-
centering) position, and palm switch
(8) Error signal is always algebraic sum of depressed, weapon and turret remain
control handle output voltage and servo stationary relative to vehicle. If weapon
motor tachometer generator feed-back or turret drifts, movement can be nulled
voltage. These two voltages are always out by adjusting trim knobs
of opposite polarity and their actual values (potentiometers) on either control handle.
are subtracted by summing network to
create error signal. When control handle
output is positive, servo motor tachometer
8-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
NOTE (2) Relay 4A7K3 two sets of contacts transfer

If weapon or turret drift cannot be the feed-back signal from the tachometer
corrected by control handle trim to the rate sensor circuit.
knobs, additional null adjustments (3) Relay 4A7K4 two sets of contacts transfer
are provided by balance the operation of the limit switches from
potentiometers in amplifier and the non-oscillatory operation to the stab
power amplifier. mode limit switch operation.
d. Return to Ready. When control handle palm d. During stabilized operation, output from the rate
switch is released, relays 4A2K2, 4A8K4, and 4A6K4 sensor is applied to the elevating and traverse shaping
deenergize; but, timer keeps motor generator drive and filter module (4A14) where these signals are
motor; servo motor fans, and elevating and traversing processed, amplified, and fed to the elevation and
mechanism magnetic clutches operating for 3 seconds traverse summing networks.
(drop-out delay). After delay has cycled, motor-
generator drive motor and servo motor fans stop (relay e. When a control handle is deflected, rate sensor
contacts 4A1K1 and 4A8K2 have opened). Relay signals are summed algebraically with the control
contacts 4K1 open and clutches spring-engage for handle signals in the shaping and filter module. The
manual operation and mechanisms will be locked resultant signal is summed with the servo motor
against external forces acting on weapon or turret. tachometer generator feed-back output to create the
Electric drive control system is now in "Ready"' mode. error signal.
8-7. Stabilized Mode
f. The weapon and sight will remain space
oriented due to correcting signals from rate sensor and
a. In stabilized mode the gunner is effectively will traverse, elevate or depress relative to its position in
firing from a stable space platform relatively undisturbed space at rates which are dependent on the degree of
by vehicle pitch and roll, but must still aim, track, and control handle deflection from neutral position.
fire using traversing and elevating controls in usual
manner.
g. When palm switch is released, electric drive
control system returns to a "Ready" mode. (Refer to
b. When electric drive control system is in "Ready" para. 8-6 d.).
position (Refer to para. 8-6) and then actuating "Stab"
switch, "Stab" light illuminates and system is in 8-8. Gun Elevation and Depression Limit Switches
stabilized mode.
a. General
c. When either control handle palm switch is
depressed (also refer to para. 8-6c.) relays 4A6K3,
4A7K3, and 4A7K4 are energized and gun-launcher and (1) The function of the elevation and
sight will immediately become fixed in space and will depression limit system provides
remain space oriented regardless of vehicle movement. maximum elevation and depression limit
to the weapon in both power and manual
modes of operation. The mechanical
(1) Relay 4A6K3 two N.O. contacts ground stops provide an absolute limit to weapon
the circuit in the preamplifier-integrator to travel while the cam actuated limit
provide the compensation for the switches provide electrical limits to
stabilized mode. weapon travel relative to the mechanical
stop.
8-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
(2) Two types of electrical limit system are established from the summing point
used with the electric drive control through the normally open contact
system. One system using accessory box ca relay 4A9K1 and diodes
11619542 slows weapon as it approaches 4A15CR1 and CR2. The opposite
mechanical limit. The other system using polarity (+) feed-back is used to
accessory box 11635617 stops weapon "plug" the system and cause the
before it contacts mechanical limit. elevation servo motor to stop.
Accessory boxes are interchangeable as a
unit; therefore, function of electrical limit As long as the system has been set
system can be changed by changing the up and is operating properly, the
accessory box. weapon will not be driven into the
mechanical stop. It may drift into
b. Technical Description (Using Accessory Box the stop due to its inherent
11635617) imbalance; this will not result,
however, in any load on the
(1) Operation in the Non-Stabilized Mode. servomotor or motor-generator.
(a) When the gun-launcher is elevated (c) When traversing with the weapon
and the elevation limit switch is depressed below the setting of the
closed, relay 4A9K2 is energized. No. 4 limit switch and approaching
The signal path (+ signal)through the rear centerline of the vehicle,
diode 4A10CR11 and the normally the traverse interference switch on
closed contact of relay 4A9K2 is the slip ring will close at
thereby opened. At the same time approximately 520 from the rear
a path to ground is established from centerline. The two switches in
the summing point through the series again cause relay 4A9K1 to
normally open contact of relay 4A be energized.
9K2 and diodes 4A15CR3 and CR4.
The opposite polarity (-) feed-back As long as the system has been set
is used to essentially "plug" the up and is operating properly, the
system and cause the elevation weapon will not be driven into the
servomotor to stop. mechanical stop. It may drift into
the stop due to its inherent
Barring a component failure, and as imbalance; this will not result,
long as the relative setting of the however, in any load on the
electrical and mechanical stops is servomotor or motor-generator.
established properly, the weapon
will not contact the mechanical stop (d) Should the weapon be traversed
in the power mode, even if the within 520 of the rear centerline
control handle is held in the full while the weapon is simultaneously
elevation position indefinitely. below the setting of the No. 2 limit
switch, relay 4A7K2 is energized
(b) When the gun-launcher is providing for approximately + 14
depressed and the depression limit volts (through a 100 ohm current
switch is closed, relay 4A9K1 is limiting resistor 4A16R9) to be
energized. The signal path (-signal) superimposed on the depression
through diode 4A10CR12 and the signal (10.15 volts max.) resulting in
normally closed contact of relay the rapid elevation of the weapon
4A9K1 is thereby opened. At the until again clear of the No. 2 switch.
same time a path to ground is
8-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
(2) Operation in the Stabilized Mode.

With the feedback removed, the
(a) When relay 4A7K4 is energized in input voltage to the preamp
the stabilized mode, a signal path is integrator will be on the order of 100
established from the second set of millivolts, or more than sufficient to
normally open contacts of relays cause a full amplifier output of 60
4A9K2 and 4A9K1 to the summing milliamperes. Conversely, the 60
point. milliampere amplifier output results
in a generator output of over 50
volts at 10 amperes into a short
Should the up or down limit switch
circuited motor armature, resulting
be closed, thus actuating either
in possible brush and commutator
relay 4A9K2 or 4A9K1, the full
damage.
minus or plus 14 volts will be
applied (through current limiting
resistors 4A16R8 and R9) In order to avoid possible damage
overriding the handle output as well to the servomotor, or possibly the
as the rate sensor signals, causing a motor generator, it is important to
sudden reversal of weapon realize the limitations of the
movement until clear of the equipment. Once the electrical limit
respective switch. to elevation has been reached, the
control handle should be returned to
the neutral position.
(b) When the weapon is within 520 of
the rear centerline, the actuation of
either the No. 4 or the No. 2 limit (b) When the gun launcher is
switch will cause the application of depressed to its maximum
the + 14 volt up signal to the depression angle of 142 mils, the
summing point. control handle output signal (-) is
shorted to ground through the other
set of normally closed contacts of
c. Technical Description (Using Accessory
relay 4A7K4 and diodes 4A15CR1
Box11619542)
and CR2. The depression rate of
the weapon is again reduced to a 1
(1) Operation in the Non-Stabilized Mode. to 2 mil drift rate, provided the
control handle is retained in the
(a) When the gun-launcher is elevated down position. The weapon will drift
and the elevation limit switch is and contact the depression
closed, the control handle output mechanical stop, resulting in a
signal (-) is shorted to ground stalled servo motor, or therefore, no
through the normally closed feedback condition.
contacts of 4A7K4 relay and diodes
4A15CR3 and CR4. These diodes, With the feedback removed, the
IN93 type, have a maximum full input voltage to the preamp
load voltage drop of .18 volts (ea) integrator will be on the order of 100
or approximately .15 volts for the millivolts, or more than sufficient to
parallel combination. This voltage, cause a full amplifier output of 60
when summed with the milliamperes. Conversely, the 60
corresponding tachometer generator milliampere amplifier output results
feedback, results in a weapon drift in a generator output of over 50
rate of 1 to 2 mils per second. At volts at 10 amperes into a short
this drift rate the weapon will circuited motor armature, resulting
eventually contact the elevation in possible brush and commutator
mechanical stop, resulting in a damage.
stalled servo motor or therefore, no
feedback conditions.
8-6.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
In order to avoid possible damage the elevation and depression limit

to the servomotor, or possibly the circuit, and simultaneously
motor generator, it is important to providing the +14 volt handle supply
realize the limitations of the voltages at the open limit switches.
equipment. Once the electrical limit
to elevation has been reached, the Should the up or down limit
control handle should be returned to switches be actuated, the full ±14
the neutral position. volts is applied (through a 100 ohm
current limiting resistor 4A16R8 and
(c) When traversing with the gun R9) overriding the handle output as
depressed below the setting of the well as the rate sensor output
No. 4 limit switch and approaching signals, causing a sudden reversal
the rear centerline of the vehicle, of weapon movement until clear of
the No. 4 limit switch is closed and the switch. (b) When the
the traverse interference switch on weapon is over the rear of the
the slip ring will close at vehicle, the No. 4 and No. 2 limit
approximately 520 from the rear switches operate in the same
centerline. The two switches in manner as in the nonstabilized
series again provide a path to mode.
ground (through diodes 4A15CR1
and CR2) for a negative handle 8-9. Test Set
signal, limiting weapon depression
rates to one to two mils per second. a. The test set when connected to the drive system
provides for rapid adjustment and to assist in a fault
(d) Should the weapon be depressed location. When test set switch is closed, relay 4A3K2 is
below the setting of the No. 2 limit energized and N.C. contacts open which keep motor-
switch while simultaneously within generator from operating and traverse and elevation
the 520 range of the interference mechanism clutches from energizing, when palm switch
zone cam, relay 4A7K2 is energized is depressed. This permits test to be accomplished
providing for approximately +14 without response of weapons or turret from either control
volts (through a 100- current limiting handle.
resistor) to be superimposed on the
handle signal (-15 volts max) b. Refer to table 8-2 for test set procedure.
resulting in the rapid elevation of
the weapon until again clear of the 8-10. Additional Functions of Drive System
No. 4 switch.
a. The accessory box contains five relays (A4K1,
(e) Referring to (1) (a) and (d), the A4K2, A3K2, A5K2, and A6K2) which function with the
weapon may drift from the No. 4 conventional weapons system.
switch to the No. 2 switch, but
should never be able to come into
physical contact with the depression b. The gun and turret fire control selector positions
control plate, providing all weapons system in desired weapon selection.
adjustments are within the specified
limits. c. Gunner's or commander's control handles
incorporate a firing trigger to complete firing control
(2) Operation in the Stabilized Mode. circuit of the conventional weapons system.
NOTE.
(a) When relay 4A7K4 is energized in
Refer to figures 7-1 through 7-6 for
the stabilized mode, the two sets of
functional operation of the
contacts transfer, removing the
conventional weapons system.
diodes 4A15CR1 through CR4 from
8-6.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Section 8-1.1. FUNCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRIC

DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
8-10.1. General Two "N.O." contacts of AIK2 in parallel

supply power to control system
a. The electric drive control system consists of the components and circuits and the
following components: servomotor cooling fans and fields except
(1) Accessory Box Assembly (Unit 4) the power supply, the tube filaments in the
traverse and elevation power amplifiers.
(2) Amplifier Integrator Assembly (Unit 2)
(3) Relay A2K1. Energized through the
(3) Power Supply (Unit 3)
timer. One "N.O." contact supplies +200
(4) Gun and Turret Control Selector (Unit 10) volts to the power amplifiers after 20
(5) Gunner's or Commander's Control Handle seconds initial time. This allows the tube
Assembly (Units 8 and 9) filament to heat up before applying the
(6) Gyro Selector (Unit 11) plate voltage.
(7) Motor-Generator Assembly (Unit 5) (4) Relay A2K2. Energized by the gunner's
or commander's palm switch. One "N.O"
b. Functionally related components consists of the contact shorts to ground the base of timer
following: transistor A1Q114 through a 10 ohm
resistor A11R12. This prepares the timer
(1) Elevation/Depression Limit System
for the 2 second delay.
(2) Elevating and Traversing Mechanism
The second "N.O." contact energizes
Electric Servomotors (Units 6 and 7)
relays A6K3, A7K3, A7K4 (stabilized
(3) Missile System Rate Sensor(Unit 12) transfer relays) only when system is in
stabilized mode.
8-10.2. Accessory Box Assembly (5) Relay A3K1. Energized by the trigger
switch when the system is in the "coax"
a. General. The accessory box assembly contains mode. The "N.O." contacts provide +28
control relays for electric drive control system and 5 volts to J7-G of the firing circuit connector
relays that function with the conventional weapon to fire the coax machine gun.
system. It also contains a time delay circuit, traverse (6) Relay A3K2. Energized by the test set
and elevating summing networks, summing amplifier switch. One "N.C." contact prevents
assemblies, shaping and filter assembly diode board, relays K1 and A8K2 from operating when
and a 40 ampere system circuit breaker. the test switch is closed. This permits the
testing of the system without the motor-
b. Relays. generator running and with the traverse
(1) Relay A1K1. Energized by either palm and elevation shifter clutches de-
switch, (See A8K4). Provides power to energized.
servo motor cooling fans and control (7) Relay A4K1. Energized by the
fields. Remains energized until the commander's palm switch only. One
elapsing of the 2 to 3 seconds time delay setup contacts (N.O. and N.C.)transfers
after the palm switch is released. the operation of the trigger switch from
Each of the two sets of contacts provides gunner's to commander's control handle.
power to one of the two servomotors. (8) Relay A4K2. Energized by the selection
(2) Relay A1K2. Energized through the timer of the "Missile" or "Conv" modes through
along with A6K1. These relays energize pin J7-F. One "N.O." contact provides the
20 seconds after the power switch on the circuit to the main fire safety circuit
control selector has been closed. These through J7-B.
relays will stay energized until the power
switch is opened.
8-6.3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
(9) Relay A5K1. (Power Relay) Energized (15) Relay A7K1. Energized when
when power switch is closed (only if power commander's palm switch is closed. The
switch has been opened before 1closing- two sets of contacts transfer control
see operation of relay A8K1). One "N.O." handle output signals from gunner's
contact supplies +28 volts to the power control handle to commander's control
supply. The second "N.O."' contact handle.
supplies +28 volts to timer, power (16) Relay A7K2. Energized when traverse
amplifier tube filaments and to connector interference switch and elevation
J2 of gyro selector. interference switch is closed. One "N.O."
(10) Relay ASK2. Energized when the system contact supplies a +14 volt signal through
is in the "coax" mode. One set of a 100 ohm resistor to the elevation
contacts (N.O. and N.C.) transfers the summing network. This signal produces a
signal from the trigger switch from J7D to full up signal to drive the gun out of the
energize A3K1. This "N.O" contact of elevation interference zone.
A3K1 provides +28 volts to the coax (17) Relay A7K3. Energized when the system
machine gun through J7-G. The second is in stabilized mode. The two sets of
set of contacts transfers the +28 volts contacts transfer the feedback signal from
going to the trigger switch from "SAFE TO tachometer to rate sensor circuit.
FIRE" signal (J7-C) to +28 volts (J7-A). (18) Relay A7K4. Energized when the system
(11) Relay A6K1. Energized after 20 seconds is in stabilized mode. Two sets of
time delay (see relay A1K2). One "N.O." contacts transfer operation of elevation
contact prepares the timer for the 2 limit switch from non-oscillatory operation
second drop out delay. The other "N.O. to stab mode limit switch operation.
"contact provides ground to relays A1K2, (19) Relay A8K1. (Power Safety Interlock)
A6K1, and A2K1 after 20 second time Energized when power switches OFF.
delay. These relays stay energized until One "N.O." contact provides +28 volts to
the power switch is opened. coil of A8K1. This maintains A8K1
(12) Relay A6K2. Energized when the system energized until turret power is interrupted.
is in "MISSLE" mode. One "N.C." contact The second "N.O." is in series between
prevents the operation of "STAB" relays power switch and power relay A5K1. This
11K2, 11K3, A6K3, A7K3, and A7K4 contact prevents operation power relay
when system to in "MISSILE" mode. until power switch is first cycled through
(13) Relay A6K3. Energized when the system the "OFF" position.
is in stabilized mode. The two "N.O." (20) Relay A8K2 +28 volts is supplied to relays
contacts ground a circuit in preamplifter- K1 and A8K2 through a "N.C." contact of
integrator to provide the compensation for A3K2, which prevents these two relays
stabilized mode. from energizing when the Test Set switch
(14) Relay A6K4. Energized when gunner's or is "ON". The negative side of these relay-
commander's palm switch is closed. One coils is grounded through a "N.O." contact
set of contacts provides the elevation of ASK4. This energizes these relays
handle signal to the summing network: when the palm switch is closed. Ground
through "N.O." contacts and at the same is maintained for 2 seconds after the palm
time removes the ground the handle switch is opened through a "N.O." contact
summing circuit. The second set of of A8K3 and the timer.
contacts provides the same operation for
the traverse axis.
8-6.4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
(21) Relay A8K3. Energized when the palm As soon as the contacts of 4A5K1 close, the
switch is closed by grounding the negative timer starts its timing function. The coils of relays
side of the coil through the "N.O." contact 4A1K2, 4A6K1, and 4A2Kl are not energized.
of A8K4. The "N.O." contact connects the Therefore, relays 4A8K4 and 4A8K3 are not energized
negative side of relay coils K1, A8K2, so no load is connected to the output. (Near pin #14).
A8K3 and A1K1 to the timer for the 2
second time delay. Resistors R5 and Zener diode CR10 form a
(22) Relay A8K4. Energized by either palm voltage regulator. The voltage at the connection
switch. Provides ground through "N.O." between CR10 and R5 is 10.0 volts ± 10%. This keeps
contact to relays AK1, A8K2, A8K3 and the voltage which the RC circuit sees at a more constant
4K1. value than the vehicle supply voltage.
(23) Relay A9K1. (Late Design) Energizes
when gun-launcher is depressed and The initial RC is formed by R10 and C2. The
depression limit switch is closed. It is part capacitor starts its slow exponential charging. When the
of elevation/depression limit system to voltage on the capacitor C2 reaches a value equal to
provide limits to weapon travel relative to the sum of the voltage across Zener diode CR6 (2.4 V. ±
mechanical stop. 10%)plus the base to emitter voltage of Q4 plus the
(24) Relay A9K2. (Late Design) Energizes forward voltage drop of CR7, transistor Q4 goes from a
when gun-launcher is elevated and cutoff condition to a saturated on condition.
elevation limit switch is closed. It is part
of elevation/depression limit system to
When Q4 is turned on, collector current flows
provide limits to weapon travel relative to
through R8 and R9. The junction point of RS, R9, and
mechanical stop.
the base connection of Q2 was previously at +28 V.D.C.
(25) Relay 4K1. Energized through a "N.C." It now drops to a value and few volts above ground.
contact of A3K2 and a "N.O." contact of This switches on PNP transistor Q2 and causes 4.7 V. ±
A8K4 when either palm switch is 10% Zener diode Cr11 to conduct and turns on
depressed. The "NO" contact provides transistor Q1. This operates relay coils 4A1K2, 4A6K1,
+28 volts to traverse and elevation and 4A2K1. One of the sets of contacts of 4A6K1
clutches through J6-P and J6-N. The coil latches the relay coils so they are held on independent
is de-energized after the 2 second time of the timer circuitry. Relay 4A6K1 modifies the R in the
delay through one "N.O." contact of A8K3. RC circuitry for a shorter timing cycle.
c. Printed Circuit Board A10. Mounts diodes used Power is now available to the commander's and
in various circuits in the Accessory Box for signal gunner's palm switches. If these are not used and the
steering, blocking, and arc suppression. system is shut off, the timer resets itself.
d. Timer Assembly A11. Provides a 20 second If either of the switches is used, relay 4A2K2 is
time delay to allow for warm-up of vacuum tubes and energized, along with relay 4A8K4. The contacts of the
run-up time of the gyro package. Also provides a 2 former discharges capacitor C2 and thus resets the
second time delay on turn-off to allow proper braking timer. Relay 4A8K4energizes 4A81C which connects
action of turret. the output of the timer to a group of relays.
The vehicle master switch must be turned on. The timer remains inactive until the palm
The turret control selector power switch 101 must be switches are released. When the palm switches are
turned on. This energizes the coil of relay 4A5Kl which released, this de-energizes 4A8K4 so that the timing
supplies +28 V. D.C. to the tube filaments, rate sensor circuit supplies a ground path to the group of relays.
(Gyro package) and to the timer but not to the This also de-energizes relay 4A2K2 which starts the
commander's and gunner's control handle palm timer.
switches. Thus the drive system cannot be energized.
8-6.5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
The timer operates as previously outlined f. Shaping and Filter Assembly A14.
except with a modified RC circuit. When transistor Q1
is switched on, the collector drops to near ground which (1) Functional description Provides the
brings the base of transistor Q3 to a voltage below its summing and compensation circuit for the
emitter which cuts off transistor Q3 and removes the control handle and gyro signal during
ground path from the group of relays. Thus the two stabilized mode operation.
second delay in the drop out of the group of relays is
accomplished.
(2) Technical description.
(a) The above function is provided for
The timer is now ready to be either shut off if
both elevation and traverse axes in
the turret selector power switch is shut off or to be reset
two separate circuits. The circuit is
if the palm switch is depressed again.
primarily a bridged tee network.
The elevation selection has
e. Summing Amplifier Assembly (Traverse A12 or additional compensation
Elevation A13. components.
The traverse circuit has 2 back-to
(1) Functional description. Provides back 4.7v zener diodes in the rate
amplification for the handle and gyro sensor summing network which
signal during stabilized mode operation. provide a non-linear output for the
(2) Technical description. gyro feedback signal. This is
(a) The summing amplifiers are necessary to provide the non-linear
identical in both elevation and turret rate versus handle position.
traverse axes. The amplifier is a 3 (b) At low traverse handle signal where
stage DC amplifier. The DC gain of the gyro feedback signal is also low,
the amplifier is 5 v/v. Its frequency the zener diodes appear as an open
response is shaped by circuit and the turret rate has a
compensation networks in both the certain proportionality to handle
feedback network and the output position.
circuitry. The amplifier balance is (c) At traverse handle positions starting
controlled by a 2 meg 22 turn at 600, the feedback voltage is
potentiometer with no stops. large enough to break down the
Counterclockwise adjustment will zener diodes causing a portion of
cause clockwise turret rotation in the feedback signal to be shunted to
traverse axis and gun elevation in ground through a 15K resistor and
the elevation axis. the zener diodes. This reduces the
(b) A positive signal on the base of gyro signal fed to the summing
Q1A will cause it to conduct more network. The turret rate is still
heavily which raises the emitter proportional to the handle position
voltage on Q1B. Q1B will now but now with a high proportionality.
conduct less and its collector The transition between the two rates
voltage increase; in turn, increase is smooth as the zeners break down
the base signal on Q2. Q2 slowly.
conducts, increasing the base signal
on Q3 causing Q3 to conduct more (3) Elevating axis dc channel gains.
heavily raising its collector voltage.
(a) The dc gain of gyro channel,
The output voltage is taken off the
connector J21-pin 2, is .0225 v/v.
collector thru R10.
(b) The dc gain of handle channel,
(c) The amplifier is balanced by
connector J21-pin 3, is .29 v/v.
adjusting the quiescent current
through Q1 such that with no signal (c) The summed output is at connector
input the output level of the J21-pin 1 and ground at connector
amplifier in 0 volts. J21-pin 6.
8-6.6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
(4) Traverse axis dc channel gains. (f) Variable resistor A15R1 adjusts the
gain of the stab mode signal. It is a 5K
(a) The dc gain gyro channel, connector ohm 22 turn potentiometer with no
J21-pin 15, is; 1 volt in .1 v/v and 20 stops and turning counter-clockwise
volt in .074 v/v. increases the gain.
(b) The dc gain of handle channel, h. Traverse Summing Assembly A16.

connector J21-pin 10, is. 27 v/v.
(1) Functional description. Provides the
(c) The summed output is at connector following summing networks in the traverse
J21-pin 9 and ground at connector J21- axis for amplifier integrator:
pin 11.
(a) Tach generator feedback in both
g. Elevation Summing Assembly A15. stabilized and non- stabilized mode.
(1) Functional description. Provides the follow- (b) Handle signal in non-stabilized mode.
ing summing networks in the elevation axis
for the amplifier integrator: (c) Handle and gyro summed signal in
stabilized mode.
(a) Tach generator feedback in both
stabilized and non- stabilized mode. (2) Technical description.
(b) Handle signal in non-stabilized mode. (a) The dc gain of tach generator channel
at connector J23-pin 8 is.7 v/v at low
(c) Handle and gyro summed signal in inputs and .02 v/v at high inputs. This
stabilized mode. channel has a zener diode network
similar to that used on shaping and
(d) This module also contains 4 diodes filter module. Its purpose is to give a
used and described in the limit switch higher turret rate per handle deflection
circuitry. at handle positions of 60e or more.
(2) Technical description. (b) The dc gain of handle signal at

connector J23-pin 10 is .43 v/v.
(a) The dc gain of tach generator at
connector J22-pin 12 is .09 v/v. (c) The dc gain of stab mode signal at
(b) The dc gain of handle signal at
connector J22-pin 10 is.61 v/v. (d) Outputs are at connector J23-pin 14 for
non-stab mode and J23-pin 7 for stab
(c) The dc gain of stab mode signal at mode. J23-pin 6 is ground.
(e) The tach feedback signal is stabilized
(d) Outputs are at connector J22-pin 13 for mode is fed through A16C2. This
non-stab mode and J22-pin 11 for stab capacitor blocks the dc output of the
mode. J22-pin 1 is ground. tach and allows only change of rate
(acceleration) feedback.
(e) The tach feedback signal in stabilized
mode is through A15C7. This capacitor (f) Variable resistor A16R10 adjusts the
blocks the dc output of the tach and gain of the stab mode signal. It is a 5K
only allows change of rate acceleration) ohm 22 turn potentiometer with no
feedback. stops and turning counter-clockwise
increases the gain.
8-6.7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
8-10.3. Amplifier Integrator Assembly (2) Power amplifier.
a. Function Description. (a) The power amplifier is made up of a

solid state amplifier module and two
(1) Contain elevating and traversing pre- power output tubes (per channel). The
amplifier integrator and power amplifier power amplifier is a 3 stage dual
module boards, test set receptacle where channel amplifier with a gain of 20
all system test points are brought together ma/volt. Saturation level is
for test and troubleshooting, and pgin and approximately 60 ma. output or 3 volts
balance potentiometers for non-stabilized input. A balance potentiometer (R 13)
mode. is used to set the output to zero with
zero input. Clockwise rotation of the
(2) Preamplifier integrator module boards A2 balance potentiometer will cause
and A4 provide amplification and clockwise rotation of the turret in
compensation of error signal. traverse and elevation of the gun in
elevation axis.
(3) Power amplifier module boards A1 and A3
and 4 output tubes (2 per channel) provide (b) A negative signal on the base of Q1A
additional amplification of gun and turret will cause it to conduct less. The
drive signals prior to the motor-generator. collector of Q1A and the base of Q3 will
become more positive reducing
b. Technical Description. conduction in Q3 and lowering the
voltage on the grid of 2V1. However,
(1) Preamplifier integrator. 2V1 is biased near cutoff and 2V2 has
to conduct more. QIA conducting less
(a) The preamplifier is a 4 stage dc will cause the emitter of Q1B to go
amplifier. Its gain is primarily controlled more negative with respect to its fixed
by a frequency sensitive feedback base voltage. Q1B will conduct more,
network. The dc gain in non-stabilized lowering the voltage on the base of Q2
mode is 90 v/v. The dc gain in causing more conduction which raises
stabilized mode is increased to 900 v/v the voltage on the collector of Q2. The
when relay 4A6K3 energizes and collector of Q2 is tied to the grid of 2V2
reduces the amount of negative causing it to conduct more.
feedback.. With an input signal of 100
mv the amplifier saturates at 8-10.4. Power Supply
approximately 9v output. A 22 turn 500
ohm balance potentiometer adjusts the a. Functional Description. Converts 28 volts DC
output signal to zero under zero signal power to -15, 15, -60, -14, 14, -14, 14 and 200 DC
input. A pair of diodes on the input to voltages which are used to power components of electric
the amplifier protect it from being drive control system.
driven too hard into saturation which
would cause a phase reversal b. Technical Description.
(b) A positive voltage on base of Q1A will (1) The 28 volt DC vehicle power is filtered and
cause it to conduct more heavily and carefully voltage regulated. An oscillator
the voltage at the collector of QIA will circuit then interrupts or chopt the DC into
become less positive. A less positive pulsating DC. This is supplied to the
signal on the base of Q3 will reduce its primary of a transformer which has a
conduction which causes the base of number of secondaries. Each of the
Q1 to go less positive. Therefore, Q4 secondaries is then rectified and filtered
will conduct less and raise its collector which are the various output voltages.
voltage reducing conduction of Q5 and
output lead will become more negative. (2) Circuit card A1 contains all the rectified
circuitry.
8-6.8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
(3) Transformer T1 is the output transformer 8-10.7. Motor-Generator Assembly

with 7 secondary windings. The primary of
this transformer is driven by power a. Functional Description. Consists of one 5
switching transistors Q2 and Q3 that are horsepower, motor, a traverse generator, and an
alternately switched on and off. They are elevating generator assembled as a single unit on a
driven by transformer T2 which in turn is common drive shaft. Each generator incorporates a
driven by an oscillator. The main parts of transistorized control field amplifier to furnish a large
the oscillator circuitry is transformer T3 and change in output for relatively small change in signal from
transistors A2-Q2 and A2-Q5. drive control system.
(4) The balance of the circuitry is the voltage b. Technical Description of Amplifiers. The input to
regulation circuitry which continually adjusts a amplifier is obtained from a preamplifier in the drive
the level of the output voltages. system which furnishes 200 volts DC to amplifier with
positive input at terminal 8 and ground at terminal 1. The
(5) Transformer T2 winding B2- E3, diodes A2 preamplifiers act as variable resistors from the amplifiers
CR8, A2 CR9, A2 CR10, A2 CR11, and terminal 2 to terminal 1 and from terminal 10 to terminal
transistor Q1 form part of the sensing circuit 1. Provisions for 28 volt DC is at terminal 6 and 7
which monitors the switching transistors Q2 (positive polarity) and terminal 1 (ground). For purposes
and Q3. of explanation, left side of amplifier is left-hand channel
and right side is right-hand channel (fig. 8-34).
(6) Transistor Q1 regulates the input voltages
to the power supply. Assume external resistance connected between
Terminals 2 to 1 is higher than the resistance between
8-10.5. Gun and Turret Control Selector Terminals 10 to 1. This difference in resistance will
create a difference in voltages from base of transistor Q1
Consists of turret control switch, stabilization switch, to ground and from base of transistor Q2 to ground. The
and fire control switch. Indicator lights are provided transistors Q1 and Q2 being used as emitter followers, the
above turret control and stabilization switches which voltage from emitter of transistors Q1 to ground becomes
illuminate when switches are actuated. A "Ready" light higher than the voltage from emitter of transistor Q2 to
below turret control selector switch illuminate 20 seconds ground. This results in the voltage from base of transistor
after switch actuation to provide for warm-up of system. Q4 to ground being less than the voltage from the base of
The fire control selector switch is independent of system transistor Q3 to ground. As a result, transistor Q4 will
and derives power from conventional weapon system. It conduct and a current will flow through resistor R17
provides for selective firing of missiles, conventional creating a voltage drop from collector to transistor Q4 to
ammunition or coaxial machine gun. ground. A portion of this voltage is applied to the base of
transistor Q5.
8-10.6. Gunner's or Commander's Control Handle
Assembly Therefore, when transistor Q4 conducts, transistor Q5
receives the base current and it starts conducting.
The control handles are identical and interchangeable
units. Each has a pistol grip with a palm switch which
energizes selective circuits in system, and a trigger for
firing gun-launcher or coaxial machine gun.
8-6.9
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
The current through the resistor Ri9 flows through field and vice versa.
transistor Q5. As a result, transistor Q8 loses its base
current. Consequently, it stops conducting partially or Variable resistors R17 and R18 are provided to adjust the
completely, depending on the amount of the base current gain of the amplifier. For a given difference in
received by Q5. When transistor Q8 stops conducting, resistances between Terminals 2 and 1 and between
partially or completely, the current through resistor R21 Terminals 10 and 1, the input to output current gain can
flows into the base of transistor Q10 turning the transistor be varied by varying the base current to transistors Q6 or
Q10 on. Consequently, transistor Q12 conducts and the Q5, whichever side has less resistance. Diodes CR4 and
current flows through the generator field between CR3 are used to compensate for the change in voltage
Terminals 7 and 5. If the external resistance between drop of base-emitter junction of transistors Q6 and Q5
Terminals 2 to 1 is less than the resistance between with respect to temperature. Diodes CR2 and CR1 are
Terminals 10 to 1, the above description applies to the used to avoid a dead band in the current gain
left-hand channel resulting in current flow in the generator characteristics. Zener diode CR5 protects transistors Q1
field between Terminals 6 to 4. The generator field and Q2 against high voltage spikes from the dc power
derives its current from the 28 volt dc source connected source and also maintains constant a voltage source for
between pins 7 and 1. Diodes CR7 and CR8 provide a transistors Q1 and Q2.
free-wheeling path for field current during sudden shut-off
of the transistor Q12. Variable resistor R10 is used to equalize the base
voltages applied to transistors Q1 and Q2 for equal
The amount of current flowing in the generator field is resistances connected externally between Terminals 2 to
directly proportional to the difference in resistances 1 and between Terminals 10 to 1. When the base
connected externally between Terminals 2 and 1 and voltages of transistors Q1 and Q2 are equalized, the
between Terminals 10 and 1. The greater the resistance current flow in the two generator fields is equal and
difference, the higher the current flow in the generator practically zero.
8-6.10
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Fig. 8-3
Figure 8-2. Removal/installation - printed circuit connector terminal
8-7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 8-3. Replacement of printed circuit connector terminal
8-8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Table 8-2. Electric Drive Control Test Set Checkout Procedure
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
1. The electric drive control test set checkout procedure provides isolation of trouble areas in tile system. The test
set, when "ON" and connected to the system at the amplifier integrator, operates the system with the motor-
generator de-energized.
2. Perform each test procedure in sequence for proper analysis. Observe and record resulting indications after
each test point and then proceed to "NO-GO" remedy if required. If a malfunction occurred and is corrected by
replacement of a component, repeat checkout procedure.
NOTE
Test needle is of the self-locking type. When either lamp is illuminated, the needle has pegged
and locked. Press (press-to-test) lamp to release needle after each test, or rotate selector dial to
next test position.
Observe test set lamps and meter indications for test point (TP) 1 through 7 and 10, 11, 14, 15, 12, 13, and 16 for
non-stabilized mode and 8 through 13 for stabilized mode to determine "GO" or "NO-GO" condition.
3. The following balance and gain potentiometers are provided to adjust the system:
NOTE
Use jeweler screwdriver (MS15230-4) to make adjustments.
Accessory Box
1. Elevation summing gain pot
2. Traverse summing gain pot
3. Elevation gyro balance pot
4. Traverse gyro balance pot
Amplifier Integrator
1. Traverse integrator balance pot
2. Traverse amplifier balance pot
3. Traverse amplifier gain pot
4. Elevation integrator balance pot
5. Elevation amplifier balance pot
6. Elevation amplifier gain pot
Control Handles - Gunner's or Commander's (Palm Switch Depressed)

1. Traverse balance pot (traverse trim button)
2. Elevation balance pot (elevation trim button)
Motor -Generator
1. Traverse amplifier balance pot (R-10)
2. Elevation amplifier balance pot (R-10)
3. Left hand channel current gain (R-18)
4. Right hand channel current gain (R-17)
4. Perform test set procedure and balance electric drive control system whenever a control box or assembly is
replaced in system.
8-9
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Table 8-2. Electric Drive Control Test Set Checkout Procedure - Continued
TEST PROCEDURE REMEDY
1. Check for 28 volts at contact ring using multimeter,

FSN 6625-543-1438.
2. Check vehicle batteries.
3. Check electrical harness and replace if defective.
NOTE
When test set is connected and turned
on, motor generator, traverse, and
elevating mechanisms will not be
energized when palm switches are
depressed. This permits test to be
accomplished without movement of
the turret or weapon.
1. Check bulb-replace if defective.

2. Check 40 amp circuit breaker in accessory box.
a. If 28 volts on both sides (use multimeter FSN
6625-543-1438), check current to control selector.
b. No voltage at input side, check electrical harness.
c. No voltage at output side, replace circuit breaker.
1. Check bulb; replace if defective.

2. If bulb is "GO", press-to-test test set lights.
a. If test set lights illuminate, replace control
selector.
b. If test set lights fail to illuminate, replace timer
4A11, or if "READY" light is flashing on-off,
replace relay 4A6.
1. Check TP2, 3, 6, 7, and 16. If "GO" condition,

replace accessory box or notify maintenance to
replace relay board 4A2.
2. If "NO-GO", replace power supply. If still "NO-GO"
check cable from accessory box to power supply.
3. If servo motor fans come on with time delay, replace
relay board 4A1.
8-10
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Check TP2, 3, 6, 7 and 16. If only partial deflections at

these points, IMMEDIATELY shut off system and replace:
a. Motor generator, b. Amplifier integrator.
If "NO-GO", replace: a. Check power supply. b. Check

Amplifier Integrator. c. Check cable from accessory box
to power supply.
If "NO-GO", a. Check power supply. b. Check Amplifier

Integrator. c. Check cable from accessory box to power
supply.
1. If either handle "NO-GO", exchange handles. If one

handle defective, replace handle.
2. If "NO-GO" on both handles or malfunction remains at
commander's station, check wiring and connectors in
accessory box or replace accessory box.
1. If "NO-GO", replace a. Defective servo motor, b.

Accessory box, and/or c. Check harness.
2. If both servo motors "NO-GO", replace accessory
box.
3. If fans operate without depressing palm switch,
replace relay board 4A1.
1. If either handle "NO-GO", exchange handles. If one

handle defective, replace handle.
2. If "NO-GO" on both handles or malfunction remains at
commander's station, check wiring and connectors in
accessory box or replace accessory box.
If "NO-GO", a. Check power supply, circuit board A1. b.

Check Amplifier Integrator, circuit boards A12 and A13.
c. Check cable from accessory box to power supply
(W3). d. Check relay A5K1.
8-11
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
If "NO-GO", a. Check power supply circuit board A1. b.

Check Amplifier Integrator circuit board A12 and A13. c.
Check cable from accessory box to power supply (W3).
Check relay A5K1.
If deflections are obtained at test position 4 and not at

position 10, switch to "Stab" mode to observe deflections.
If there is deflection, check relay A7K3. If there is no
deflection, check relay A6K4 and/or replace circuit board
A16 in accessory box. Check wiring.
If there is no deflection, replace circuit board A16 and/or

servo motor. Check wiring.
If deflections are obtained at test position 5 and not at

position 11, switch to "Stab" mode to observe deflections.
If there is deflection, check relay A7K3. If there is no
deflection, check relay A6K4 and/or replace circuit board
A15 in accessory box. Disconnect elevation limit switch
to isolate possible malfunction in this assembly. Check
wiring.
If there is no deflection, replace circuit board A15 and/or

servo motor. Check wiring.
8-12
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Adjust traverse integrator balance pot (fig.8-3.1)for null on

meter with palm switch released. Rotate pot (25 turn pot) in
direction of desired needle movement. (Press light
periodically to release needle). If "NO-GO", check TP-15. If
TP-15 is "GO", switch elevation and traverse integrators. If
TP-14 is now "GO", replace defective integrator. If TP-14 is
still "NO-GO", replace and repair amplifier integrator.
Adjust elevation integrator balance pot figs8-3.1, for null on

meter with palm switch released. Rotate pot (25 turn pot) in
direction of desired needle movement. (Press light
periodically to release needle). If "NO-GO", check TP-14. If
TP-14 is "GO", switch elevation and traverse integrators. If
TP-15 is now "GO", replace defective integrator. If TP-15 is
still "NO-GO'; replace and repair amplifier integrator.
Adjust traverse amplifier balance pot (25 turn pot) (fig. 8-3.
1) for null on meter with PALM SWITCH RELEASED. Rotate
pot in direction of desired needle movement. If needle is
pegged, depress light periodically to release needle. If "NO-
GO", check TP-13. If TP-13 is "GO", switch elevation and
traverse amplifiers. If TP-12 is now "GO", replace defective
amplifier card. If TP-12 is still "NO-GO", replace amplifier
integrator. If still "NO-GO", replace motor generator set.
If "NO-GO", replace traverse servo motor.
8-12.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Adjust elevation amplifier balance pot (25 turn pot) (fig.8-3.1)

for null on meter with PALM SWITCH RELEASED. Rotate
pot in direction of desired needle movement. If needle is
pegged, depress light periodically to release needle. If "NO-
GO" check TP-12. If TP-12 is "GO", switch traverse and
elevation amplifiers. If TP-13 is now "GO", replace defective
amplifier. If TP-13 is still "NO-GO", replace amplifier
integrator. If still "NO-GO", replace motor generator set.
If "NO-GO", replace elevation servo motor,
Check TP-1, 2, 3, 6, and 7. If "NO-GO", check relay A5K1 in

accessory box. If "GO", replace circuit board Al in power
supply. Check wiring harness for loose connections. Check
for defective harnesses.
1. Check bulb, replace if defective.

2. Check harness between rate sensor and gyro selector
for loose connections. Check for defective harnesses.
3. Perform missile subsystem checkout procedure, TM
9-2350-230-12. If "GO'', replace accessory box or
replace control selector and/or gyro selector.
If fully deflected, perform missile system check-out procedure,

TM 9-2350-230-12.
8-12.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
If no deflection, perform missile system checkout procedure,

TM 9-2350-230-12. Check gyro selector relay 11K3.
If fully deflected, perform missile system checkout procedure,

TM 9-2350-230-12.
If no deflection, perform missile system checkout procedure,

TM 9-2350-230-12. Check gyro selector relay 11K2.
fig. 8-4
If "NO-GO" and TP-4 and 8 are "GO", replace board 4A12.
fig. 8-3.1
If "NO-GO" and TP-5 and 9 are "GO" replace board 4A13.
8-12.3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
If "NO-GO", re-check TP-12 in non-stab mode.

If non-stab mode is slightly unbalanced. Rebalance as per
TP-12 (non-stab mode).
NOTE
With palm switch depressed and handle
centered, no movement of needle should
occur when switching from non-stab to
stab modes.
If "NO-GO", re-check TP-13 in non-stab mode.

If non-stab mode is slightly unbalanced, rebalance as per TP-
13 (non-stab mode).
NOTE
With palm switch depressed and handle centered, no
movement of needle should occur when switching from
non-stab to stab modes.
CAUTION:
Make sure test set SELECTOR DIAL is on "O" when set is turned off.
FINAL GAIN AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
NOTE
Final balancing of the system for both stabilized and non-stabilized modes should be performed
with engine running. Vibration caused by engine or voltage ripple caused by the generating
system will in no way affect turret test set. However, following use of test set and/or when
general troubleshooting an electrical circuit, running of the engine is not recommended.
1. Operate the Electric Drive Control System.
NOTE
The Electric Drive System may be operated when the test set is connected provided that:
a. Rotary selector switch is in zero position.
b. Toggle switch is in "OFF" position.
2. The system gain is properly adjusted when weapon or turret does not oscillate upon depression of palm switch.
a. If oscillation occurs in Non-Stabilized mode, turn "ELEV" or "TRAV" gain pots on amplifier integrator
clockwise until oscillation stops.
b. If oscillation occurs in Stabilized mode, adjust gain pots on circuit board A-15 (ELEV) and A-16 (TRAV) in
accessory box clockwise to stop oscillations.
8-12.4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
FINAL GAIN AND BALANCING PROCEDURES - Continued
NOTE
1. For optimum system performance, all gain pots should be turned counterclockwise until
oscillation occurs and backed off until the oscillation stops. Gain adjustment should not be
made on a system in a "WARM" state, or after considerable operation.
2. Do not turn gain pot to within 60 degrees or less of the clockwise stop.
3. The system balance is properly adjusted when weapon or turret does not drift upon depression or release of palm
switch.
a. Drift upon depression of palm switch. Null out drift with control handle trim buttons while palm switch is
depressed.
NOTE
Do not readjust trim buttons to initially null out a drift in the stabilized mode.
b. Drift upon release of palm switch.
(1) If test set shows an unbalanced condition on test point 12 and 13, null out drift by adjusting amplifier
balance pots in amplifier integrator with palm switch released.
(2) If test set shows a balanced condition at test points 12 and 13, adjust motor generator balance pots R-10
(TRAV. or ELEVATION) to null out any drift immediately upon releasing the palm switch.
NOTE
Drift may be observed for approximately 2 seconds after release of palm switch. Gear box
clutches then engage and stop motion.
Table 8-2.1. Power Supply and Rate Sensor Checkout Procedure (Less Missile System)
STEP PROCEDURE
This procedure will isolate a power supply or rate sensor malfunction on a less missile system vehicle.
1 Disconnect cables at gyro selector connectors J1 and J2 (Fig. 8-3.2).
2 Start vehicle engine.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to components, always stop vehicle engine and turn master switch
"OFF" when disconnecting or connecting cables.
3 Turn turret control power switch "ON" (Fig. 8-15).
8-12.5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Table 8-2.1. Power Supply and Rate Sensor Checkout Procedure (Less Missile System) - Continued
STEP PROCEDURE
WARNING
To prevent injury to personnel, use care to avoid contact with voltages when making checks.
NOTE
The "MISSILE" position of the fire control selector switch has been blocked, using stop
11619525.
4 Checking unfiltered interlock relay coil voltage. Using multimeter, FSN 6625-543-1438, and cable
connector W2P1, measure voltage between pins "F" (+) and "G" (-). If voltage is below 18 VDC, or no
voltage, power supply is defective, cables are defective (W1 or W2), or low),or no voltage from circuit
cutout box. Disconnect cable connector W1P1 and measure voltage between pin "A" and "B' on circuit
cutout box. Voltage should be between 18 to 30 VDC. If voltage is below 18 VDC, check electrical circuits
from vehicle batteries to circuit cutout box. If cables are not defective (continuity check), replace defective
power supply.
5 Checking 400 CPS voltage
a. Using multimeter and cable connector W2P1, measure 400 CPS voltage between pins "A" (105-125
VAC) and "B" (400 CPS return);if no voltage, replace power supply.
b. To insure that the 400 CPS frequency is within operational limits, measure voltage between pins "P" (+)
and "G" (-). If voltage is less than 10 VDC, replace power supply.
c. To insure that prime power is within operational limits, measure between pins "F" (+) and "G" (-). If
voltage is not present or less than 10 VDC, check cable continuity, poor connections, or low voltage
batteries.
6 Checking gyro heater voltage. Measure voltage between pins "N" (18-30 VDC) and "B" (28 VDC return) on
cable connector J1.
7 Stop engine; turn vehicle master and turret control switches "OFF".
8 Connect cables at gyro selector connectors J1 and J2.
9 Connect test set to amplifier integrator (Fig. 8-3.1).
10 Turn vehicle master switch, turret control switch, and test set switch "ON". Power light illuminates. Ready
light illuminates (Fig. 8-15).
11 Select "STAB" mode on control selector. "STAB" light illuminates (Fig. 8-15).
12 Assuming that the NON-STAB mode of system has checked out satisfactorily, perform test point checkout
procedure for TP-8 and TP-9 (Table 8-2). If there is a "NO-GO" condition (no needle deflection), replace
rate sensor.
13 Balance stabilized system by performing test point checkout procedure for TP-10, TP-11, TP-12, and TP-13
(Table 8-2).
14 Perform final gain and balancing procedures (Table 8-2).
8-12.6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
TEST SET
WE 11814
Figure 8-3.1. Test set connected to amplifier integrator
8-12.7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Figure 8-3.2. Power supply and rate sensor interconnection diagram (less missile system)
Figure 8-3.3. Gyro selector, power supply, and circuit cutout box electrical connections
8-12.8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Table 8-2.2. Elevation/Traverse Servomotors Input Voltage Checkout Procedure
STEP PROCEDURE
1 Disconnect cable connector at either servo motor.
2 With electric drive control system "ON" and motor-generator operating, use a multimeter FSN 6625-543-
1438 to check voltages at cable connector (Refer to figure 6-15 for contact arrangement).
3 Armature voltage
Using a 250 v scale (multimeter T5352/U) and palm switch depressed, measure between contacts "A" and
"C". Traverse handle right - 150 VDC to 200 VDC measured between contacts A(-) and C(+). Traverse
handle left - reversed polarity. Elevate handle up - 150 VDC to 200 VDC measured between contacts A(-)
and C(+).
Depress handle down - reversed polarity.
4 Control field and fan voltage.

Using 60 V scale, measure voltage as palm switch is depressed between pins "F" (18 - 30 VDC) and "F" -
(28 VDC return).
5 Tack generator output

Output is between pins "D" and E" but cannot be measured when cable is disconnected.
8-12.9/(8-12.10 blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Section 8-2. REPAIR OF ACCESSORY BOX ASSEMBLY
Figure 8-4. (Superseded) Repair of accessory box assembly (1 of 2)
8-13
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Fig. 8-1
Fig. 8-2
Fig. 8-3
Figure 8-5. (Superseded) Repair of accessory box assembly (2 of 2)
8-14
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Section 8-3. REPAIR OF AMPLIFIER INTEGRATOR ASSEMBLY
Figure 8-7. Repair of amplifier integrator assembly (1 of 2)
8-15
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Figure 8-8. Repair of amplifier integrator assembly (2 of 21
8-16
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Section 8-4. REPAIR OF POWER SUPPLY
Figure 8-10. Repair of power supply (1 of 2)
8-17
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
13
Figs. 8-2 and 8-3
Fig. 8-12
Fig. 4-3
Figure 8-11. Repair of power supply (2 of 2)
8-18/(8-19 blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Section 8-5. REPAIR OF GUN AND TURRET CONTROL SELECTOR
LEGEND
1. WIRING HARNESS(W6)
2. SCREW (3)
3. FLAT WASHER (3)
4. GUN AND TURRET CONTROL SELECTOR
REMOVAL
1. VEHICLE MASTER SWITCH SHOULD BE
IN "OFF" POSITION.
2. DISCONNECT WIRING HARNESS (ITEM 1)
AT CONNECTOR.
3. REMOVE 3 SCREWS (ITEM 2), WASHERS
(ITEM 3) AND REMOVE GUN AND
TURRET CONTROL SELECTOR (ITEM 4).
INSTALLATION
REVERSE NUMERICAL SEQUENCE.
WE 11689
Figure 8-13. Removal/installation - gun and turret control selector
Figure 8-14. (Superseded) Gun and turret control selector electrical schematic
8-20
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Fig. 8-14
Figure 8-15. Repair of gun and turret control selector (1 of 2)
8-21
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Fig. 8-14
Fig. 4-3
Figure 8-16. Repair of gun and turret control selector (2 of 2)
8-22
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Section 8-6. REPAIR OF GUNNER'S OR COMMANDER'S CONTROL HANDLE ASSEMBLY
Figure 8-17. Repair of gunner's or commander's control handle assembly (1 of 2)
8-23
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Fig. 8-21
Fig. 8-20
Figure 8-18. Repair of gunner's or commander's control handle assembly (2 of 2)
8-24
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Figure 8-19. Gunner's or commander's control handle wiring diagram
8-25
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
figs. 8-17 and 8-18
Figure 8-20. Gunner's or commander's control handle assembly electrical schematic
WE 11682
Figure 8-21. Adjustment of gunner's or commander's control handle contact and support
8-26
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Section 8-7. REPAIR OF GYRO SELECTOR ASSEMBLY
Fig. 4-3
Fig.
Fig.8-23
4-23
Figure 8-22. Repair of gyro selector assembly
8-27
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 8-23. Gyro selector assembly electrical schematic
8-28
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Section 8-8. REPAIR OF ELEVATION LIMIT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Figure 8-24. (Superseded) Repair of elevation limit switch assembly
8-29
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
FIGURE 8-24
Figure 8-25. (Superseded) Check and adjustment of elevation

limit switch assembly using multimeter
8-30
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 8-26. (Added) Check and adjustment of elevation limit

switch assembly using test set ( 1 of 2)
8-31
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 8-27. (Added) Check and adjustment of elevation limit

switch assembly using test set ( 2 of 2)
8-32
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Section 8-9. REPAIR OF MOTOR - GENERATOR
8-11. General hand) which feed the two control fields of each
generator. The procedure for locating a faulty
a. This section is a guide for repairing the motor- component applies to either amplifier.
generator by visual inspection of motor and generators
and locating faulty components incurred during b. Before analyzation of an amplifier which has not
operation either actual or simulated of the traverse or been in operation, the unit should be visually inspected
elevation amplifiers. for proper connections and the use of correct
components (fig. 8-32).
b. Refer to figure 8-34 for motor-generator
schematic diagram and figure 8-1 for motor generator c. Transistor faults are considered to be from
schematic included in the electric drive control system. emitter to collector.
c. Refer to figure 8-33 for amplifier (traverse or d. Table 8-3 is analysis procedure for motor-
elevation) schematic diagram. generator amplifier. In each of the probable cause tests,
if proposed indication does not occur, proceed to the
d. Refer to figure 8-28 for location of electrical next step. These tests must be followed in sequence for
components of motor-generator. proper analyzation.
8-13. Procedure for Pre-Setting and Adjusting

e. Refer to figures 8-28 through 8-31 for Amplifier Control Field, Motor-Generator
disassembly/assembly of motor, traverse generator, and
elevation generator.
a. Refer to figure 8-35 for pre-setting motor
8-12. Traverse or Elevation Amplifiers generator control field amplifier assembly.
a. The two amplifiers are identical and each b. Refer to figures 8-36 and 8-37 for adjustment of
amplifier contains two channels of output (left or right motor-generator control field amplifier assembly.
Table 8-3. MOTOR-GENERATOR AMPLIFIER ANALYSIS
1. Left hand (LH) channel a. Q1 is shorted. Short emitter a. Replace circuit assembly
inoperative. Note. LH of Q1 to ground; if RH chan- if Q1 is shorted.
& RH channels should nel turns off and LH channel
be set up in operation turns on, Q1 is shorted.
(full-on) condition.
b. Q7 is shorted, or Q9 and/or b. Replace circuit assembly
Q11 is open. Short base of if Q7 is shorted. If Q9
Q7 to ground; if LH channel and/or Q11 were deter-
does not operate, Q7 is mined defective; test and
shorted or Q9 and/or Q11 replace faulty transistor(s).
base-emitter circuit is open.
Disconnect Q7 collector from
R22 and if LH channel still
does not operate, Q9 and/or
Q11 is open. If operation
occurs, Q7 is shorted.
c. Q6 is open. Short base of Q6 to c. Replace circuit assembly

emitter of Q3; if LH channel if Q6 is open.
does not operate, Q6 is open.
d. Q3 is open. Short base and col- d. Replace circuit assembly

lector of Q3 together; if LH if Q3 is open.
channel does not operate,
Q3 is open.
8-33/(8-34 blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 8-3. MOTOR-GENERATOR AMPLIFIER ANALYSIS - CONTINUED
2. LH channel operating full- a. CR2 is open. Short anode and a. Replace circuit assembly
on without input signal cathode of CR2 together; if if CR2 is open.
present. Note. LH chan- operation of LH channel
nel set up in operation discontinues, CR2 is open.
(full-on) condition with-
out input signal. b. CR4 is open. Short anode and b. Replace circuit assembly
cathode of CR4 to ground; if if CR4 is open.
operation of LH channel dis-
continues, CR4 is open.
c. CR5 is shorted. 22 volts c. Replace circuit assembly

should exist at cathode of if CR5 is shorted.
CR5. If no voltage, CR5
is shorted.
d. Q1 is open. Short emitter and d. Replace circuit assembly

collector of Q1 together; if if Q1 is shorted.
LH channel discontinues
operation, Q1 is open.
e. Q3 is shorted. Short collector e. Replace circuit assembly

of Q3 to ground; if LH dis- if Q3 is shorted.
continues operation, Q3 is
shorted.
f. Q11 is shorted. Short base of f. Replace Q11 if shorted.

Q11 to ground; if operation
continues, Q11 is shorted.
g. Q9 is shorted. Short base of g. Replace Q9 if shorted.

h. QS is shorted or Q7 is open. h. Replace circuit assembly

Disconnect emitter of Q6 if Q6 is shorted or Q7
from the circuit board; if is open.
LH channel discontinues
operation, Q6 is shorted.
If LH channel operation
continues, Q7 is open.
3. Degraded operation of a. CR2 is shorted. (3.2 amps a. Replace circuit assembly

LH channel. maximum attainable). Re- if CR2 is shorted.
move from circuit and test.
b. CR4 is shorted. (2.5 amps b. Replace circuit assembly

maximum attainable). Re- if CR4 is shorted.
c. Q9 is open. (1.5 amps maxi- c. Replace Q9 if open.

mum attainable). Remove
from circuit and test.
d. Q11 is open. (1.5 amps maxi- d. Replace Q11 if open.

mum attainable). Remove
from circuit and test.
8-35
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 8-3. MOTOR-GENERATOR AMPLIFIER ANALYSIS - CONTINUED
4. Right Hand (RH) channel a. Q is shorted. Short emitter a. Replace circuit assembly
inoperative. (Note. LH of Q12 to ground; if LH if Q2 is shorted.
and RH channels should channel turns off and RH
be in operation (full-on) channel turns on, Q2 is
condition. shorted.
b. Q is shorted; or Q10 and/or b. Replace circuit assembly

Q12 is open. Short base of if Q8 is shorted. If Q10
Q8 to ground, If RH chan- and/or Q12 were deter-
nel does not operate, Q8 is mined defective; test
shorted or Q10 and/or Q12 and replace faulty tran-
base-emitter circuit is open. sistor(s).
Disconnect Q8 collector from
R21 and if RH channel still
does not operate, Q10 and/
or Q12 is open. If opera-
tion occurs, Q8 is shorted.
c. Q5 is open. Short base of Q5 c. Replace circuit assembly

to emitter of Q4; if RH chan- if Q5 is open.
nel does not operate, Q5
is open.
d. Q4 is open. Short base and d. Replace circuit assembly

collector of Q4 together; if if Q is open.
RH channel does not operate,
Q4 is open.
5. RH channel operating a. CR is open. Short anode and a. Replace circuit assembly

full-on without input cathode of CR1 together; if if CR1 is open.
signal present. Note. operation of RH channel
IH channel should be discontinues, CR1 is open.
In operation (full-on)
condition without b. CR3 is open. Short anode and b. Replace circuit assembly
input signal. cathode of CR3 to ground; if if CR3 is open.
operation of RH channel dis-
continues, CR3 is open.
c. CR5 is shorted. 22 volts c. Replace circuit assembly

should exist at cathode of if CR5 is shorted.
CR5. If no voltage, CR5 is
shorted.
d. Q2 is open. Short emitter aid d. Replace circuit assembly

collector of Q2 together; if if Q2 in open.
RH channel discontinues
operation, Q2 is open.
8-36
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 8-3. MOTOR-GENERATOR AMIRER ANALYSIS - CONTINUED
e. Q4 is shorted. Short collector e. Replace circuit assembly

of Q4 to ground; RH channel if Q4 is shorted.
discontinues, Q4 is shorted.
f. Q12 is shorted. Short base of f. Replace Q12 if shorted.

g. Q10 is shorted. Short base of g. Replace Q10 if shorted.

h. Q5 is shorted or Q8 is open. h. Replace circuit assembly

Disconnect emitter of Q5 if Q5 is shorted or Q8
from circuit board. If RH is open.
channel discontinues oper-
ation, Q5 is shorted. If RH
channel operation continues,
Q8 is open.
6. Degraded operation of a. CR1 is shorted. (3.2 amps a. Replace circuit assembly

RH channel. maximum attainable). Re- if CR1 is shorted.
b. CR3 is shorted. (2.5 amps b. Replace circuit assembly

maximum attainable). Re- if CR3 is shorted.
c. Q10 is open. (1.5 amps c. Replace Q10 if open.

maximum attainable). Re-
8-37
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 8-28. (Added) Repair of motor - generator (1 of 2)
8-38
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 8-4. Motor-Generator (Figure 8-28).
REPAIR - REPLACE UNSERVICEABLE COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED.
LEGEND
1. SCREW (7) 37. SPACER (2)

2. LOCK WASHER (7) 38. NUT (2)
3. COVER 39. LOCK WASHER (2)
4. SCREW (12) 40. FLAT WASHER (2)
5. LOCK WASHER (12) 41. TIME DELAY CIRCUIT ASSY
6. FLAT WASHER (12) 42. SCREW (4)
7. AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT ASSY (2) 43. LOCK WASHER (4)
(AR1 AND AR2) 44. RELAY (K1 AND K2)
EACH AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT CONSISTS OF: 45. SCREW
8. SCREW (4) 46. LOCK WASHER
9. LOCK WASHER (4) 47. NUT
10. FLAT WASHER (4) 48. SCREW (2)
11. AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY 49. NUT (2)
12. SCREW (8) 50. LOCK WASHER (2)
13. LUG (6) 51. ELECTRICAL LEAD (2)
14. NUT (8) 52. FIXED RESISTOR (R7)
15. LOCK WASHER (8) 53. SPACER (2)
16. FLAT WASHER 54. SCREW (4)
17. TRANSISTOR (4) 55. LOCK WASHER (4)
18. FIXED RESISTOR (2) 56. NUT (2)
19. FIXED RESISTOR 57. TERMINAL BOARD
20. VARIABLE RESISTOR (2) 58. SCREW (2)
21. VARIABLE RESISTOR 59. LOCK WASHER (2)
22. SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE (2) 60. SCREW (4)
23. LOCK WASHER (2) 61. LOCK WASHER (4)
25. LOCK WASHER (6) 63. CONNECTOR (26)
26. TERMINAL LUG 64. SCREW (16)
27. TERMINAL LUG 65. LOCK WASHER (16)
29. LOCK WASHER (2) 67. CONNECTOR (J4)
30. RETAINING CLAMP 68. CONNECTOR (J5)
31. ELECTRICAL LEAD 69. CONNECTOR (J1)
32. ELECTRICAL LEAD (RED) 70. CONNECTOR (J2)
33. ELECTRICAL LEAD (RED)(2) 71. GROMMET (2)
34. ELECTRICAL LEAD (BLACK) 72. CONTROL HOUSING
35. SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE (CR1)
36. SCREW (2)
8-39
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 8-29. (Added) Repair of motor - generator (2 of 2)
Figure 8-30. (Added) Repair of motor - generator elevation or traverse D.C. generator
8-40
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 8-31. (Added) Repair of motor - generator D.C. motor
8-41
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 8-32. (Added) Motor - generator elevation or traverse amplifier
8-42
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 8-33. (Added) Motor - generator elevation or traverse amplifier electrical schematic
8-43
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 8-34. (Added) Motor - generator electrical schematic
8-44
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figures 8-36 and 8-37
Figure 8-35. Pre-setting motor-generator control field amplifier assembly
8-45
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
figure 8-35
figure 9-10.1
table 8-2
Figure 8-36. Adjustment of motor-generator control field amplifier assembly (1 of 2)
8-46
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 8-37. Adjustment of motor-generator control field amplifier assembly (2 of 2)
8-47/(8-48 blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
CHAPTER 9
REPAIR OF GUN-LAUNCHER ELEVATING AND TURRET

TRAVERSE MECHANISMS
9-1. General
Refer to Chapter 4 for maintenance, inspection, and repair data prior to repair of the following components.
Table 9-1. Gun-Launcher Elevating and Turret Traverse Mechanisms-Repair

Adjust Replace
Gun-Launcher Elevating Mechanism 9-1 Figs. 9-7, , Figs. 9-1 through 9- 6

9-8, 9-9
Turret Traverse Mechanism 9-2 Figs. 9-18, Figs. 9-10 through 9-17
9-19,9-20,
9-21
Servomotor 9-3 Fig. 9-22 and 9-23
Section 9-1. GUN-LAUNCHER ELEVATING MECHANISM
Figs. 9-22 and 9-23
Figure 9-1. Disassembly/assembly - elevating mechanism (1 of 6)
9-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
ITEM 26
(ITEM 28)
(ITEM 29)
(ITEM 23)
(ITEM 3, FIG. 9-5)
fig. 9-5
9-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 9-2. Disassembly/Assembly-Elevating Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 9-2)
DISASSEMBLY
Follow Numerical Sequence
1. Screw (4) 12. Cap Gasket 23. Ball Bearing
2. Lock Washer (4) 13. Screw (4) 24. Bearing Retainer
3. Switch and Bracket Assy. 14. Flat Washer (4) 25. Bevel Gearshaft
4. Nut (2) 15. Handwheel Group 26. No-Back Device
5. Flat Washer (2) 16. Handwheel Gasket 27. Driving Member
6. Screw (2) 17. Key 28. Locking Bar
7. Switch 18. Bevel Gearshaft Assy. 29. Spring (4)
8. Bracket 19. Shim 30. Pin Key
9. Screw (4) 20. Key 31. Lock Ring
10. Flat Washer (4) 21. Lock Nut 32. Driven Member
11. Gearshaft Retainer Cap 22. Tang Lock Washer 33. Washer
ASSEMBLY
Reverse Disassembly Procedure.
Table 9-3. Elevating Mechanism - Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-2)
Ref Inspection Data and Size and Fit Repair

Number Points of Measurement of New Parts Limit
23 Ball Bearing
ID .6690 to .6693 .6694
OD 1.5743 to 1.5748 1.5741
24 Retainer
ID of bore for bearing (item 23). i.5747 to 1.5753 1.5755
Fit of bearing (item 23) in bore. .0001T to .0010L .0014L
OD of retainer to fit in upper
housing (Fig. 9-5, item 19). 1.748 to 1.749 1.7475
25 Gearshaft
OD journal for bearing (item 23). .8692 to .6695 *
Fit of bearing (item 23) on journal. .0005T to .0001L .0001L
OD journal to fit in bore of reverse
lock clutch driven member
(item 32). .998 to .999 *
Backlash with mating gear (Fig. 9-5,
item 10). .002 to .004 .005
27 Reverse Lock Clutch Driven Member
and OD to fit in upper housing (Fig. 9-5,
32 item 19). 3.1991 to 3.1996 3.1990
ID to fit on handwheel shaft (Fig. 9-3,
item 2) for driving member and
bevel gearshaft and (item 18) ID
driven member. 1.000 to 1.001 1.0015
Fit of gearshaft (item 25) in driven
member (item 32). .001L to .003 .004L
26 No-Back Device
Torque in lb-ft to rotate unloaded
unit assembled in housing. Min. 13, Max. 19 Min. 13, Max. 19
29 Spring
Replace spring if distorted or damaged.
33 Washer
OD 3.127 to 3.147 3.118
Thickness .305 to .307 .304
9-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
(ITEMS 10 AND 22)
9-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 9-4. Disassembly/Assembly -Elevating Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 93)
DISASSEMBLY
Follow Numerical Sequence.
1. Spring Pin 15. Spring
2. Handwheel Shaft 16. Washer
3. Small Retaining Ring 17. Switch Actuating Shaft
4. Large Retaining Ring 18. Grip Shaft
5. Ball Bearing 19. Needle Bearings (2)
6. Bearing Retainer 20. Grip
7. Handwheel, Retainer and Shaft Group 21. Handwheel, Lock Pin, and Ball Detent Grout
8. Spring Pin 22. Setscrew
9. Switch Actuating Ring 23. Spring
10. Setscrew 24. Ball
11. Washer 25. Handwheel and Lock Pin
12. Grip and Shaft Group 26. Pin
13. Spring Pin 27. Lock Pin
14. Spring Retainer 28. Handwheel
ASSEMBLY
Table 9-5. Elevating Mechanism-Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-3)

2 Handwheel Shaft
OD to fit in bearing (item 5) and
reverse lock clutch driving member
(Fig. 9-2, item 27) .9990 to .9994 .9989
Fit in driving member. .0006L to .0011L .0015L
5 Ball Bearing
ID 0.9996 to 1.0000 1.0002
OD 1.9995 to 2.0000 1.9994
Bearing fit on shaft (item 2). .0002L to .OOOL .0012L
6 Bearing Retainer
ID for bearing (item 5). 2.000 to 2.001 2.0013
Fit of bearing (item 5) in retainer. .000 to .0006L .0008L
15 Spring
Free length, in inches 1.38
Spring rate, pounds inches. 9.9
17 Switch Actuating Shaft
OD to fit in grip shaft (item 18). .499 to .500 .497
18 Grip aft
OD journal for bearing (item 19) .8745 to .8750 .8743
ID of bore for shaft (item 17). .501 to .502 .503
Fit of shaft (item 17) in bore. .001L to .003L .005L
19 Needle Bearings
OD 1.1245 to 1.125 *
ID .8755 to .87865 .877
Fit bearing on shaft (item 18). .0005L to .002L .003L
20 Grip
ID of bore for bearing (item 19). 1.1245 to 1.1255 1.126
Fit of bearing (item 19) in grip. .0005T to .0010L .0015L
9-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
9-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Table 9-6. Elevating Mechanism -Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-4)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Nut 14. Gearshaft Retaining Ring
2. Screw 15. Spur Gearshaft
3. Clamp (Small) 16. Bearing Retaining Ring
4. Upper Clamp Assy. 17. Ball Bearing (2)
5. Nut 18. Plate Spacer
6. Screw 19. Actuator Small Bearing Cup
7. Clamp (Large) 20. Lower Housing
8. Lower Clamp Assy. 21. Upper Housing and Clutch Group (With
9. Rubber Bellows Actuator Large Bearing Cup)
10. Self-locking Bolt (10) 22. Bearing Cup Retaining Ring
11. Laminated Shim 23. Actuator Large Bearing Cup
12. Actuator Assy. (Without Bearing Cups) 24. Upper Housing and Clutch
13. Lower Housing and Spur Gearshaft
Group (With Actuator Small Bearing Cup)
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY NOTES
1. Fill 3/4 space between all bearing inner and outer races with grease, aircraft and instrument - MIL-G-23827.
2. Refer to figure 9-8 for item 11 shimming instructions.
3. Tighten screw (item 10) 32 to 35 pound-feet.
Table 9-7. Elevating Mechanism--Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-4)

15 Spur Gearshaft
OD of gear over two .144 dia. pins. 1.6942 to 1.6945 1.6932
Backlash between idler spur gear
(Fig. 9-5, item 31). .002 to .004 .0055
Spline space width. .043 to .046 .0475
OD of journal for bearing (item 17). .7867 to .7871 .7863
17 Ball Bearing
OD 1.6530 to 1.6526 1.6526
ID .7870 to .7874 .7876
Fit of bearing on spur gearshaft
(item 15). .0001T to .00007L .0010L
18 Plate Spacer
Width .304 to .305 .303
19 Actuator Bearing (Small)
OD 3.4375 to 3.4385 3.4373
ID 2.250 to 2.2505 2.251
20 Lower Housing
ID bore for bearing (item 19). 3.4355 to 3.4365 3.437
Fit of bearing (item 19). .0030T to .0010T .0005T
ID bore for bearing (item 17) in
housing.
ID bore for magnetic clutch shaft
bearing (Fig. 9-5, item 23). 1.3749 to 1.3755 1.3758
ID bore for trunnion bearing. .7505 to .7515 .7519
23 Actuator Bearing (Large)
OD 3.8437 to 3.8447 3.8434
ID 2.250 to 2.2505 2.251
9-7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
(ITEM 23)
Fig. 9-9
Fig. 9-7
(ITEM 24)
(ITEM 25(
(ITEMS 26, 33, 42)
(ITEMS 1, 5, 9, 20, 29, 30)
(ITEM 1 AND 5)
Fig. 9-5.1
9-8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Table 9-8. Disassembly/Assembly- Elevating Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 9-5)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Screw (4) 16. Retaining Ring 30. Screw (4)
2. Washer (4) 17. Spring Pin 31. Adapter Plate
3. Cover 18. Knob 32. Shim, Laminated
4. Gasket 19. Shaft 33. Idler Gear Bearing
5. Screw (2) 20. Screw (4) 34. Idler Gear
6. Washer (2) 21. Dowel Pin (2) 35. Shim, Laminated
7. Cover 22. Housing 36. Clutch Spacer
8. Gasket 23. Clutch Assy 37. Armature Plate
9. Screw (4) 24. Nut 38. Spring (3)
10. Bevel Gear 25. Key Washer 39. Magnet Body
11. Retaining Ring 26. Ball Bearing 40. Washer
12. Retaining Ring 27. Washer 41. Retainer
13. Spring Pin 28. Spur Gear and 42. Ball Bearing
14. Knob Adapter Plate 43. Shaft
15. Shaft 29. Setscrew (4) 44. Key
ASSEMBLY 45. Clip (Narrow)
Reverse Disassembly Procedure. 46. Clip (Wide)
Table 9-9. Elevating Mechanism--inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-5)
10 Bevel Gear
ID bore for shaft (23). .812 to .813 .8135
Backlash with gearshaft (23). .002 to .004 .006
22 Upper Housing
ID bore for bearing cup (Fig. 9-4, item 23). 3.8437 to 3.8447 3.8450
Bearing cup fit in housing .001T to .001L .0015L
ID bore for retainer (Fig. 9-2, item 24). 1.750 to 1.751 1.7515
Fit of retainer in bore (Fig. 9-2, item 24). .001L to .003L .004L
ID bore for bearing (42). 2.0471 to 2.0477 2.0480
31 Adapter Plate
Backlash between plate (37) and body (39)
with complete reversal and 2 lbs-ft. torque 00 12' 0 15
33 Idler Gear Bearing
ID .6690 to .6693 .6695
OD 1.5743 to 1.5748 1.5741
34 Spur Gear
OD over two .1440 dia. pins. 2.9456 to 2.9432 2.9425
ID bore for bearing (33). 1.5742 to 1.5748 1.575
Fit of bearing (33) in gear. .0006T to .0005L .0008L
36 Spacer
OD journal to fit in clutch plate (37). 1.080 to 1.090 1.060
ID bore to fit on clutch shaft (43). .877 to .885 .840
42 Ball Bearing
OD 2.0472 to 2.0467 2.0465
ID .9839 to .9843 .9844
Fit of bearing in housing (22). .0001L to .0010L .0013L
26 Ball Bearing
OD 1.370 to 1.375 1.3698
ID .6247 to .625 .6253
Bearing fit in housing (Fig. 9-4, item 20). .0001T to .0055L .0056L
43 Clutch Shaft
OD for bearing (26). .6247 to .625 .6242
Fit of bearing (26) on shaft. .0006T to .0003T .0001T
OD Journal for spacer (36). .874 to .875 .8735
Fit of spacer (36) on shaft. .002L to .010L .013L
OD journal for bearing (42). .9842 to .9847 .9841
Fit of bearing (43) shaft, .0008T to .0001L .0001L
9-8.1/(9-8.2 blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
(FIG. 2-2.2)
Figs.. 9-5 or 9-16
Figure 9-5.1. Adapter plate and idler gear alignment and shimming procedure
9-9
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
(ITEM 10)
(ITEM 1)
9-10
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 9-10. Disassembly/Assembly - Elevating Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 9-6)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Setscrew 6. Spring Pin
2. Stop 7. Connector
3. Small Bearing 8. Large Bearing
4. Spur Gear 9. Self-Aligning Bearing
5. Key 10. Actuator
ASSEMBLY
Table 9-11. Elevating Mechanism - Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-6)

4 Spur Gear
7 Connector
ID for self-aligning bearing (item 8). 1.2487 to 1.2497 1.2499
8 Self-Aligning Bearing
OD 1.2500 to 1.2495 1.2493
ID .7500 to .7496 .7502
Bearing fit in connector (item 7). .0013T to .0002L .0003L
10 Actuator Assembly
(A) OD of journal on ball screw nut for
bearing (Fig. 9-4, item 19 and 23, 2.2510 to 2.2520 2.2507
(B) Fit of bearing (Fig. 9-4, item 19
and 23, also items 3 and 9) on
ball screw nut. .002T to .0005T .0002T
(C) OD of journal on ball screw nut for
spur gear (item 4). 2.461 to 2.462 2.4607
(D) Fit of spur gear (item 4) on ball
screw nut. .001ST to .0005T .0002T
(E) Backlash between ball screw nut .000 to .0002 .0002 of if in
and ball screw with 20 pounds excess of 1.5 mil.
axial load applied to end of ball Gun-Launcher
screw thread in both directions. elevation back-
lash, is directly
attributed to ex-
cess ball screw
backlash.
(F) Torque to translate unloaded ball 3 lb-in and uni- 6 lb-in.

screw nut throughout travel. form with torque and uniform with-
variation not to in 8 oz. in.
exceed 10 oz-in throughout travel.
over any one re-
volution of the
screw.
9-11
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Figure 9-5
(Fig. 9-5.1)
(Fig. 9-5
Fig. 9-1
Figure 9-7. Elevating mechanism magnetic clutch plates shimming procedure
Fig. 9-6 and 9-4
Figure 9-8. Elevating mechanism lower housing-to-upper housing actuator bearing shimming
procedure
9-12
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figs. 9-7 and 9-5
Figure 9-9. Elevating mechanism handwheel bevel gearshaft and magnetic clutch bevel gear
shimming procedure
9-13
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Section 9-2. REPAIR OF TURRET TRAVERSE MECHANISM
Figure 9-10. Disassembly/assembly - turret traverse mechanism (1 of 8)
9-14
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Table 9-12. Disassembly/Assembly-Turret Traverse Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 9-10)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Spring Pin 13. Self-locking Bolt (2)
2. Crank Handle Shaft 14. Flat Washer (2)
3. Crank Handle 15. Electric Servo Motor
4. Spring Pin 16. Turret Traverse Mechanism
5. Crank Arm Upper and Lower Housing
6. Manual Drive Shaft and Gearing
7. Setscrew 17. Spring Pin
8. Ball Bushing 18. Knob
9. Crank Bracket 19. Flat Washer
10. Self-locking Nut (2) 20. Knob Shaft
11. Flat Washer (2) 21. Protective Screen Bracket
12. Machine Bolt (2) 22. Screw (2)
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY NOTES
1. Apply light coating of grease-aircraft and instrument - MIL-G-23827 to surface of crank bracket ball bushing
(item 8).
2. Apply sealing compound Grade CV, MIL-S-22473 to screw threads and tighten screws (item 12) 18 to 20
pound-feet.
3. Tighten screws (item 13) 18 to 22 pound-feet.
Table 9.13. Turret Traverse Mechanism -Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-10)

2 Crank Handle Shaft
OD of shaft. .622 to .623 .618
OD of shoulder to fit in arm (item 5). .562 to .563 .561
3 Crank Handle
Fit of shaft (item 2) in handle. .002L to .006L .015L
5 Crank Arm
Fit of shaft (item 2) in arm. 0 to .002L .004L
6 Manual Drive Shaft
OD of shoulder to fit in arm (item 5). .8742 to .8747 .8737
ID of socket to fit shaft (Fig. 9-13,
item 15). .687 to .688 .693
Width of slot to fit pin (Fig. 9-13,
item 20). .188 to .189 .193
Fit of shaft in arm (item 5). .0001T to .0005L .003L
8 Ball Bushing
OD 1.4370 to 1.4375 1.4365
ID .8746 to .8750 .8752
Diametral clearance .003 to .007 .015
Fit of shaft (item 6) in bushing. .0001T to .0018L .0025L
9 Crank Bracket
ID of bore for bushing (item 8). 1.4362 to 1.4372 1.4382
Fit of bushing (item 8) in bore. .0013T to .0002L .002L
9-15
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
9-16
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Table 9-14. Disassembly/Assembly -Turret Traverse Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 9-11)
DISASSEMBLY

1. Lower Housing Group 10. Nut
2. Self-locking Bolt (6) 11. Flat Washer
3. Packing 12. Anti-Backlash Gear
4. Shim 13. Plug
5. Upper Housing Group 14. Torsion Bar
6. Screw (3) 15. Retaining Ring
7. Flat Washer (3) 16. Lock Nut
8. Protective Cover 17. Tang Lock Washer
9. Cotter Pin 18. Bevel Gear
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY NOTES
1. Apply Sealing Compound (Grade CV, MIL-S-22473) to screw threads (item 6) and tighten 2 to 3 pound-feet.
2. Tighten bolts (item 2) 32 to 38 pound-feet.
3. Refer to Figure 9-18 for shimming adjustment for shim (4).
4. Tighten lock nut (16) 27 to 30 pound-feet. If lock washer (17) tang is not aligned with slot in nut, tighten to next
slot.
5. Apply sealing compound 8030-226-6436 to plug (13).
Table 9-15. Turret Traverse Mechanism - inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-11)

12 Anti-Backlash Gear
ID of splines between two .0680 dia.
pins. .7310 to .7344 .735
ID of bore to fit on gearshaft (Fig. 9- 12
item 1). 1.500 to 1.501 1.5017
14 Torsion Bar
OD of splines over two .0800 dia. pins. .9548 to. 956R 9528
Replace if cracked.
18 Bevel Gear, Part of Matched Set with

Gearshaft (Fig. 9-17, item 17).
If teeth are badly worn or chipped,
replace both gears.
Spline ID between two .1040 dia. pins. 1.3467 to 1.3492 1.3512
Backlash with mating gear (Fig. 9-17,
(item 3). .001 to .007 .009
9-17
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
9-18
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Table 9-16. Disassembly/Assembly -Turret Traverse Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 9-12)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Spur Drive Gearshaft 6. Shim, Laminated
2. Needle Bearing 7. Ball Bearing
3. Lock Wire 8. Seal
4. Screw (5) 9. Lubricant Drain Plug
5. Ball Bearing Retainer 10. Lower Housing
ASSEMBLY
Table 9-17. Turret Traverse Mechanism - Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-12)

1 Spur Drive Gearshaft

Backlash with turret ring gear. .008 to .013 .018
ID spline between two .0720 dia. pins. .7310 to .7334 .7344
OD spines for bevel gear (Fig. 9-11,
item 18) over two .120 dia. pins. 1.6850 to 1.6870 1. 6845
Journal for anti-backlash gear (Fig. 9-11,
item 12). 1.4978 to 1.4988 1.4978
Fit of anti-backlash gear on shaft. .0012L to .0032L .005L
Journal for bearing (item 2). 1.9994 to 2.000 1.9991
Journal for seal (item 8) contact. 1.933 to 1.936 1.930
2 Needle Bearing
OD 2.3745 to 2.3755 2.3743
ID 1.9994 to 2.000 2. 0001
Fit of bearing on gearshaft (item 1). .0006L to .0006T .0009L
7 Ball Bearing
OD 3.3459 to 3.3465 3.3456
ID 1.7712 to 1.7717 1.7719
Fit of bearing on gearshaft (item 1). .0001T to .0009L .001L
10 Lower Housing
Bore for bearing (item 2). 2.3745 to 2.3755 2. 3758
Fit of bearing (item 2) in housing. .001T to .001L .0013L
Bore for bearing (item 7). 3.3464 to 3.3472 3.3475
Fit of bearing (item 7) in housing. .0001T to. 0013L .0017L
9-19
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
9-20
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6

DISASSEMBLY
1. Screw (4) 13. Drive Bevel Gear 25. Bearing
2. Flat Washer (4) 14. Sleeve 26. Manual Drive Housing
3. Gasket 15. Manual Drive Shaft 27. No-Back Device
4. Manual Drive Housing Group 16. Key 28. Driven Member
5. Screw (4) 17. Shaft Outer Bearing 29. Pin Key
6. Bearing Cap 18. Nut 30. Locking Bar
7. Gasket 19. Setscrew 31. Spring (4)
8. Shim, Laminated 20. Crank Handle Shaft Pin 32. Lock Ring
9. Outer Bearing Retainer 21. Bearing Small Retaining Ring 33. Driven Member
10. Lock Nut 22. Bearing Large Retaining Ring 34. Key
11. Tang Lock Washer 23. Key 35. Spacer
12. Shaft Inner Bearing 24. Driven Bevel Gear 36. Lower Housing Group
ASSEMBLY
Table 9-17. Turret Traverse Mechanism - Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-12)
9 Outer Bearing Retainer
OD for fit in housing (item 26). 1.873 to 1.874 1.872
ID bore for bearing (item 17). 1.5748 to 1.5754 1.5769
12 Shaft Inner bearing
OD 1.3775 to 1.3780 1.3770
ID . 5903 to .5906 .591
13 Drive Bevel Gear
Backlash with mating gearshaft (item24) .002 to .004 .0051
15 Manual Drive Shaft
OD of journal for bearing (item 12). .5905 to .5908 **
OD of journal for gear (item 13). .620 to .621 618
Fit of gear (item 13) on journal. .000 to .002L .0035L
OD of journal for bearing (item 17). .6692 to .6695 *
17 Shaft Outer Bearing
OD 1.5743 to 1.5748 1.5740
ID .6690 to .6693 .6695
Fit of bearing on shaft (item 15). .0005T to .0001L .0003L
24 Driven Bevel Gearshaft
OD journal for bearing (item 25). 1.1810 to 1.1814 1.1808
OD journal for driven member of
reverse lock clutch (item 28). .998 to .999 .9975
Backlash with mating gear (item 13). .002 to .004 .0051
25 Bearing
OD 2.4404 to 2.4409 2.4401
ID 1.1807 to 1.1811 1.1815
Fit of bearing on gearshaft (item 24). .0007T to .0001L .0002L
26 Manual Drive Housing
ID of bore for bearing (item 12). 1.3779 to 1.3785 **
Fit of bearing (item 12) in housing. .0001T to .0011L .0015L
ID ofd bore for bearing retainer (item 9). 1.875 to 1.876 **
Fit of bearing retainer (item 9) in housing. .001L to .003L .0035L
Fit of bearing (item 25) in housing. .0001 T to .0011L .0018L
27 No-Back Device
Torque in pound inches to rotate un-
loaded unit assembled in housing.
Replace spring (item 31) it dis- Min. 13, Ma. 19 Min 13,
torted or damaged. Max. 19
9-21
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 9-14. (Superseded) Disassembly/assembly - turret traverse mechanism (5 of 8)
9-22
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Table 9-20. Disassembly/Assembly--Turret Traverse Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 9-14)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Screw (4) 11. Electrical Contact Brush
2. Flat Washer (4) 12. Upper Housing Cover, Slip Clutch, Mag-
3. Clutch Housing netic Clutch and Gearing Group
4. Housing Gasket 13. Cover Gasket
5. Clutch Ring 14. Screw (6)
6. Needle Roller Bearing 15. Flat Washer (6)
7. Retaining Ring 16. Inspection Cover
8. Slip Clutch Housing 17. Cover Gasket
9. Flat Washer 18. Upper Housing Group
10. Self-locking Bolt (6) 19. Upper Housing
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY NOTES
1. Apply a light coating of grease-aircraft and instrument - MIL-G-23827 to interior of needle bearings.
2. Tighten upper housing cover group (12) and clutch housing (3) screws 32 to 38 pound-feet.
3. Tighten inspection cover screws (14) 9 to 10 pound-feet.
4. Apply sealing compound (Grade CV, MIL-S-22473) to screw threads(items 1 and 14)
Table 9-21. Turret Traverse Mechanism-Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-14)

Clutch Housing
ID of bore for bearing (item 6). 3.1245 to 3.1255 3.126
6 Needle Roller Bearing
OD 3.1245 to 3.125 **
ID 2.7510 to 2.7525 **
Fit of bearing in housing (item 3) .0005T to .001L .002L
8 Slip Clutch Housing

Fit of bearing (item 6) in housing. .001L to .0031L .0045L
Bore for slip clutch shaft (Fig. 9-16,
item 23). .703 to .704 .705
11 Electrical Contact Brush
Replace if insulator or brush is
cracked or broken or if spring
force on the brush is less than
14 ounces in operating position.
9-23
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
9-24
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 9-22. Disassembly/Assembly--Turret Traverse Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 9-15)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Screw (4) 11. Idler Gear Bearing Cap
2. Clutch Shaft Bearing Cap 12. Cap Gasket
3. Cap Gasket 13. Idler Spur Gear and Bearings
4. Lock Nut 14. Bearing
5. Lock Washer 15. Idler Spur Gear
6. Slip Clutch and Magnetic Clutch Group 16. Adapter Gear Retaining Ring
7. Bearing Retainer Ring 17. Electric Servo Motor Adapter Gear and
8. Clutch Shaft Bearing Bearing
9. Screw (2) 18. Upper Housing End Cover
10. Flat Washer (2) 19. Bearing
20. Adapter Gear
ASSEMBLY
Table 9-23. Turret Traverse Mechanism-Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-15)
8 Clutch Shaft Bearing
OD 1.3775 to 1.3780 1.3773
ID .5903 to .5906 .5908
14 Idler Spur Gear Bearings
OD 1.2593 to 1.2598 1.2591
ID .5903 to .5906 .5907
15 Idler Spur Gear
OD of gear over two .1440 dia pins. 2.7761 to 2.7785 2.7756
Backlash between mating gear (Fig. 9-17
item 3) .002 to .004 .006
OD shaft. .5905 to .5908 .5903
Fit of bearings (item 14) on shaft. .0005T to .001T .0000
19 Adapter Gear Bearings
OD 1.8499 to 1.8504 1.8497
ID .9839 to .9843 .9845
20 Electric Servo Motor Adapter Gear
ID of splines over two .0900 dia. pins. .3290 to .3310 .3320
Backlash between mating gear
(Fig. 9-17 item 3). .002 to .004 .006
OD of gearshaft. .9844 to .9846 .9842
Fit of bearings (item 19) on gearshaft. .0007T to .0001T .0000
18 Upper Housing End Cover
Matched set with upper housing (Fig. 9-17
item 21)
ID of bore for clutch shaft bearing
(item 8). 1.3779 to 1.3785 1.3785
ID of bore for idler spur gear bearing
(item 14). 1.2597 to 1.2603 1.12604
ID of bore for adapter gear bearing
(item 19). 1.8509 to 1.8506 **
Fit of bearing (item 19) in bore. .0002T to. 001L .0015L
Note: Fit of bearing in bores are same
as fit in upper housing (Fig. 9-17 item 21).
9-25
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
9-26
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
DISASSEMBLY
1. Spacer 8. Setscrew (4) 16. Slip Clutch and Shaft Group
2. Idler Gear and Adapter 9. Magnetic Clutch 17. Spanner Nut
Plate Group 10. Armature Plate 18. Clutch Spring Assembly
3. Screw (4) 11. Shim, Laminated 19. Half Washer
4. Adapter Plate 12. Clutch Spacer 20. Clutch Disk Retainer
5. Shim, Laminated 13. Spring (3) 21. Clutch Inner Disk
6. Idler Gear Bearing 14. Magnet Body 22. Clutch Outer Disk
7. Idler Gear 15. Key 23. Clutch Shaft
ASSEMBLY
CLUTCH SHIM ADJUSTMENT
Refer to figure 9-5.1 for adapter plate and idler gear alignment and shimming procedure.
Table 9-25. Turret Traverse Mechanism--Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9-16)
4 Adapter Plate
Replace if teeth are worn
6 Idler Gear Bearing
OD 1.5743 to 1.5748 **
ID .6690 to .6693 **
7 Idler Gear
OD of gear over two .1440 dia. pins. .1289 to .1299 .128
Backlash with idler gear (Fig. 9-15,
item 15). .002 to .004 .006
10 Armature Plate
Replace if teeth are worn. Backlash
between plate (Item 10) and
magnet body (item 14) with complete
reversal and 2 lbs-ft of torque. 0°12' 0°14'
21 Clutch Inner Disk
ID of spline between two. 1080 dia. pins. .6505 to .6531 .654
Thickness .0568 to .0528 .0525
Flatness Within .001 Within .003
22 Clutch Outer Disk
OD of spline over two. 1920dia. pins. 2.6902 to 2.6923 2.6892
Thickness of core and lining. .120 to .130 .115
Flatness Within .001 Within .003
23 Clutch Shaft
OD of journal forbearing (item 6). .6688 to .6691 .6685
OD of journal for bearing (Fig. 9-15,
item 8). .5905 to .5908 .5903
Fit of bearing (Fig. 9-15,item 8) on
journal .0005T to .0001L .0002L
OD of journal for housing(Fig. 9-14, item8). .700 to .702 .699
Fit in housing (Fig. 9-14, item 8) .001L to .004L .005L
OD of splines over .1200 dia. pins. .9857 to .9875 .9847
9-27
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
9-28
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Table 9-26. Disassembly/Assembly- Turret Traverse Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 9-17)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Lock Nut 8. Gearshaft and Bearings 15. Key
2. Lock Washer 9. Gearshaft Bearing Retainer 16. Bearing
3. Gearshaft Gear 10. Shim 17. Gearshaft
4. Gearshaft Seal 11. Packing 18. Filter
5. Screw (4) 12. Lock Nut 19. Upper Housing and Dowel
6. Gearshaft Bearing Cap 13. Lock Washer Pins
7. Gasket 14. Bearing 20. Dowel Pin (2)
21. Upper Housing
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY NOTES
1. Tighten lock nut (1) to 20 pound-feet and lock nut (12) 27 to 30 pound-feet. If lock washer tang is not aligned
with slot in lock nut, tighten nut to next slot.
2. Apply sealing compound (Grade CV, MIL-S-22473) to screw threads.
3. Tighten screws (item 5) 34 to 38 pound-feet.
4. Refer to Figure 9-21 for shimming procedures.
Table 9.27. Turret Traverse Mechanism--Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 9.17)
3 Gearshaft Gear
OD of gear over two .1440 dia. pins. 5. 0316 to 5.0336 5. 0296
Gear backlash with gear (Fig. 9-15,
item 15). .002 to .004 .006
9 Gearshaft Bearing Retainer
OD 3.123 to 3. 125 3.120
ID of bore for bearing (item 14). 2. 8345 to 2. 8351 2. 8355
14 Bearing
OD 2. 8341 to 2.8346 2. 8338
ID 1. 1807 to 1. 1811 1. 1814
Fit of bearing in retainer (item 9). .0001T to . 001L .002L
16 Bearing
OD 2. 4404 to 2.4409 2. 4400
ID 1.1807 to 1.1811 1.814
17 Gearshaft (part of matched set with
bevel gear (Fig. 9-11, item 18).
If teeth are badly worn or chipped,
replace both gears. Backlash with
mating gear. .001 to .007 .010
OD journal for bearing (item 14). 1.1810 to 1.1814 1. 1805
Fit of bearing (item 14) on gearshaft. .0007T to . 001T .0000
OD journal for bearing (item 16). 1. 1814 to 1.1819 **
Fit of bearing (item 16) on gearshaft. . 0012T to . 0003T .0001T
OD journal for seal (item 4). 1.623 to 1.625 1. 620
19 Upper Housing
ID of bore for retainer (item 9). 3.126 to 3.127 3.1275
Fit of retainer (item 9) in housing. . 001L to . 004L .006L
ID of bore for bearing (item 16). 2. 4409 to 2. 4419 **
Fit of bearing (item 16) in housing. .000 to . 0015L . 002L
NOTE. Housing matched set with end
cover (Fig. 9-15,item 18).
9-29
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Fig. 9-17
Fig. 9-11
Fig. 9-14
Figure 9-18. Turret traverse mechanism upper housing gearshaft and lower housing bevel
gear (matched set) shimming procedure
9-30
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Fig. 9-16
Fig. 9-5.1
Fig. 9-14
Figure 9-19. Turret traverse mechanism magnetic clutch plates shimming procedures
Fig. 9-15
Fig. 9-15
Fig. 9-16
Figure 9-20. Tarret traverse mechanism slip clutch adjustment
9-31
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Fig 9-13
Figure 9-21. Turret traverse mechanism manual drive housing group bevel gears shimming procedure
9-32
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Section 9-3. REPAIR OF SERVOMOTOR
9-2. General 9-4. Brush Neutral Position
a. Refer to figure 9-22 and 9-23 for Align end bell with stator housing by scribe line
disassembly/assembly of servomotor. at assembly. If new brushes are installed, operate
b. Refer to figure 8-1 for schematic of servomotor. motor until the brush face is seated in respect to the
c. Tan sleeved lead marked "T1" from stator must commutator for at least 75 percent of the brush face
be connected to brush holder having the "green” area.
interconnecting lead.
d. Tan sleeved lead marked "T2" from stator must Operate motor at a fixed input voltage,
be connected to brush holder having the "red” suggested 115 volts DC, for both input polarities to
interconnecting lead. obtain speeds in both directions of rotation.
9-3. Brush Setting Procedure Speed in each direction should not differ more
than 5 percent. If adjustment is required, loosen end
a. Each time the servomotor is disassembled, the bell attaching screws and shift end bell in respect to
brush neutral position should be reset. stator housing. Tighten screw. Repeat adjustment until
b. Before disassembly, scribe a line on outside of two speeds differ less than 5 percent.
end bell and stator housing to be certain of correct
positioning at assembly.
9-33
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Figure 9-22. Repair of servomotor
9-34
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Table 9-28. Servomotor (Figure 9-22)

Repair - REPLACE UNSERVICEABLE COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED.
(REFER TO TM 9-2350-230-25P/2)
LEGEND
1. Servomotor 19. Bushing (2)
2. Screw (4) 20. Brush (2)
3. Lock Washer (4) 21. Flat Washer (10)
4. Flat Washer (4) 22. Screw (4)
5. Receptacle Connector 23. Cover
6. Flat Washer (2) 24. Ring (2)
7. Lock Washer (14) 25. Bearing
8. Screw (10) 26. Capacitor
9. Screw (4) 27. Screw (4)
10. Lock Washer (12) 28. Lock Washer (4)
11. Flat Washer (12) 29. Flat Washer (4)
12. Screw (4) 30. Screw (2)
13. Cover 31. Impeller
14. Axial Fan 32. Clamp (2)
15. Brush (2) 33. Armature
16. Screw (4) 34. Stator
17. Screw (4) 35. Access Cover
18. Spring (2)
9-35
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Figure 9-23. Repair of servomotor tachometer generator
9-36
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
CHAPTER 10
REPAIR OF 152MM GUN-LAUNCHER

M81E1 AND MOUNT
10-1. General (3) Breech electrical drive motor and drive

a Refer to Chapter 4 for maintenance, inspection solenoid.
and repair data prior to repair of the following (4)
Gas (obturator) seal.
components. (5)
Firing mechanism
b. Deleted. (6)
Ammunition detent assembly, Type III.
c. M81E1 has no evacuator chamber and a (7)
Loading tray and ejector group.
different thrust collar (refer to fig. 5-11). (8)
Breech carrier cover vent plug.
NOTE.
10-2. Removal/Installation Gun tube and breech condemnation
a. Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 for removal and criteria will be based on information
installation of the following gun-launcher components: available in TM 9-1000-202-35.
(1) Gun tube evacuator cylinder b. Refer to Chapter 5 for removal/installation of
(2) Electrical harness and limit switches. gun-launcher from/in mount.
Table 10-1. 152MM Gun-Launcher M81E1 and Mount-Repair

Adjust Replace
Breech Mechanism 10-1 Table 10-2 Fig. 10-3 thru 10-16
Ammunition Detent Assembly, Type III 10-1 Fig. 10-13 thru Fig. 10-13 thru
10-13.3 10-13.3
Gun Mount Assembly 10-2 Fig. 10-21 Fig. 10-18 thru 10-26
Closed Breech Scavenging System 10-3 Fig. 10-27
Cannon Pressure Vessel (CPV) 10-4 Table 10-13
Section 10-1. REPAIR OF BREECH MECHANISM
10-2.1. General a. Refer to figures 10-3 through 10-12 for

a. Refer to figure 10-1 for cutaway view of gun- disassembly of gun-launcher breech mechanism.
launcher breech mechanism. b. Refer to table 10-2 for assembly of gun-
b. Refer to figure 10-2 for gun-launcher component launcher breech mechanism. Lubricate with Teflon-
locations. Filled Lubricant MIL-L-46150, all machined surfaces
NOTE: (including planetary gear carrier bushings thrust
Prevailine torque should be ;added washers, and rubbing surfaces in loading tray and
to specified requirements. bracket assembly) except that the following should be
"Prevailing Torque" as used in this lubricated with Grease. Aircraft and instrument, (MIL-G-
chapter. is force required to thread 23827): ball screw assembly, cam nut ball grooves,
self locking screw or nut before the planet and gear teeth with their mating internal ring gear
screw head or nut comes in contact and motor pinion teeth, and crank spindle splines. Do
with surface against which it is being not lubricate external ring gear teeth which mate
tightened. solenoid.
c. Refer to figures 10-13 through 10-16 for repair
data for gun-launcher breech mechanism.
10-3. Disassembly/Assembly
Table 10-2. Assembly of Breech Mechanism

1 Assemble Breech Coupling 10-11
Install torque key bracket and tube lock key on breech coupling and install breech
coupling on gun tube.
2 Assemble Ball Screw Assembly
a. Position ball nuts and ball retainer on ball screw. 10-10
b. Pack ball screw and ball nuts with grease - Aircraft and instrument
9150-00-576-4262.
10-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Table 10-2. Assembly of Breech Mechanism - Continued

3 Assemble Actuating Cam Cylinder and Ball Screw Group 10-9

a. Install planet carrier support bushing and retaining ring in ball nut support.
b. Install ball screw group (with retainer) and ball nut coupling ring in
support. Install 6 screws, and tighten screws 6 to 7 pound-feet.
c. Install motor shut-off actuating sleeve in actuating cam cylinder and install 10-9
sleeve retaining ring.
d. Install motor shut-off actuating rod in retainer and support area but do not
install retaining ring.
e. Position ball nuts at center of ball screw (breech closed position). With
motor shut-off actuating rod free, make a preliminary adjustment of
approximately 2-inches between end face of support and drive end face of
the ball screw.
f. Index support so that actuating rod is 240 degrees (clockwise, viewed from
drive end) from actuating cam cylinder index hole.
g. Holding this dimension, install assembled ball nuts, support coupling ring,
retainer and ball screw group in actuating cam cylinder and sleeve and
retain with one of eight screws.
h. Install actuating rod retaining ring on rod.
4 Assemble Spindle Assembly and Breech Coupling 10-8
5 Install Actuating Cam Cylinder and Ball Screw Group in Spindle Assembly 10-8
a. Install pin keeper, segment retaining pins, ball retainer segment, and
6 balls in spindle assembly.
NOTE
Install ball retainer segment with identification mark (Letter "A"
etched on end) located to rear left side of spindle assembly.
b. Install actuating cam cylinder keeping index hole "H" in alignment with
spindle slide surface until engagement with segment balls is obtained.
c. Adjustment. With ball nuts at center of ball screw (breech closed position),
measure from rear face of ball screw to rear face of spindle, using breech
mechanism switch measuring gage 11665289. To adjust this dimension,
remove 1 of 8 screws which was installed in step 3g. and rotate rear
(left-hand) ball nut inside actuating cam cylinder using WRENCH-11576794.
NOTE
There are 8 tapped holes in rear ball nut and 16 drilled holes in
rear of actuating cam cylinder. Movement of ball nut distance of 1 of 16
holes will result in 0. 020-inch linear movement of ballscrew in relation to
spindle.
d. Reinstall one screw and recheck dimensions. Repeat as necessary to

meet required dimension, install remaining 7 screws, and tighten all
8 screws to 6 to 7 pound-feet.
6 Assemble Planetary Gear Group 10-7
7 Install Planetary Gear Group in Spindle Assembly 10-6
Install planetary gear group in spindle assembly and install thrust washer
(coated side towards ring gear), ring gear spacer, and pin.
10-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 10-2. Assembly of Breech Mechanism - Continued

8 Assemble and Install Breech Chamber, Gear Segment, and Breech Carrier Groups 10-5
and
a. Install breech chamber in breech coupling in closed but not locked position. 10-4
b. Lubricate outside diameter of spindle assembly and inside diameter
of breech carrier with lubricant MIL-L-46150 and slide breech
carrier only on spindle assembly. Do not install seal, retainer,
or shim at this time.
c. Install carrier guide key in breech carrier.
d. Assemble gear segment and lubricate surfaces with lubricant
MIL-46150.
e. Align index mark "O" on tooth of gear segment with index mark "O"
on gear tooth of actuating cam cylinder and carefully mesh actuating
cam cylinder and gear segment teeth. Insert hand crank in actuating
cam cylinder ball screw and turn ball screw to move gear segment
forward until locating pin in gear segment seats dowel hole in breech
chamber and segment is in full contact with breech chamber.
CAUTION
Use care during installation of gear segment. Segment
is a snug fit and spindle assembly may become damaged
if segment is misaligned.
f. Install 6 (of 12 required) screws to attach gear segment to breech
chamber. Using hand crank, lock breech chamber in fully closed
position and measure gap between forward face of breech carrier
and mating face of spindle assembly. Measure to nearest 0. 001
inch and peel laminations from shim to meet this dimensions. (Shim
laminations are 0. 002 inch thick. )
NOTE
After assembling breech mechanism, actuate to fully open
position. Fully open position is 60 degrees ± 30'. If fully
open position is less than indicated tolerance, disassemble
breech mechanism and reverse ball retainer segment
(fig. 10-8) so that identification mark "A" etched on end is
located to front or right side of spindle assembly.
g. Unlock chamber, remove screws, gear segment, carrier guide key,
and remove breech carrier front spindle assembly.
h. Install shim, spindle assembly seal retainer, and seal (with lip
portion forward on spindle) on spindle assembly.
i. Install breech carrier-to-breech chamber seal in breech carrier.
i. Reinstall carrier on spindle assembly moving carrier forward
until bottomed and install seal-retaining lock wire through hole in
carrier.
k. Reinstall carrier guide key, gear segment, and install 12 screws
attaching gear segment to breech chamber. Tighten screws to 10
to 13 pounds-feet.
9 Assemble and Install Hand Crank and Carrier Cover 10-12
and
10-4
10 Install Switch Actuating Plunger Group Brackets 10-3
11 Install Ammunition Detent Assembly - Type III 10-13
10-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 10-1. Gun-launcher breech mechanism - cutaway view
10-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Figure 10-2. Gun-launcher component location
10-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Figure 10-3. Disassembly/assembly - gun-launcher breech mechanism (1 of 9)
10-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
10-7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
10-8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
10-9
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
10-10
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
10-11
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
10-12
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
10-13
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
10-14
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-12. Disassembly/assembly - breech mechanism hand crank and handle assembly
10-15
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 10-13. Installation, adjustments, removal, and servicing - type III

ammunition detent assembly (1 of 3).
Table 10-3 - deleted.
10-16
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C8
Figure 10-13.1. Installation, adjustments, removal, and servicing - type III

10-16.1/(10-16.2 blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
WE 70995
Figure 10-13.2. Installation, adjustments, removal, and servicing - type III

10-17
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-14. Gun-launcher breech mechanism - inspection and repair data (2 of 4)
10-18
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-4. Gun-Launcher Beech Mechanism - Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 10-14)

1 Ejector
Shaft dia. .3725 to .3715 *
Replace if teeth show visible signs of
wear.
Sleeve dia. .3745 to .3735 *
Fit into sleeve. .0010 to .0030 *
2 Hinge Pin
Shaft dia. .373 to .372 *
3 Loading Tray
Hinge pin holes dia. (holes to be in .3745 to .3755 .3765
line within . 001)
Fit - hinge pin in loading tray .0015 to .0035 .0045
Guide slot width. .365 to .385 .365 Min.
4 Mounting Bracket Cover
Dia. hole for ejector trigger. .4995 to .5005 *
5 Ejector Trigger
Shaft dia. (into cover). .4975 to .4970 *
Fit - trigger in cover. .002 to .0035 *
6 Actuating Lever Shaft
Shaft dia. .3127 to .3122 *
7 Actuating Lever
Hole dia. .3132 to .3142 *
Fit of lever shaft in lever. .002 to .0005 *
Contact face wear.
8 Detent Release Plunger
Shaft dia. .3735 to .3725 *
Bracket assy. dia. .3745 to .3755 *
Fit into bracket assy. .0010 to .0030 *
9 Detent Release Handle
OD .517 to .516 *
Bracket assy. ID .518 to .519 *
Fit into bracket assy. .001 to .003 .001 to .005
10 Spring
Load required to compress to .917 4.75 to 5.25 lbs. *
11 Latch
Shaft OD. .3740 to .3731 *
Fit in bushing. .0002 to .003 *
12 Latch Bushing
ID (installed). .3742 to .3761 *
13 Spring Retainer
OD .812 to .870 .869
Sleeve dia. .878 to .874 .877
Fit into sleeve. .002 to .006 .002 to .008
14 Spring
Load required to compress to 2.590. 19.62 to 21.68 Ib *
15 Ejector Actuating Shaft
Shaft OD. .3725 to .3715 .3710
Bracket assy ID. .3745 to .3755 .3760
Fit into bracket assy. .0020 to .0040 .0050
10-19
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-15. Gun-Launcher breech mechanism - inspection and repair data (3 of 4)
10-20
C1, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-5. Gun-Launcher Breech Mechanism-Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 10-15)
1 Thrust Washer - thickness. .124 to .126 .123 to .126
2 Hand Crank Support Button
Length. .330 to .340 .325 to .340
3,4 Hand Crank Drive Spindle Thrust
Washer - thickness. .0585 to .0605 .0580 to .0605
5 Hand Crank Drive Spindle Bushing
ID (installed). .9992 to 1.0017 1.004
6 Hand Crank Drive Spindle
OD of journal for bushing (5). .9946 to .9958 *
Fit of bushing on journal. .0034 to .0071 .0094 to .0034
7 Hand Crank
OD of journal for bushing (9). 1.6204 to 1.6220 *
Fit of bushing (9) on journal. .002 to .0061 .002 to .0081
Snap ring groove ID sharp corner. *
Snap ring groove OD sharp corner. no break *
8 Thrust Washer
Thickness. .0595 to .0605 .0585
9 Hand Crank Bushing
ID 1.6240 to 1.6265 1.6285
Fit of bushing in cover (15). interference *
10 Gear Segment Assembly
Dist. over one .1920 dia. ball to
center. 6.9705 to 6.9725 6.9685
Inside dim. square lock pin hole. .500 to .501 *
Location and finish on 2°38'31" sur-
face. 2.2560, 16 and
2°38'31" within .001 *
11 Lock Pin - Gear Segment
Dim. of square. .4985 to .4995 *
Fit of lock pin in gear segment (10). .0005L to .0025L *
12 Actuating Cam Cylinder Detent
OD of shaft. .3735 to .3740 .3725
Fit of shaft in housing (14). .0005L to .0020L .004L
Location of detent face. .363 to .361 *
Radius of detent corner. .040 to .060 .070
13 Detent Actuating Cam Cylinder Spring
Length under load 42.8 to 47.2 lbs. 1.1325 *
14 Detent Actuating Cylinder Housing
ID bore for detent (12). .3745 to .3755 .3760
15 Cover Assy.
ID bore for bushing (9). 1.7808 to 1.7818 *
Clamp surface for guide key. flush .001 embossed
16 Key Carrier Guide
ID of bore for dowel pin. .3165 to .3175 *
Thickness, at carrier contact surface. .3185 to .3195 *
Width of spindle follower. .820 to .824 .818
Location of spindle follower. .8148 to .8158 .8163
Radius on inner edge spindle follower. .090 to .110 *
Radius on inner aft edge spindle
follower. .020 to .040 *
Surface finish on slide surfaces. 32 Micro-inches *
17 Carrier
Guide slot. .3130 to .3135 *
Centerline of dowel position. .3205 to .3195 *
Slot depth. 1.9695 to 1.9705 *
ID spindle bore. 5.7525 to 5.7535 + .001
Segment gear slot location. .2500 to .2505 + .001
10-21
C6, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-16. Gun-launcher breech mechanism - inspection and repair data (4 of 4)
10-22
C1, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-6. Gun-Launcher Breech Mechanism- Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 10-16)

1 Plunger Support Bushing
Rectangular Bore 1st side .373 to .375 *
2nd side .347 to .349 *
2 Solenoid Spring
Load required to compress to .291. 22.1 to 24.4 lbs. *
3 Ring Gear (7) Locking Plunger

Rectangular shaft 1st side .369 to .371 *
2nd side .3460 to .3465 *
Fit of plunger in bushing (1)
1st side .002L to .006L *
2nd side .0005L to .003L *
Tooth tip break. .010 Max. .015 Max.
4 Electric Drive Motor

OD drive shaft spline over two .06171
dia. pins. .48124 to .48466 .479 Min.
Brush length. .375 Min.
5 Thrust Washer-Planet Carrier .0605 to .0585 .0575 Min.
6 Thrust Washer-Planet Gear Thickness .061 to .063 .060 Min.
7 Ring Gear
ID of internal spur gear between two
.0540 dia. pins. 4.2145 to 4.2204 *
External spur gear tip break. Break tip .005 Max .008 Max.
8 Planet Gear Bolt
OD of journal for bushing (10). .3731 to .3740 *
9 Planet Gear Assy.
OD over two .0540 dia. pins. 2.0148 to 2.0204 *
Bushing ID. .3742 to .3761 .3771
10 Planet Gear Bushing
ID .3742 to .3761 .3771
11 Planet Carrier
OD of journal for bushing (15). 1.7471 to 1.7487 *
Spline slot width. .2505 to .2510 *
12 Actuating Cam Cylinder (cam nut)

Helical Gear
Dim. from OD of a .1728 dia. pin to
opposite OD of gear (for gear
tooth wear). 4.9423 to 4.9397 *
Dim. from OD of a .3750 dia. ball to
opposite OD of cam nut (to deter-
mine cam track wear). 5.063 to 5.0615 *
OD of actuating cam cylinder. 4.8740 to 4.8750 *
10-23
C1, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-6. Gun-Launcher Breech Mechanism-Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 10-16)
- Continued
13 Ball
OD .3748 to .3752 *
14 Ball Retainer Segment

OD of a .3341 dia. ball in retainer
to far side of retainer (for retainer
wear). .465 to .466 *
15 Planet Carrier Support Bushing (in

assembly).
ID 1.7489 to 1.7519 1.7529
16 Spindle Assembly
ID for cylinder (12). 4.8785 to 4.8770 *
Fit of cylinder (12) in spindle. .002L to .0045L *
OD of spindle. 5.7505 to 5.7490 *
Segment keyhole size. .250 to .251R *
R H. slide surface. .5750 and 12°21' *
29" L wi. .001 TP
L. H. slide surface. 40°basic wi. .001 *
TP
R. H. slide surface corner radius .080 to .100 rad. *
L. H. slide surface corner radius .080 to .120 rad. *
17 Seal Retainer Sleeve

ID of bore for plunger (19) .192 to .194 .196 Max.
18 Switch Plunger Spring

Load required to compress to .597 3.8 to 4.2 lbs. *
19 Plunger
Shaft OD to fit retainer (17). .183 to .187 *
Fit of shaft in retainer (17). .005L to . 011L .013L
OD of shaft that contacts rod, motor
shut off (51). .185 to .186
Radius to round end of shaft. .93 *
20 Actuating Rod Motor Shutoff

Switch plunger contact surface
Inner angle 24°14' to 26°14’ *'
Outer angle 39°to 41° *
Horizontal surface from OD of shaft
to surface. .092 to .102
21 Ball Screw Assembly

Axil backlash of each ball nut to .001 to .005 .001 to .005
ball screw. axial backlash axial backlash
10-24
C 5, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Section 10-2. REPAIR OF GUN MOUNT ASSEMBLY
a. Refer to figures 10-18 and 10-19 for

10-4. General disassembly/assembly of the gun mount assembly.
a. Refer to figure 10-17 for a reference view of b. Refer to figure 10-20 for disassembly/
the gun mount assembly. assembly of safe-to-fire and pressure indicator.
b. The M119 telescope mounting bracket must be c. Refer to figure 10-21 for calibration of safe-to-
removed prior to removal of the shield. Refer to figure fire and pressure indicator.
12-5 for removal/installation of Ml19 telescope mounting d. Refer to figure 10-22 for disassembly/
bracket. assembly of mount buffer assembly.
c. Refer to figure 10-17.1 for adjustment of relief e. Refer to table 10-6.1 for disassembly of gun
valve assembly detent plunger. mount recoil mechanism assembly and table 10-7 for
assembly of recoil mechanism assembly.
10-5. Disassembly/Assembly
Figure 10-17. Gun mount assembly reference view
10-25
C 5, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-6.1. Disassembly of Recoil Mechanism Assembly

1 Assembly recoil sleeve holding tool to recoil sleeve 10-23
A. Place muzzle end support plate in the front of the recoil sleeve and the
breech end support plate in the rear of the recoil sleeve.
B. Insert rod into holes in plates, keeping eye of rod next to muzzle end
support plate.
C. Install nut into breech end of rod.
2 Cut lockwire and remove screw and retainer locking keys. 10-24
3 Loosen front follower retainer, using torque wrench adapter 5120-472-1987. 10-24
4 Place sling or hook on eye of rod.
5 Use lifting device to place recoil cylinder in vertical position with front of 10-24
cylinder facing upward and rear of cylinder on improvised cribbing.
6 Remove front follower retainer. 10-24
7 Remove recoil sleeve with front follower, piston and spring washer set, 10-23
using lifting device.
8 Place recoil sleeve on improvised cribbing. Inspect recoil sleeve, Forward

or gun muzzle end OD of 10.441 - .002 inches is acceptable if an average
of two 90°readings does not exceed 10.4385 inches. If sleeve is scored,
burred or gouged, careful stoning etc. may remove same but measurement
must be kept within above restrictions.
9 Remove rear locking key and rear follower retainer, using torque wrench 10-25
adapter 5120-472-1987.
10 Remove rear follower and shock plate. Inspect recoil follower.

A. Rear follower will have an ID of 10.323 + .002 inches diameter.
Follower ID will not exceed .002 inches, determined by an average of
two 90°readings.
B. Polish or stone worn areas on the ID to remove burrs and rough areas.
C. Clean chips and burrs from all grooves.
D. Rotate follower on assembly so that worn portion of ID is at top in 12 o'clock.
10-26
C10, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-7. Assembly of Recoil Mechanism Assembly

NOTE
Assure that all components are thoroughly cleaned and free from foreign
matter, corrosion, and abrasions.
The polyamide back up rings in the seal repair kit are highly susceptible to
water absorption which causes a growth in ring size. After opening repair
kit immediately immerse front and rear follower seal assemblies and
piston seal assemblies in hydraulic oil MIL-H-6083C to preclude
atmospheric moisture absorption prior to assembly into gun mount.
1 Assemble recoil sleeve holding tool to recoil sleeve (Refer to table 10-6.1).
2 Install front follower seal assembly on front follower with 2 bronze 10-24
backup rings on outside and split lines staggered 1800 +900 apart.
Fill seal groove with grease MIL-G-81322.
3 Apply grease MIL-G-81322 on outside of recoil sleeve where 10-24,

front and rear follower seals contact recoil sleeve. 10-25,
Surfaces "Y"& "Z"
4. Install piston seals on piston and assemble piston on front follower. 10-24
5 Assemble front follower and piston with seals on recoil sleeve. 10-24
6 Using lifting device, position recoil sleeve over outer cylinder 10-23
assembly and lower into outer cylinder assembly.
7 Install rear follower seal assembly and wiper on rear follower with 10-25
2 bronze back up rings on outside and split lines staggered 180°± 90°apart.
Coat wiper and fill seal groove with grease MIL-G-81322.
8 Assemble rear follower preformed packing, cylinder ring and shock 10-25
plate with 6 screws using sealing compound Grade C, MIL-S-22473
on screw threads.
9 Install rear follower group on recoil sleeve and slide sleeve with key 10-25,
slot at top into outer cylinder assembly. 10-23
10 Install rear follower retainer.
11 Using torque wrench adapter 5120-472-1987, tighten rear follower 10-23,

retainer 450 to 550 pound-feet. Install locking key with 2 screws, 4 10-25
washers and lock wire.
12 Install spacer ring and front follower retainer only in front of 10-24
cylinder.
NOTE.
Be sure spacer ring is installed properly.
13 Using torque wrench adapter tighten front follower retainer 350 to 10-23,
450 pound-feet. 10-24
10-26.1
C10, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-7. Assembly of Recoil Mechanism Assembly - Continued

14 Mark a lug adjacent to mark on outer cylinder assembly.
15 Remove front follower retainer and spacer ring. 10-24
16 Coat wear ring with molybdenum disulfide grease MIL-G-21164 and 10-24
install on piston.
17 Coat inside surface of outer cylinder assembly with molybdenum

disulfide grease MIL-G-21164.
18 Observe position of and install spring washer set and indicator ring. 10-24
NOTE
Spring washers are supplied as a matched set of 12 washers. Six washers
have a flat face adjacent to the outside diameter and six washers have a
flat face adjacent to the inside diameter. The washer set is assembled as a
combination of 6 pairs of washers (one of each type per pair) with Outside
Diameters of each pair facing in same direction. In illustration, arrows
indicate direction in which outside diameters must face. Shaded washers
are those with flat face on their Outside Diameter. Non-shaded washers
are those with flat face on their Inside Diameter.
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease MIL-G-21164 to contacting 10-24,

surfaces of spring washer set and indicator ring. Surface "X"
When installing indicator ring, line up tapped hole in indicator ring 10-24
with slot in outer cylinder assembly.
19 Install wear ring, spacer ring and wiper ring. 10-24
NOTE
Be sure spacer ring and wiper ring are installed properly.
20 Install front follower retainer and righten to within 2 lugs of mark 10-24
on outer cylinder assembly and lug mark.
21 Install locking key and secure with lockwire. 10-24
22 If rupture disc plug is being installed, wrap threads of plug with TFE
pipe sealant tape MIL-T-27730 and tighten plug 40 to 50 pound-feet.
23 If outer cylinder assembly is being replaced, holes for the three 10-18, 10-19
expandable alinement pin assemblies (8, fig. 10-18) for the recoil 10-25
guard must be drilled at assembly, as follows:
a. Assemble recoil mechanism assembly and install recoil

guard and gun-launcher.
b. Move gun - launcher out-of-battery (14 to 14-1/2 inches).
c. Using a feeler gage, determine amount of space between
torque key and torque key bracket.
d. Rotate gun-launcher so that half of the space is at each side
of the torque key.
10-26.2
C10, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-7. Assembly of Recoil Mechanism Assembly-continued

e. Torque the six top mounting bolts of recoil guard 100 ± 10 ft lb.
f. Move gun-launcher forward and rearward several times,

observing the space at each side of torque key. If further adjust-
ment is necessary, loosen mounting bolts and repeat steps d. and e.
g. Drill three 0.4375 - inch holes 9/16 ± 1/32 - inch deep, using
holes in recoil guard as a template.
h. Install three expanding pin assemblies.
10-26.3/(10-26.4 blank)
C10, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
10-6. Establishing Gun Mount Precharged Pressure
Establish gun mount precharged pressure in Table 10-8.
Table 10-8. Establishing Gun Mount Precharged Pressure

1 Install gun-launcher in mount, table 5-2.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to pressurize recoil mechanism without a gun-launcher or
simulating fixture installed. Pressure against the differential area recoil
sleeve will drive the sleeve against the front follower and possibly damage
internal components.
2 Position gun-launcher and gun mount assembly at zero degrees.
3 On vehicle gun mounts with automatic relief and bypass valve, close manual
pressure bleed valve. Do not install relief valve operating cam on tube lock key.
4 Remove filler plug from replenisher reservoir and add fluid as required to fill to
bottom of plug opening Reinstall plug.
5 Fill and bleed hydraulic system (TM 9-2350-230-12).
6 Remove plug from Lop rear port in recoil cylinder. Install adapter and surge-
protected pressure, gage.
7 Pressurize recoil mechanism to gage reading of 1250-1300 psi and bleed back to
840-860 psi.
8 a. Proof fire to fully stabilize if conditions are favorable. Monitor precharge

gage pressure before and after each round and maintain 840-860 psi by
pumping to 1250-1300 psi after each round then bleed back to 840-860 psi.
Do not bleed pressure below 840 psi during or after proof firing. If
pressure should drop below 840 psi (cooling of fluid will allow pressure to
drop approximately 10% psi per °F), pump to 1250-1300 psi and bleed back
to 840-860 psi. Reproofing will not be required.
NOTE
Proof firing a minimum of 3 rounds following extensive repair to recoil
mechanism is preferred. If capability is not present, the procedure in b.
below will be followed:
b. Exercise recoil mechanism 12 cycles to 14-1/2 - 15 inches (TB 9-1000-234-

35). Monitor and adjust to 850 psi as necessary between cycles.
10-7. Calibrating Safe-to-Fire and Pressure Indicator

Immediately after proof firing and prior to any reduction of the 840-860 precharge pressure, remove cover from
safe-to-fire indicator housing and position safe-to-fire indicator and limit switch sleeve (Fig. 10-21) and refer to Table 10-
9.
10-27/(10-28 blank)
C10, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-9. Calibrating Safe-to-Fire and Pressure Indicator (Refer to Fig. 10-21)
1 After positioning safe-to-fire indicator and sleeve, elevate recoil mechanism to 15
degrees (265 mils) and observe fluid level in replenisher reservoir sight glass.
Fluid level should be at or slightly above the ONE QUART mark when rod is approxi-
mately centered on indicator.
2 On vehicle gun mounts equipped with automatic relief and bypass valve, install relief
valve operating cam on gun-launcher tube lock key and shim so that plunger travel of
valve is 1/8 inch (+1/32) with gun in battery position,
3 Depress recoil mechanism -3 to -5 degrees and open manual bleed valve to reservoir.
Reduce precharge pressure to zero psi.
4 Remove adapter and pressure gage then reinstall plug in top rear port of recoil cylinder.
5 Reinstate precharge pressure by operating hand pump until relief valve opens. The
positions of stepped indicator and sleeve shall not be changed during life of mount unless
spring washer set is replaced. Each spring set will have a slightly different character-
istic and will require recalibration of the safe-to-fire indicator.
6 If spring washer set is replaced, filling, bleeding, proof fire/exercise and indicator
calibration must be performed. It is not necessary to install a new indicator and
sleeve when recalibrating. The previous parts can be rotated 90 degrees to provide
material for pinning. If more than one repinning is required, a new rod, indicator,
and sleeve should be installed.
NOTE
Normally, recalibration is required only when the recoil spring washer
set is replaced.
7 If automatic relief and bypass valve and/or gun-launcher is removed from mount, or
a different gun-launcher is to be installed, cam on tube lock key must be checked and
repositioned (reshimmed) if required, so that valve plunger travel is 1/8 inch (+1/32)
with gun in battery position (see Table 10-8, step 4) when valve and/or gun-launcher
is reinstalled.
Figure 10-17.1. Adjustment of relief valve assembly detent plunger
10-28.1
C10, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-18. Disassembly/assembly - gun mount assembly (1 of 2)
10-28.2
C10, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-19. Disassembly/assembly - gun mount assembly (2 of 2)
10-29
C7, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-20. Disassembly/assembly - safe-to-fire indicator group.
10-30
C10, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-21. Positioning of safe-to-fire indicator and limit switch sleeve
10-31
C6, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-22. Disassembly/assembly - gun mount buffer assembly
10-32
C5, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-23. Disassembly/assembly gun mount recoil mechanism assembly (1 of 3)
10-33
C5, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
10-34
C5, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
10-35
C5, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-26. Disassembly/assembly - automatic relief and bypass valve
10-36
C5, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-26.1. Performance and calibration - automatic relief and bypass valve
10-36.1/(10-36.2 blank)
C13, TM 9-2350-230-35,2
Section 10-3. REPAIR OF CLOSED BREECH SCAVENGING SYSTEM - WEAPON MOUNTED
10-7.1 General b. The closed-breech compressed air scavenging

system purges the gun of noxious flammable gases and
a. This portion of the system maintains the check of burning residue left by the combustible-case ammo.
valve, telescope tubes, and striker. Refer to Section 12- This is accomplished by directing a short blast of
8 for maintenance of compressor, lines and fittings. compressed air into the closed breech chamber
immediately after the gun has fired and returned to
battery.
b. Remove check valve, telescope tubes, and
striker prior to removal of gun-launcher and mount in
Section 5-3. c. High-pressure air from a system incorporating
two bottles with shut-off and regulating valves is
directed through a telescoping tube (which
c. Prior to disconnecting any section of system, accommodates gun recoil). It then flows through the
turn vehicle master and compressor switch "OFF". hollow counterrecoil buffer striker to a poppet-type
Bleed off system air by actuating lever on solenoid check valve mounted in the side of the breech coupling.
valve. This valve opens under air pressure, allowing air to pass
through orifices into a single hole in the gun tube. This
d. If a gun tube or breech mechanism is to be hole is directed rearward and at an angle so that the air
removed, remove check valve in striker housing to jet impinges on the forcing cone of the tube and divides
prevent damage to seal surfaces on gun tube and check into two streams, one flowing toward the muzzle and the
valve. other into the breech chamber. The latter cleans the
chamber and face of the breech block of burned residue
e. Replace unserviceable parts of system as and fumes. The former causes a vacuum to suck out
required. the residue and fumes.
f. Refer to table 10-10 for maintenance of check d. A solenoid valve, actuated by an in-battery
valve. switch, controls the release of the air from the storage
cylinders. When the air compressor aboard the vehicle
is running, one storage cylinder holds sufficient air for
g. Refer to table 10-11 for maintenance of scavenging 60 rounds fired at a rate of 3 rounds per
telescoping tubes and striker. minute. The compressor replenishes the air at the rate
of approximately 1 scavenge pulse every 2 minutes.
h. Refer to figure 10-27 for disassembly and Therefore a slower rate of fire increases the number of
assembly of closed breech scavenge system weapon rounds that can be fired in a sustained sequence.
mounted.
In the event of electrical power loss at the solenoid, this
10-8. Description valve can be opened manually. The operator can then
open it for the standard 1.7 seconds on the M551 (0.8
a. The closed-breech compressed air scavenging seconds on the M551A1), or for a shorter period if he
system replaces the C02 type scavenging system. Gun wants to conserve air if the air compressor is
tubes having a 200 EFC and originally having the inoperative.
evacuator have had the evacuator valves removed, but
the evacuator sleeves are kept in order to contain the e. The buffer striker housing incorporates a check
gases which flow through the six holes in the gun tube. valve, supports the rear of the telescoping air tube, to
Newer tubes do not have the holes and sleeves. transfer the air from the tube to the check valve, and
gun's buffer piston upon counterrecoil.
10-37
C13, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-10. Maintenance of Check Valve (Refer to Figure 10-27)

If check valve is malfunctioning, remove valve for cleaning and inspection.
1 Remove 2 screws and remove lock (item 2).
2 Using check valve retaining plug wrench 11578063, remove nut (item 3) with
packing.
3 Insert check valve pulling tool 11578594 into poppet and remove valve (item 5),
preformed packing, and 2 seals. (Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.)
NOTE
When installing seals, place in same position as removed.
4 Observe position and remove seals. Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 if removal

is difficult.
5 Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 for cleaning and inspection of valve and seals.
Replace valve and/or seals if damaged,
6 The circular seal seat on the gun tube must be smooth and shiny and free from
surface defects such as gas wash and erosion. Remove contamination with rifle
bore cleaner (RBC). Condemn tube if there is any sign of these defects.
7 With seal held in position with small amount of grease (GL) and new packing on valve
body groove, install check valve in striker housing with shoulder of valve toward out-
side.
8 With small amount of grease (GL) on new plug packing, install plug and
new packing using check valve retaining plug wrench. Tighten plug 70 to
100 pound-feet.
9 Observe position of plug tangs and back-off plug one tang (45 degrees).
NOTE
It is necessary to maintain this looseness (approximately 45 degrees) of
valve to accommodate the differential growth of gun tube and coupling
during firing.
10 Install lock, inverting if required, to align lock screw holes.

NOTE
It may be necessary to turn plug 1/4 inch (11°15') in either direction
to align lock screw. holes.
11 Install lock screws and tighten 70 to 85 pound-inches.
10-38
C11, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-10. Maintenance of Check Valve (Refer to Figure 10-27)

1 Removal of telescoping tubes and striker.

a. Secure buffer head to gun mount with lockwire (fig. 5-8).
b. Remove rate sensor (TM 9-2350-230-12).
c. Remove 2 screws (item 11) and remove switch bracket from rate
sensor bracket.
d. Disconnect hose at body.
e. Disconnect inner tube (item 19) at striker.
f. Remove check valve (table 10-10).
g. Remove 4 screws (items 9 and 10) securing striker and remove striker and
locating key.
h. Remove 4 screws from rate sensor bracket and remove bracket and telescoping
tubes.
2 Disassembly of telescoping tubes.

a. Holding thrust washers (items 15 and 16), remove external snap ring (Item 14),
turn body until pin in its side enters slot in thrust washer, and slide body from
rate sensor bracket.
b. Withdraw inner tube (item 19) from body and remove packing.
c. Remove ring (item 21) from body and remove washer, seal (5 part) washer, and
2 wave springs.
3 Cleaning.
a. Check valve assembly.
Using hook of the service tool, carefully scrape carbon from undercuts for seals.
Do not scratch seal surfaces. Complete cleaning of all parts with CR, then oil
with PL.
b. Clean telescoping tube metal parts. Oil with PL and drain.
4 Inspection.
a. Check for free movement of sliding parts. Check for worn, damaged or scored
parts, and replace them.
b. If check valve leaked, replace both the poppet and its mating sleeve. These parts
are not interchangeable.
c. Carefully check metal seals for cracks, scratches, erosion, deformation or other
damage, and replace if any is found.
d. Replace all "0" ring seal s and any bent, cracked or damaged retaining (snap) rings.
e. Check for unobstructed hole in gun tube and for smoothness of metal seal seat on
tube. Seat must be smooth or seal will leak.
f. Check shear key for wear or deformation, and replace if any is found. Same for
dowel in striker housing.
g. Check for unobstructed air passage in telescoping tube parts and in striker housing.
10-39
C5, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Table 10-11. Maintenance of Telescoping Tubes and Striker (Fig. 10-27) - Continued
5 Assembly and installation of telescoping tubes and striker.
NOTE.
To the tightening torques given must be added the prevailing torques.
a. Referring to figure 10-27, install in order -2 wave springs nested, washer,

5 part seal (observe position), washer, and retaining ring into body.
b. With new packing installed on inner tube, slide tube into body.
c. Holding thrust washers with coated side facing rate sensor bracket,
slide body into bracket; engaging anti-rotation dowel in bracket. Install ring
(item 14) with tapered surface away from washer (item 15). Rotate body
approximately a half revolution.
d. With key in gun coupling slot, install striker.
e. Install and alternately tighten striker screws 150 to 175 pound-feet.
f. Install rate sensor bracket and telescoping tubes and tighten rate sensor bracket
screws to 35 pound-feet.
g. Install inner tube on striker tightening tube 200 to 300 pound-inches.
h. Install check valve (refer to table 10-10) and rate sensor.
I. Install switch bracket; tightening screw to 10 pound-feet. Check switch adjustment.
k. Connect hose to body.
m. Cut lockwire from buffer head.
Table 10-12. Closed Breech Scavenge System - Weapon Mounted (Refer to Figure 10-27)
Disassembly/Assembly - Replace Unserviceable Components as Required.
Legend
1. Screw (2) 11. Screw (2) 22. Washer
2. Lock 12. Bracket 23. Seal (5-Part)
3. Plug 13. Switch 24. Washer
4. Seal 14. Snap Ring 25. Spring
5. Check Valve Assembly 15. Washer 26. Body
6. Seal 16. Washer 27. Key
7. Seal 17. Grommet 28. Nut
18. Bracket 29. Screw
8. Seal 19. Tube 30. Striker Housing
9. Screw (2) 20. Seal 31. Pin
10. Screw (2) 21. Ring 32. Plug
NOTE. 1. Refer to Table 10-10 for maintenance of check valve.

2. Refer to Table 10-11 for maintenance of telescoping tubes and striker.
10-40
C5, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-27. Repair of closed breech scavenging system - weapon mounted
10-41
C13, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Section 10-4. RETUBING/RECHAMBERING (ON VEHICLE) AND CANNON

PRESSURE VESSEL (CPV) REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
10-9. General d. CPV replacement requires replacement of CPV,

NSN 1025-00-124-7385, part number 11578300, and
a. Retube and rechamber gun-launcher M81E1 at breech coupling, NSN 1025-00-617-7375, part number
800 rounds. 11578472.
b. Retubing/rechambering requires replacement of
CPV, NSN 1025-00-124-7385, part number 11578300, 10-10. Retubing/Rechambering on Vehicle and CPV
consisting of the following items: Replacement
Chamber Assembly, part number 7986713. a. Refer to table 10-13 for retubing/rechambering
Seal, Obturator, part number 11577964. and CPV replacement procedures.
Tube, Cannon, part number 11578025. b. Refer to chapter 5 in this manual; other sections
in this chapter; and TM 9-2350-230-12 for detailed
Detent Mechanism Assembly, Type III, part number
disassembly/assembly procedures.
11578462.
Check Valve Assembly, part number 11579188.
CAUTION.
c. Replace complete CPV at 1600 rounds on the
Bleed any remaining air in hoses
gun-launcher M81E1.
with manual discharge valve, table 5-
11.
Table 10-13. Retubing/Rechambering and CPV Replacement

1 If replacing CPV, proceed to step 2. If retubing/rechambering on vehicle, follow
steps a. thru e. below:
a. Remove dust shield and ammunition detent. 5-10 and
10-13
b. Remove closed breech scavenging system (CBSS) check valve assembly 10-27
(table 10-10).
c. Level gun-launcher M81E1 using M13A1 elevation quadrant. (Refer to
TM 9-2350-230-12.)
d. Remove loading tray. (Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.)
e. Remove screw and control cam (located directly under automatic relief valve 10-17.1
plunger). Proceed to step 3.
2 If replacing CPV, follow steps a. thru d. below:
a. Remove gun-launcher and mount from turret. (Refer to table 5-1.1.)
b. Replace seal, kit, NSN 1025-00-456-1806, if more than 300 EFC rounds fired since
last seal kit change. If seals leak, refer to table 5-1.1.
NOTE.
Removal of gun shield is not required unless seal kit is replaced .
c. Remove ammunition detent. 10-13
d. Remove loading tray. (Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.)
3 Remove screw from gun tube lock key. 10-11
4 Remove gun tube lock key. 10-11
5 Open breech chamber.
6 Support spindle assembly to prevent sagging. (If retubing/rechambering, 10-28 or
refer to figure 10-28; if replacing CPV, refer to figure 10-31.) 10-31
7 Remove thrust collar. 5-11
8 Position sling on gun tube and hook up to lifting device. Take up slack but do not 10-29 or
lift at this time. 10-32
9 Position strap wrench on gun tube. 10-29 or
10-32
10 Carefully adjust sling, making sure gun tube does not bind in sleeve or breech
coupling.
10-42
C13, TM 92350-230-36/2
Table 10-13. Retubing/Rechambering and CPV Replacement - Continued

11 Unscrew gun tube (clockwise rotation viewed from breech end). When clear of 10-29 or
threads shift sling to gun tube balance point (approximately 61-1/2 inches from 10-32
muzzle); remove gun tube from mount.
12 If replacing CPV. proceed to step 13. If retubing/rechambering on vehicle, follow
steps a. thru m. below:
a. Position sling on new gun tube and hook up to lifting device. Line up inter- 10-29
rupted threads with missile slot at approximately 7 o'clock position as viewed
from breech end.
b. Install gun tube lock key and screw in rearmost position. 10-11
c. Move gun tube firmly to rear until it seats against shoulder. Adjust lifting 10-11
device as necessary. (Align breech coupling as necessary, using elevation
handwheel to make sure threads completely engage.)
d. Position strap wrench on gun tube. 10-29
e. Rotate gun tube counterclockwise (as viewed from breech end) until stop is
encountered.
f. Move gun tube lock key forward and tighten screw. 10-11
g. Remove strap wrench and sling. 10-29
h. Install thrust collar. 5-11
i. Remove spindle assembly support. 10-28
j. Install control cam and screw. 10-17.1
k. Install dust shield and ammunition detent. 5-10 10-13
m. Install new check valve assembly (table 10-10). 10-27
NOTE.
For steps 13 thru 21, refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.
13 Remove three screws and firing probe guard. (Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.)

14 Disconnect electrical harness from firing probe receptacle. (Refer to
TM 9-2350-230-12.)
15 Remove electrical harness assembly retaining straps. (Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.)
16 Loosen lock screw. Remove hex nut and washer.
17 Remove five screws and firing probe cover.
18 Remove firing probe receptacle.
19 Remove spanner nut and lockwasher (200 to 250 pound-feet).
20 Remove firing probe being careful not to lose locating pin.
21 Remove loading tray. (Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.)
CAUTION
Do not lose shim when removing loading tray guide assembly.
22 Remove loading tray guide assembly. 10-3

23 Remove 22 screws from carrier cover. 10-4
24 Close breech chamber but do not lock it.
25 Remove carrier cover and hand crank group from ball screw. 10-4
26 Remove hand crank and handle assembly from carrier cover. 10-4
27 Remove 12 screws attaching gear segment to breech chamber. 10-5
28 Remove gear segment. 10-5
29 Remove carrier guide key. 10-5
10-43
C13, TM 9-2350-230-35/2

30 Remove breech carrier assembly. 10-5
CAUTION.
Be careful not to damage gun tube during removal/installation of breech
chamber. Cushion end of tanker pry bar to prevent damage.
31 Carefully remove breech chamber. (Breech chamber weighs about 90 pounds.) 10-30
Insert 18-inch bar (or suitable steel bar) through firing probe hole. Slide breech
chamber rearward supported by bar. Rest breech chamber on spindle, remove
bar, and remove breech chamber.
NOTE.
Make sure that all interrupted threads are clean and free of corrosion.
32 If retubing/rechambering on vehicle, proceed to step 33. If replacing CPV,
follow steps a thru n below:
a. Remove two screws from bottom of electrical harness bracket. (Refer to
TM 9-2350-230-12.)
b. Remove loading tray guide assembly and ejector cocking bracket. (Refer to
TM 9-2350-230-12.)
c. Remove eight screws and spindle assembly. 10-3
d. Remove four screws, four washers and torque key bracket. 10-11
e. Remove coupling key nut, washer, and key. 5-11
f. Remove breech coupling. 10-33
g. Stamp breech coupling in accordance with TM 9-1000-202-35.
WARNING.
Sling should remain on coupling to avoid personnel injury.
h. Install new breech coupling. 10-33

i. Install coupling key washer and nut. Tighten nut 35 to 37 pounds-feet. 5-11
j. Install torque key bracket, four washers, and four screws. Tighten screws 10-11
15 to 17 pound-feet.
k. Install spindle assembly and eight screws. Tighten screws 48-55 pound-feet. 10-8
m. Install loading tray guide assembly and ejector cocking bracket. (Refer to
TM 9.2350-230-12.)
n. Install two screws in bottom of electrical harness bracket. (Refer to
TM 9.2350-230-12.)
NOTE.
Make sure that all interrupted threads are clean and free of corrosion.
33 Using two personnel, install new breech chamber with 18-inch bar. Align detent 10-2
release button with slot in breech coupling. Remove bar. Make note of breech
chamber serial number.
34 Install breech carrier assembly. 10-5
35 Install carrier guide key. 10-5
36 Install hand crank group in ball screw. 10-5, 10-8
37 Position actuating cam cylinder until milled slots are just visible at edge of spindle 10-8
assembly.
38 Install gear segment: 10.5, 10-8
a. Align "0" marks located on tooth face of gear segment and actuating cam
cylinder.
b. Make sure that threaded holes in breech chamber align with gear segment.
Turn hand crank and handle assembly to move gear segment forward until
gear segment lock pin seats dowel hole in breech chamber and gear segment
is in full contact with breech chamber.
10-44
C13, TM 9-2350-230-35/2

39 Install 12 screws attaching gear segment to breech chamber and tighten 120 to 10-5
150 pounds-inches.
40 Install hand crank into carrier cover. 10-4
41 Secure carrier cover with 22 screws; tighten screws 120 to 150 pounds-inches. 10-4
NOTE.
For steps 41 thru 44, refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.
42 Install firing probe:

a. Carefully install locating pin. (Locating pin must be recovered if dropped into
carrier cover.)
b. Install spanner nut and lockwasher. Tighten 200 to 250 pounds-feet.
43 Install firing probe receptacle.
44 Install firing probe cover and secure with five screws. Tighten screws 70 to 85
pounds-inches.
45 Check firing probe receptacle for continuity.
46 Install electrical harness assembly retaining straps. (Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.)
47 Install three screws and firing probe guard. (Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.)
48 If retubing/rechambering on vehicle, proceed to step 49. If replacing CPV, follow
steps a. thru n. below:
a. Open breech chamber.
b. Support spindle assembly to prevent sagging. 10-31
c. Position sling on gun tube and hook up to lifting device. Align interrupted 10-32
threads with missile slot at approximately 7 o'clock position as viewed from
breech end.
d. Install gun tube lock key and screw in rearmost position. 10-11
e. Move gun tube firmly to rear until it seats against shoulder. Adjust lifting 10-11
device as necessary.
f. Position strap wrench on gun tube. 10-32
g. Rotate gun tube counterclockwise (as viewed from breech end) until stop is
encountered.
h. Move gun tube lock key forward and tighten screw. 10-11
i. Remove strap wrench and sling. 10-32
j. Install thrust collar. 5-11
k. Install control cam. 10-17.1
m. Install ammunition detent. 10-13
n. Install M81E1 gun-launcher and mount in turret. (Refer to table 5-1.1.)
49 Install loading tray guide assembly and loading tray. (Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12.)
50 Record the following information on Weapon Record Data, DA Form 2408-4,
TM 38-750:
a. Breech chamber serial number.
b. Gun tube serial number.
c. Number of retubings.
51 When retubing/rechambering, stamp breech coupling in accordance with
TM 9-1000-202-35.
10-45
C13, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-28. Breech spindle support for retubing/rechambering procedure
Figure 10-29. Sling for retubing/rechambering procedure
10-46
C13, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-30. Removal/installation of breech chamber
Figure 10-31. Breech spindle support for CPV replacement procedure
10-47
C13, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 10-32. Sling for CPV replacement procedure
Figure 10-33. Removal/installation of breech coupling
10-48
C10, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
CHAPTER 11
REPAIR OF COMMANDER'S POWER ASSIST CUPOLA

(M551 ONLY)
11-1. General
Refer to Chapter 4 for maintenance, inspection, and repair data prior to repair of the following components. Repair of
cupola components peculiar to M551A1 vehicle is provided in Chapter 11.1.
Table 11-1. Commander's Power Assist Cupola -Repair

Adjust Replace Repair
Electrical System 11-1 Fig. 5-20 Fig 5-14, 5-17, Fig. 11-1
and 5-18 through 11-5
Cupola Bearing Assembly 11-2 Fig. 5-17 Fig. 11-6
Traverse Mechanism Assy. 11-3 Fig. 11-1 Fig. 5-19 Fig. 11-7
and 11-2 through 11-10
Machine Gun Pintle Support 11-4 Fig. 5-13 Fig. 11-13

Assembly
Commander's Cupola 11-4 TM 9-2350-230- Fig. 11-14
Traverse Switch Assembly 10/2-2 Fig. 11-15
Section 11-1. COMMANDER'S POWER ASSIST CUPOLA ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
11-2. General Refer to figure 11-2.

a. The cupola electrical system provides repair
procedures for electrical components of the cupola. 11-5. Repair of Commander's Cupola Traverse
b. Refer to figures 5-14 and 5-18 for removal and Mechanism Control Box
installation of electrical components requiring repair. Refer to figure 11-4.
c. Refer to figure 11-3 for commander's power
assist cupola electrical system wiring diagram to assist 11-6. Repair of Commander's Cupola Control
in troubleshooting and repair. Assembly
11-3. Disassembly/Assembly - Commander's
11-7. Disassembly/Assembly and Repair of
Cupola Electrical Contact Ring Brush
Commander's Cupola Traverse Switch
Assembly
Assembly.
Refer to figure 11-14 for disassembly/ assembly; figure
11-15 for repair.
11-4. Disassembly/Assembly - Commander's
Cupola Electrical Contact Ring Assembly
11-1
C6, TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 11-1. Disassembly/assembly commander's cupola electrical contact ring brush
Figure 11-2. Disassembly/assembly - commander's cupola electrical contact ring brush assembly
11-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 11-4. (Superseded) Repair of commander's cupola traverse mechanism control box assembly
11-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 11-5. (Superseded) Repair of commander's cupola control assembly
11-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Section 11-2. REPAIR OF CUPOLA BEARING ASSEMBLY
Figure 11-6. Disassembly/assembly - commander's cupola bearing assembly
11-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Section 11-3. REPAIR OF CUPOLA TRAVERSE MECHANISM
Figure 11-7. (Superseded) Disassembly/assembly - cupola traverse mechanism (1 of 4)
11-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 11-2. Disassembly/Assembly-- Cupola Traverse Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 11-7)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Spring Pin 14. Brake Lever 27. Dowel Pin (2)
2. Brake Lever, Left Cam Pin 15. Screw (2) 28. Dowel Pin
3. Brake Lever, Right Cam Pin 16. Washer (2) 29. Ratchet Pawl
4. Stop Pin 17. Retainer 30. Toggle
5. Nut (2) 18. Handle Outer Guide 31. Plug Nut (2)
6. Setscrew (2) 19. Shim 32. Carriage
7. Brake Cover 20. Carriage 33. Manual Traverse Handle Assy
8. Dowel Pin 21. Nut 34. Spring Retainer
9. Screw (2) 22. Setscrew 35. Spring
10. Flat Washer (2) 23. Spring 36. Handle
11. Handle Inner Guide 24. Nut 37. Long Pin
12. Handle Stop Pin 25. Setscrew 38. Short Pin
13. Dowel Pin 26. Spring 39. Rod Handle
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY NOTES
1. Tighten handle outer guide screws (15) to 10 pounds-feet and inner guide screws (9) to 10 pounds-feet.
2. Refer to Figure 11-12 for shimming (18) procedures.
3. Adjust brake cover setscrews (6) to position manual traverse handle in the horizontal position.
4. Install long dowel pin (37) flush with OD of handle (36).
5. Refer to Figure 11-12 for pinning procedures for replacement of brake lever (14).
6. Apply sealing compound 8030-00-063-4728 to screw threads (items 6 and 39).
Table 11-3. Cupola Traverse Mechanism - Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 11-7)
Ref. Inspection Data and Points of Size and Fit Repair

Number Measurement of New Parts Limit
23 Spring .94 inches
and Free length. 54.7 lb. /in.
26 Spring rate.
Replace if broken or distorted.
35 Spring
Free length. 1.50 inches
Spring rate. 17.7 lb. /in.
11-7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 11-8. (Superseded) Disassembly/assembly - cupola traverse mechanism (2 of 4)
11-8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 11-4. Disassembly/Assembly-Cupola Traverse Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 11-8)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Screw (4) 10. Manual Brake Lever Latch Assy. 20. Flat Washer (2)
2. Electric Motor and Centrifugal 11. Shim 21. Latch Bracket
Switch Assembly 12. Cotter Pin (2) 22. Mounting Bracket
3. Gasket 13. Pin 23. Screw (4)
4. Screw (4) 14. Flat Washer (2) 24. Manual Traverse Ratchet
5. Switch Assy. 15. Latch Right Spring Wheel
6. Gasket 16. Latch Left Spring
7. Electric Motor 17. Latch
8. Screw (2) 18. Screw (2)
9. Flat Washer (2) 19. Lock Washer (2)
ASSEMBLY
Table 11-5. Cupola Traverse Mechanism - lnspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 11-8)
Ref. Inspection Data and Size and Fit Repair

2 Electric Motor
OD splines over two .0800 dia. pins. .3984 to .3998 *
OD shaft for switch assy. (5). .2495 to .2500 .248
5 Switch Assembly
ID of bore in switch to fit
motor shaft (2) .250 to .251 .253
Fit of switch on motor shaft (2). .000 to .0015L .002L
15 Latch Right Spring

and
16 Latch Left Spring
Torque at initial position in lb. /in. 1.35 to 1.65
Torque at final position in lb. /in. 2.7 to 3.3
Spring rate .09 lb. in. /deg.
11-9
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 11-9. Disassembly/assembly - cupola traverse mechanism (3 of 4)
11-10
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 11-6. Disassembly/Assembly - Cupola Traverse Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 11-9)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Drain Plug 11. Brake Gasket 21. Flat Washer (5)
2. Lock Nut 12. Brake Outer Disk Key 22. Screw (3)
3. Tanged Lock Washer 13. Screw (4) 23. Flat Washer (3)
4. Screw (2) 14. Flat Washer (4) 24. Gasket
5. Magnetic Brake Assy. 15. Bearing Retainer 25. Bearing Retaining Ring
6. Outer Disk 16. Seal 26. Ball Bearing
7. Shim 17. Gasket 27. Dowel Pin
8. Inner Disk 18. Lock Nut 28. Dowel Pin
9. Spring (6) 19. Tanged Lock Washer 29. Lower Housing
10. Brake Body 20. Screw (5)
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY NOTE
1. Tighten housing group fastening screws (20 and 22) to 35 pounds-feet.
2. Use spanner wrench 4933-687-8507 to remove/install drive gearshaft to lower housing group lock nut, (18) from/on
drive gearshaft.
3. Tighten drive gearshaft lock nut (18) to 16 pounds-feet. If lockwasher tang is not aligned with slot in lock nut, tighten
to next slot.
4. Apply sealing compound 8030-063-4728 to bearing retainer screw (13) threads and tighten to 20 pounds-feet.
5. Refer to Figure 11-11 for magnetic brake shimming (7) procedure.
6. Use spanner wrench to remove/install brake assembly lock nut (2) from/on drive gearshaft.
7. Tighten brake assembly lock nut (2) to 6 pounds-feet. If lockwasher tang is not aligned with slot in lock nut, tighten to
next slot.

5 Magnetic Brake Assembly
Brake operational voltage range. 18 to 30 *
Current draw at 24 volts. 2.7 AMPS *
Minimum torque. 160 ft. lbs. *
Total backlash, in degree. 0 to 0
26 Ball Bearing
OD 1.8499 to 1.8504 1.8496
ID .7870 to .7874 .7876
29 Lower Housing (part of matched set
with upper housing (Fig. 11-10, item 26).
ID of bore for bearing (26). 1.8503 to 1.8509 **
Fit of bearing (26) in housing. .0001T to .001L .0015L
11-11
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 11-10. Disassembly/assembly - cupola traverse mechanism (4 of 4)
11-12
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 11-8. Disassembly/Assembly- Cupola Traverse Mechanism (Refer to Fig. 11-10)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Anti-Backlash Spur Gearshaft 10. Lube Fill Plug 19. Spur Gearshaft
2. Key 11. Screw (8) 20. Ball Bearing
3. Spur Gear 12. Washer (8) 21. Ball Bearing
4. Spacer 13. Retainer 22. Spur Gearshaft
5. Bearing Race 14. Gasket 23. Ball Bearing
6. Seal 15. Cover 24. Ball Bearing
7. Retaining Ring 16. Gasket 25. Spur Gear
8. Retaining Ring 17. Ball Bearing 26. Upper Housing (Matched Set
9. Needle Bearing 18. Ball Bearing with Lower Housing (Fig.
11-9, item 29)
ASSEMBLY
Table 11-9. Cupola Traverse Mechanism- Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 11-10)

Number Points of Measurement of New Part Unit
1 Drive and Anti-backlash Spur Gear-shaft
Backlash with cupola ring gear. .006 to .010
OD of upper seal contact surface. 1.372 to 1.375 1.371
OD for bearing race (5). 1.1241 to 1.1245 1.1240
OD for bearing (Fig. 11-9, item 26). .7867 to .7871 .7863
OD for lower seal contact surface. .718 to .719 .716
Fit of bearing (Fig. 11-9, item 26)
on shaft. .001T to .0007L .0009
9 Drive Spur Gear
Backlash between gearshaft (19). .002 to .004 .006
5 Bearing Race
ID 1.1245 to 1.1250 1.1542
OD 1.3735 to 1.3741 1.3733
Fit of race on shaft (1). .0000 to .0009L .0013L
9 Needle Bearings
ID 1.3760 to 1.93769 1.3772
OD 1.8745 to 1.8750 1.8742
Fit of bearing on race (5). .0019L to .0034L .0005L
17, 18 Ball Bearing
ID .7870 to .7874 .7877
OD 1.6530 to 1.6535 1.6527
19 Large Spur Gearshaft
Small gear dia. over two .1440 dia. pins. 1.4363 to 1.4384 1.4343
Large gear dia. over two .1080 dia. pins. 4.5837 to 4.5863 4.5817
OD of shaft to fit bearings (17 & 18). .7873 to .7877 .7870
Fit of bearing (17 & 18) on shaft. .0007T to .0001L .0004L
20, 21 Ball Bearings
23, 24 ID .5902 to .5906 .5909
OD 1.2593 to 1.2598 1.2590
Fit of bearings on gearshaft (22 & 25). .006T to .0001L .0003L
11-19
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Continued

Number Points of Measurement of New Part Unit
22 Intermediate Spur Gearshaft
Small gear OD over two .1080 dia. pins. 1.3948 to 1.3971 1.3928
Large gear OD over two .0720 dia. pins. 3.3478 to 3.3504 3.3458
Small gear backlash with mating gear (19). .002 to .004 .006
Large gear backlash with mating gear (25). .001 to .003 .005
OD of gearshaft (22 & 25) to fit bearing
(20, 21, 23, 24). .5908 to .5905 .5902
25 Small Spur Gearshaft
ID of spline over two .0600 dia. pins. .2197 to .2176 .2210
Backlash with mating gear (22). 0010 to .0030 .005
26 Upper Housing (Matched with Lower Housing)
ID of bore for bearings (9). 1.8745 to 1.8750 1.8752
ID of bore for bearing (17 & 18). 1.6534 to 1.6528 1.6537
Fit of bearing (17 & 18) in housing. .004 to .007 *
ID of bore for bearing (20, 21, 23,24). 1.2597 to 1.2603 1.2605
Fit of bearing (20,21,23,24) in housing. .0001 to .0010L *
Figure 11-11. Cupola traverse mechanism magnetic brake disks shimming procedure
11-14
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 11-12. Cupola traverse mechanism manual brake and traverse group adjustment
11-15
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Figure 11-12.1. Repair of Cupola traverse mechanism motor
11-16
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C9
Section 11-4. REPAIR OF MACHINE GUN PINTLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

AND CUPOLA TRAVERSE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Figure 11-13. Disassembly/assembly - machine gun pintle support assembly.
11-17
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C9
Figure 11-14. Disassembly/assembly of cupola traverse switch assembly.
11-18
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C9
Figure 11-15. Repair of cupola traverse switch assembly
11-19
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
CHAPTER 11.1
REPAIR OF COMMANDER'S POWER ASSIST CUPOLA

(M551A1 ONLY)
11.1-1. General
Repair of cupola components peculiar to M551 Vehicle is provided in Chapter 11.
Table 11.1-1. Commander's Power Assist Cupola-Repair

Reference
Assembly or Component Section Adjust Replace Repair
Electrical System 11.1-2 Fig. 5-20 Fig. 5-14, Fig. 11.1-1
5-17, and through
5-18 11.1-13
Cupola Bearing Assembly Chap.11 Fig. 5-17 Fig. 11-6
Cupola Traverse Mechanism 11.1-3 Par. 11.1-19 Fig. 5-19 and Fig. 11.1-14
Assembly Table 11.1-15 through
11.1-20
Machine Gun Pintle Support Chap.11 Fig. 5-13 Fig. 11-13

Assembly
Commander's Cupola Chap.11 TM 9-2350- Fig. 11-14

Traverse Switch Assembly 230-10-2-2 Fig. 11-15
Section 11.1-1. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION OF CUPOLA

EQUIPPED WITH LASER RANGE FINDER AN/VVG-1
11.1-2. Symbol Designation
Many of the electrical components referred to in this section are coded by symbols (tables 11.1-2 and 11.1-3).
The first number identifies the assembly in which the component is contained. The letter(s) identifies the type of
component. The second number indicates the component's location within its assembly.
11.1-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-2. Symbol Designations for Assemblies
Symbol Assembly Disassembly/Assembly

designation figure reference
22 Cupola traverse mechanism control box assembly. 11.1-2

23 Laser range finder control box assembly 11.1-6
24 Cupola traverse motor (subassembly of cupola traverse mechanism 11.1-14
assembly)
80 Resolver mechanism (subassembly of cupola traverse mechanism 11.1-17
assembly)
81 Resistor box assembly 11.1-10
82 Remote switch assembly 11.1-9
Table 11.1-3. Symbol Designations for Electrical Components
Symbol designation Component
C- w/number Capacitor
CR- w/number Diode (semiconductor)
J - w/number Receptacle connector
K- w/number Relay
LS - w/number Limit switch
N.C. Normally closed
N.O. Normally open
R- w/number Resistor
S- w/number Switch
11.1-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
EXAMPLE: 23S2 11.1-4. Cupola LEFT Rotation (Fig. 11.1-1)
23 - identifies the cupola/laser control box assembly. a. With the cupola direction control switch 23S1 in
left position, the following functions will occur:
S2 - identifies the switch.
(1) The solenoid coil of relays 22K1-A and
Therefore, 23S2 is the S2 switch on the cupola/laser 22K2 will be activated. This causes the
control box assembly. contact points on the left side (only) of
relay 22K1-A and on both sides of relay of
11.1-3. Cupola Power ON Position (Fig. 11.1-1) 22K2 to close.
(2) This action will cause a circuit to be made
a. With cupola power switch 23S2 in the ON through the drive motor armature 24M,
position the following functions occur: through the normally closed contacts of
relay 22K1-B,and to ground.
(1) A circuit is made through the second half (3) A simultaneous action occurs through a
of the power switch 23S2, through resistor parallel circuit to the contact points of
23R1 (220 ohms), through lamp indicator relay 22K2. One set of contact points
23DS-1 to ground. This lights lamp activates the shunt field coil of the drive
indicator 23DS-1. motor, starting rotation of the motor. The
(2) A +28-vdc potential is also applied to the other set of 22K2 contact points activates
laser system through the second half of the field coil of the magnetic clutch. This
the power switch 23S2. disengages the clutch teeth and allows the
(3) Through a parallel circuit, a +28vdc d r i v e motor to rotate.
potential is applied via the first half of (4) A delay circuit is provided for the laser
power switch 23S2 to the following align mode. This delay is accomplished
components: by providing a capacitor 23C1 and a
resistor 23R2 (1000 ohms) in parallel with
(a) The field coils of two relays 23K1 the solenoid of relay 23K2. The reason
and 81K1. for this delay is explained in (5) below.
(b) The field coils of relays 22K1A and (5) The speed switch is activated
22K1-B. mechanically by t h e cupola drive motor
and will close when the motor reaches
(c) The field coils of two relays 22K2
operational speed. This switch provides a
and 23K2.
parallel ground to hold the solenoid of
(d) Capacitor 23C1. relay 22K2 in an energized position until
(e) Both sets of contact points of relay the motor speed is reduced to
22K2 and 23K2. approximately 900 rpm. This insures
against the magnetic clutch engaging until
(4) A +28-vdc potential is applied the drive motor has had sufficient time to
continuously to the contact points of slow down.
relays 22K1-A and 22K1-B, from the
source, on a parallel circuit with power b. The cal .50 machine gun left handle switch
switch 23S2. derives power through the cupola contact ring. When
this switch is closed, it transfers voltage back through
b. No current will flow to ground until the cupola the contact ring and makes a circuit which parallels the
traverse control switch 23S1 is activated in either the one in a above, activating the same circuits.
left or right position.
11.1-5. Cupola RIGHT Rotation (Fig. 11.1-1)
a. With the cupola direction control switch
11.1-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-1. Commander's cupola schematic diagram (M551A1 only).
11.1-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
23S1 in the RIGHT position, the following functions will (1) Switches 23S3 and 82S1 are of a
occur: momentary contact type.
(2) The "stop" side of these switches does not
(1) The solenoid coil of relays 22K1-B and break contact unless the STOP position is
22K2 will be activated, causing the selected.
contact points o n the right side (only) of
relay 22K1-B and on both sides of relay b. The direction of cupola rotation is governed by
22K2 to close. cams located in the cupola resolver mechanism. These
(2) This action will cause a circuit to be made cams actuate limit switches 80LS-1 and 80LS-2. In this
through the drive motor armature 24M, description, the cupola is oriented to the right side of the
through the normally closed contacts of front position. This positions switch 80LS-lon the left
relay 22K1-A, to ground. contact; 80LS-2 in the closed position.
(3) A simultaneous action occurs through a c. A ground is provided through 23S3, 80LS-1, and
parallel circuit to the contact points of 80LS-2 to actuate relays 22K1-A, 22K2, and 23K-2.
relay 22K2. One set of the contact points This starts the cupola drive motor.
activates the shunt field coil of the drive d. A parallel circuit is provided through switch
motor, starting rotation of the motor. The 23S3 to provide a ground and activate relay 23K1. The
other set of relay 22K2 contact points contact points of relay 23K1 close. As a result, the
activates the field coil of the magnetic contact points of both relays 23K2 and 23K1 provide a
clutch. This disengages the clutch teeth holding circuit in operation (since switch 23S3 is a
and the drive motor to rotate. momentary contact type and will break contact shortly
(4) The speed switch is actuated after it is actuated).
mechanically by the cupola drive motor e. Upon returning cupola to center (front) position,
and will close when the motor reaches limit switch 80LS-1 disengages. This removes the
operational speed. This switch provides a ground from relay 22K1-A, which in turn stops the drive
parallel ground to hold the solenoid of motor. The speed switch then removes the ground from
relay 22K2 in an energized position until relays 22K2 and 23K2. When relay 23K2 deactivates,
the motor speed is reduced to its contact points open, causing relay 23K1 to drop out.
approximately 900 rpm. This insures
against the magnetic clutch engaging until
11.1-7. Cupola Automatic Align RIGHT Rotation
the drive motor ha s had sufficient time to
(Fig. 11.1-1)
slow down.
Refer to paragraph 11.1-5 for normal rotational drive
b. The cal .50 machine gun right handle switch circuits. Only an explanation of the circuits involved
derives power through the cupola contact ring. When with automatic alignment of the cupola follows.
this switch is closed, it transfers voltage back through
the contact ring and makes a circuit which parallels the a. The two automatic alignment switches 23S3 and
one in a above, activating the same circuits. 82S1 are wired in parallel. Therefore, the same results
occur when either switch is activated.
11.1-6. Cupola Automatic Align LEFT Rotation (Fig.
11.1-1)
(1) Switches 23S3 and 82S1 are of a
For explanation of the normal rotational drive circuits, momentary contact type.
refer to paragraph 11.1-4. Only a description of the (2) The "stop" side of these switches does not
circuits involved with automatic alignment of the cupola break contact unless the STOP position is
follows. selected.
a. The two automatic alignment switches 23S3 and

82S1 are wired in parallel. Therefore, the same results
occur when either switch is activated.
11.1-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
b. The direction of cupola rotation is governed b y true "zero" or front position and preventing burned
cams located in the cupola resolver mechanism. These contact points on the switch.
cams actuate limit switches 80LS-1 and 80LS-2. In this
description, the cupola is oriented to the left side of the 11.1-9. Slow Cam Circuit (Fig. 11.1-1)
front position. This positions switch 80LS-1 on the right
contact. Limit switch 80LS-2 remains open. a. The slow cam limit switch 80LS-3 actuates in
c. A ground is provided through 23S3 and 80LS-1l either direction of cupola rotation. When closed, this
to actuate relays 22K1-B, 22K2, and 23K2, starting the switch provides a ground for the solenoid of relay 81K1,
cupola drive motor. through the contact points of relays 23K2 and 23K1.
d. A parallel circuit is provided through switch The normally closed contact points of 81K1 then open,
23S3 to provide a ground and actuate relay 23K1. The causing resistor 81R1 to be placed in series with the
contact points of relays 23K2 and 23K1 provide a cupola drive motor commutator. This causes a voltage
holding circuit to keep the cupola drive motor in drop in the drive motor, slowing its rotation.
operation (since switch 23S3 is a momentary contact b. Without this circuit the cupola drive mechanism
type and will break contact shortly after it is actuated). would return to center (front) position too rapidly,
e. Upon returning cupola to center (front) position, causing the cupola to over-drive the stop position and
limit switch 80LS-1 disengages. This removes the oscillate.
ground from relay 22K1-B, which in turn stops the drive
motor. The speed switch then removes the ground from 11.1-10. Cupola Automatic Align System Stop
relays 22K2 and 23K2. When the contact points of relay Switches (Fig. 11.1-1)
23K2 open, this breaks the holding circuit to relay 23K1,
allowing 23K1 to open. The cupola drive system stop switches 23S3 and 8251
are wired in series with each other. Through this circuit
11.1-8. Time Delay Circuit (Fig. 11.1-1) a ground is provided to the solenoid of relay 23K1.
When the cupola is being operated in the automatic
A time delay circuit is provided for relay 23K2 to delay return mode, the actuation of either stop switch will
its deenergizing. This delay consists of a resistor 23R2 cause relay 23K1 to deactivate. This deactivates relay
(1000 ohm) and a capacitor 23C1 in parallel with the 22K1-A or 22K1-B(depending on whether the cupola
solenoid of relay 23K2. When relay 23K2 hesitates in was being traversed right or left), which in turn
breaking contact, it allows the cupola drive motor extra deactivate s the cupola drive motor.
running time. This enables limit switch 80LS-1 to reach
the center cut of point on its cam, thus permitting a
closer relation a closer relation of the cupola with the
Section 11.1-2. COMMANDER'S CUPOLA ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
11.1-11. Removal/Installation Refer to figure 11-2.
Refer to figures 5-14 and 5-18 for removal and 11.1-14. Disassembly/Assembly - Traverse
installation of electrical components requiring repair. Mechanism Control Box Assembly, with Suppressor
11.1-12. Disassembly/Assembly - Electrical Contact NOTE

Ring Brush Assembly Control box assemblies installed on
Refer to figure 11-1. M551A1 vehicles must be equipped
with the suppressor.
11.1-13. Disassembly/Assembly - Electrical Contact
Ring Assembly
11.1-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 for removal/installation. 11.1-17. Disassembly/Assembly - Resistor Box

See figures 11.1-2 through 11.1-5 for Assembly
disassembly/assembly, installation of suppressor, and
continuity check. Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 for removal/installation.
See figures 11.1-10 and 11.1-11 for
11.1-15. Disassembly/Assembly - Laser Range disassembly/assembly and continuity check.
Finder Control Box Assembly
11.1-18. Special Purpose Cable Assembly
Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 for removal/installation.
See figures 11.1-6 through 11.1-8 for Refer to figure 11.1-12 for removal/installation of special
disassembly/assembly and continuity check. purpose cable assembly. See figure 11.1-13 for
disassembly/assembly.
11.1-16. Disassembly/Assembly - Remote Switch
Assembly
Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 for removal/installation.
See figure 11.1-9 for disassembly/assembly and
continuity check.
11.1-7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-2. Disassembly/assembly - traverse mechanism control box assembly.
11.1-8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-3. Traverse mechanism control box assembly - wiring diagram.
11-1.9
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-4. Wiring Chart for Traverse Mechanism Control Box Assembly (Refer to Fig. 11.1-3)
Length-
Wire Wire used tolerance + From To Terminal/insulation
No. 0.500-inch
Unit Term Unit Term From To
1 M81044/4-12-9 6 J1 D K1 3 -- 3
2 M81044/4-12-9 9 J1 B K1 D -- 3
3 M81044/4-16-9 9 J2 A K1 3 -- 2
4 M81044/4-16-9 9 J2 B K1 C3 -- 4
5 M81044/4-16-9 9 J2 C K1 D2 -- 2
6 M81044/4-16-9 9 J2 D K1 C2 -- 4
7 M81044/4-16-9 12 J2 E K1 C1 -- 4
8 M81044/4-12-9 6 J3 A K1 D -- 3
9 M81044/4-12-9 12 J3 D K1 2 -- 3
10 M81044/4-16-9 9 J3 C E6 LUG -- --
11 M81044/4-16-9 9 J3 B K1 D1 -- 2
12 M81044/4-16-9 6 J3 E E2 LUG -- --
13 M81044/4-16-9 6 J3 F E5 LUG -- --
14 M81044/4-12-9 3 K1 1 K1 D 3 3
15 M81044/4-12-9 3 K1 2 K1 D3 3 3
16 M81044/4-16-9 12 K1 C2 E3 LUG 4 --
17 M81044/4-16-9 10 K1 C1 E1 LUG 4 --
18 M81044/4-12-9 3 K1 D1 K1 D2 3 3
19 M81044/4-18-9 4 K2 2 E2 LUG -- --
20 M81044/4-18-9 4 K2 7 K1 C3 -- 1
1 — Terminal MS25036-101
2 — Terminal M325036-108
6 — Insulation 1094730-1
11.1-10
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-4. Wiring Chart for Traverse Mechanism Control Box Assembly - continued
Length-
Wire Wire used tolerance + From To Terminal/insulation
No. 0.500-inch
Unit Term Unit Term From To
21 M81044/4-18-9 6 J2 F E7 -- -- 6
22 M81044/4-18-9 6 E7 -- K2 6 -- --
23 M81044/4-18-9 96 E4 LUG K1 D2 -- 5
24 M81044/4-18-9 6 E5 LUG K2 4 -- --
25 M81044/4-18-9 6 E6 LUG K2 5 -- --
26 M81044/4-18-9 4 E7 -- K2 3 -- --
2 — Terminal M325036-108
6 — Insulation 1094730-1
11.1-11
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-4. Installation of suppressor in traverse mechanism control box assembly.
11.1-12
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-5. Traverse mechanism control box assembly - schematic diagram.
11.1-13
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-6. Disassembly/assembly - laser range finder control box assembly.
11.1-14
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-5. Disassembly/Assembly - Laser Range Finder Control Box Assembly

(Refer to Fig. 11.1-6)
DISASSEMBLY
1 SCREW (6) 28 TIP
2 WASHER (6) 29 NUT (PART OF SWITCH S1)
3 COVER 30 WASHER
4 GASKET 31 SWITCH, S1
5 GASKET (6) 32 PACKING
6 CAPACITOR, C1 33 NUT (PART OF SWITCH S3)
7 SLEEVING (2) 34 WASHER
8 RIVET (2) 35 SWITCH S3
9 CLIP 36 SEAL
10 RESISTOR, R1 37 NUT (PART OF LIGHT DS1)
11 RESISTOR, R2 38 SEAL
12 SEMICONDUCTOR, CR1, CR2 (2) 39 LIGHT DS1
13 SCREW (4) 40 WASHER (PART OF LIGHT DS1)
14 NUT (8) 41 SCREW (4)
15 WASHER (4) 42 NUT (4)
16 BOARD ASSEMBLY 43 WASHER (4)
17 SCREW (4) 44 WASHER (4)
18 WASHER (4) 45 CONNECTOR J1
19 NUT (4) 46 GASKET.
20 RELAY, K1, K2 (2) 47 CONTROL BOX
21 SCREW (3) 48 TIE-DOWN STRAPS
22 WASHER (3) 49 TERMINALS:
23 BRACKET NO. 22-18 AWG, NO. 6 STUD SIZE(17)
24 NUT (PART OF SWITCH S2) NO. 16-14 AWG, NO. 6 STUD SIZE(5)
25 WASHER NO. 22-18 AWG, NO. 4 STUD SIZE (1)
26 SWITCH, S2 50 NO. 16, NO. 19, AND NO. 21 AWG
27 SEAL WIRE
ASSEMBLY
Reverse Numerical Sequence
11.1-15
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-7. Laser range finder control box assembly - wiring diagram.
11.1-16
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-6. Wiring Chart for Laser Range Finder Control Box Assembly (Refer to Fig. 11.1-7)
Length-
Wire Wire used tolerance From To Terminal Insulation
No. + 0.500-
inch
Unit Term Unit Term From To From To
1 M81044/4-16-9 As reqd J1 P S2 5 -- T2 1 --
2 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd J1 B S2 6 -- T1 1 --
3 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd J1 C S1 2 -- T1 1 --
4 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd J1 T A1 5 -- -- 1 1
5 M31044/4-20-9 As reqd J1 E S3 5 -- T1 1 --
6 M81044/4-16-9 As reqd J1 F S2 6 -- T2 1 --
7 M81044/4-16-9 As reqd J1 R S2 3 -- T2 1 --
8 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd J1 H S1 3 -- T1 1 --
9 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd J1 S S1 1 -- T1 1 --
10 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd S1 2 DS1 1 T1 -- -- 1
11 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd A1 4 DS1 2 -- -- 1 1
12 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd S2 2 DS1 3 T1 -- -- 1
13 M81044/4-16-9 As reqd S2 2 S2 5 T2 T2 -- --
14 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd S2 6 A1 1 T1 -- -- 1
15 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd S3 2 S1 2 T1 T1 -- --
16 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd K1 A2 S3 6 -- T1 1 --
17 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd A1 3 S3 3 -- T1 1
18 M81044/4-22-9 As reqd A1 1 K1 X1 -- -- -- 1
19 M81044/4-22-9 As reqd K1 X1 K2 X1 -- -- -- 1
20 M81044/4-22-9 As reqd A1 8 K2 X2 -- -- 1 1
21 M81044/4-22-9 As reqd S3 3 K1 X2 T1 -- -- 1
22 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd J1 J S1 1 -- T1 1 --
23 M31i044/4-20-9 As reqd J1 K S1 3 -- T1 1
24 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd J1 L S3 3 -- T1 1 --
11.1-17
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-6. Wiring Chart for Laser Range Finder Control Box Assembly - continued
Length-
Wire Wire used tolerance From To Terminal Insulation
No. + 0.500-
inch
25 M81044/4-22-9 As reqd K2 X2 K2 B1 -- -- -- 1
26 M81044/4-22-9 As reqd K2 B1 J1 N -- -- -- 1
27 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd 53 2 J1 GND T1 T3 -- --
2e M81044/4-22-9 As reqd K1 X2 K2 A2 -- -- -- 1
29 M81044/4-20-9 As reqd K2 A1 K1 A1 -- -- 1 1
30 M810,t4/4-20-9 As reqd K2 B2 J1 M -- -- 1 1
Note: Use straps MS3367-4-9 as required.
Table 11.1-7. Terminal and Insulation Chart for Laser Range Finder Control Box Assembly
Number
Symbol Terminal or insulation required
T1 -- Terminal - MS 25036-101 ---------------- --- 17
T2 -- Terminal - MS 25036-106 ---------------- --- 5
T3 -- Terminal - MS 25036-148 ---------------- --- 1
1 -- Insulation - MIL-I-23053/5 ---------------- --- 32
11.1-18
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-8. Laser range finder control box assembly - schematic diagram.
11.1-19
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-9. Disassembly/assembly - remote switch assembly.
Table 11.1-8. Disassembly/Assembly - Remote Switch Assembly (Refer to Fig. 11.1-9)
DISASSEMBLY
1 EXISTING SCREWS - SEE TM 9-2350-230 8 BRACKET

-12 (3)
2 SCREW (4)
3 NUT (4)
4 WASHER (4)
5 NUT (PART OF SWITCH ASSEMBLY) ASSEMBLY
6 GUARD
7 SWITCH ASSEMBLY REVERSE NUMERICAL SEQUENCE
11.1-20
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-10. Disassembly/assembly - resistor box assembly.
11-1-21
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-9 Disassembly/Assembly - Resistor Box Assembly (Refer to Fig. 11.1-10)
DISASSEMBLY
1 SCREW (6) 19 NUT (2)

2 WASHER (6) 20 WASHER (2)
3 COVER ASSEMBLY 21 WASHER (2)
4 COVER 22 RESISTOR (R2)
5 GASKET 23 SPACER (2)
6 GASKET (6) 24 RESISTOR (R1)
7 SCREW (3) 25 SCREW (4)
8 WASHER (3) 26 NUT (4)
9 NUT (2) 27 WASHER (4)
10 WASHER (2) 28 CONNECTOR
11 SCREW (2) 29 GASKET
12 RELAY 30 BOX ASSEMBLY
13 NUT (FURNISHED WITH TERMINALS) (2) 31 TERMINALS:
14 WASHER (FURNISHED WITH TERMI- NO. 16-14 AWG, NO. 6STUD SIZE (4)
NALS) (2) NO. 16-14 AWG, NO. 10STUD SIZE (2)
15 TERMINAL (2) NO. 12-10 AWG, NO. 10STUD SIZE (2)
16 SEMICONDUCTOR (CR1) 32 INSULATION SLEEVING
17 PLATE 33 NO. 12 AND NO. 14 AWG WIRE
18 SCREW (2)
ASSEMBLY
Reverse Numerical Sequence. Apply adhesive
MIL-A-46106 under the heads of screws 18 and 25.
11.1-22
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-11. Resistor box assembly - wiring and schematic diagrams.
11.1-23
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-10. Wiring Chart for Resistor Box Assembly (Refer to Fig. 11.1-11)
Wire Length-
no. Wire used tolerance From To Terminal a Insulation a
+ 0.500-inch
1 M81044/4-12-9 As reqd J1 A K1 A3 -- 1 A --
2 M81044/4-14-9 As reqd K1 A3 R1 A 2 -- -- --
3 M81044/4-14-9 As reqd R1 B R2 B -- -- -- --
4 M81044/4-14-9 As reqd R2 A K1 A4 -- 2 -- --
5 M81044/4-12-9 As reqd K1 A4 J1 C 1 -- -- A
6 M81044/4-16-9 As reqd J1 B K1 X1 -- 3 B --
7 M81044/4-16-9 As reqd K1 X1 CR1 CATH- 3 -- -- --

ODE
8 M81044/4-16-9 As reqd J1 D K1 X2 -- 3 B --
9 M81044/4-16-9 As reqd K1 X2 CR1 AN- 3 -- -- --

ODE
Table 11.1-11. Terminal and Insulation Chart for Resistor Box Assembly (Refer to Fig. 11.1-11)
Symbol Terminal part number Number

required
1 MS 25036-112 2
2 MS 25036-108 2
3 MS 25036-106 4
Insulation - part number MIL-I-23053/5
Symbol As supplied After unrestricted recovery Number
Inside Inside Length Required
diameter diameter Wall +0.06- inch
A 0.187 0.093 0.020 0.75 2
B 0.125 0.062 0.020 0.75 2
11.1-24
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-12. Removal/installation - special purpose cable assembly.
11.1-25
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-13 Disassembly/assembly - special purpose cable assembly.
11.1-26
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-12. Disassembly/Assembly - Special Purpose Cable Assembly (Refer to Fig. 11.1-13)
1 CONNECTOR (TO BRUSH ASSEMBLY) 23 STRAP

2 STRAP 24 STRAP
3 STRAP 25 CONNECTOR (TO REMOTE SWITCH)
4 STRAP
5 CONNECTOR (TO BRUSH ASSEMBLY)
6 STRAP INSTALLATION NOTE
7 CONNECTOR (TO RESOLVER)
8 SHELL, TERMINAL,AND SLEEVE BEFORE REPLACING STRAPS - IN BLACK
9 SHELL, WASHERAND CONTACT LETTERS 0.12-INCH HIGH, APPLY THE
10 STRAP FOLLOWING NOMENCLATURE:
11 STRAP
12 CONNECTOR (TO MOTOR) STRAP NOMENCLATURE
13 STRAP
14 CONNECTOR (TO RESISTOR BOX) 2 BRUSH
15 TERMINAL (TO CLUTCH) 3 11678994
16 NIPPLE 6 RESOLVER
17 STRAP 10 SPEED SWITCH
18 STRAP 11 MOTOR
19 CONNECTOR (TO CUPOLA CONTROL 13 RESISTOR BOX
RELAY BOX J3) 17 CLUTCH
20 CONNECTOR (TO CUPOLA CONTROL 18 RELAY BOX J3
BOX) 21 CONTROL BOX
21 STRAP 23 RELAY BOX J2
22 CONNECTOR (TO CUPOLA CONTROL 24 REMOTE SWITCH
(RELAY) BOX J2)
Section 11.1-3 . CUPOLA TRAVERSE MECHANISM ASSEMBLY
11.1-27
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-14. Disassembly/assembly - cupola traverse mechanism assembly (1 of 4).
11.1-28
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-13. Disassembly/Assembly - Cupola Traverse Mechanism Assembly (Refer to Fig. 11.1-14)
DISASSEMBLY

1 SCREW (4) 50 BALL BEARING
2 ALIGNMENT MECHANISM 51 BALL BEARING
3 NUT 52 GEARSHAFT
4 WASHER 53 BALL BEARING
5 SPUR GEAR 54 BALL BEARING
6 SHIM 55 SPUR GEAR
7 KEY 56 BALL BEARING
8 SCREW (4) 57 SCREW (3)
9 ADAPTER 58 WASHER (3)
10 BOLT (4) 59 PLUG
11 WASHER (4) 60 BOLT (4)
12 BEARING RETAINER 61 MOTOR ASSEMBLY
13 GASKET 62 GASKET
14 SEAL 63 SCREW (3)
15 NUT 64 GASKET
16 KEY WASHER 65 SWITCH ASSEMBLY
17 BEARING 66 ELECTRICAL CONTACT
18 SCREW (7) 67 WASHER
19 WASHER (7) 68 ELECTRICAL SHELL
20 UPPER HOUSING 69 CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY
21 GASKET 70 INSULATOR
22 LOWER HOUSING 71 CABLE NIPPLE
23 SPUR GEAR 72 WIRE
24 KEY 73 SWITCH
25 SLEEVE SPACER 74 PIN
26 ANTI-BACKLASH GEARSHAFT
27 PIN DISASSEMBLY NOTE
28 GEAR
29 GEARSHAFT 1 BEFORE DISASSEMBLY, REMOVE
30 BEARING RACE DRAIN PLUG (59) AND DRAIN OIL.
31 SEAL
32 RETAINING RING 2 USE SPANNER WRENCH 11604985 TO
33 ROLLER BEARING REMOVE/INSTALL NUT (3).
34 RETAINING RING
35 SCREW (2) 3 USE SPANNER WRENCH 10942347 TO
36 WASHER (2) REMOVE/INSTALL NUT (15).
37 BEARING RETAINER
38 GASKET 4 SEE FIG. 11-8 AND 11-12.1 FOR
39 SCREW (2) DISASSEMBLY OF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
40 WASHER (2) (61) AND SWITCH (72).
41 BEARING RETAINER
42 GASKET ASSEMBLY
43 SCREW (2)
44 WASHER (2) Reverse Numerical Sequence
45 HOUSING COVER
46 GASKET ASSEMBLY NOTES
47 PLUG
48 BALL BEARING 1 SEE FIG. 11-8 AND 11-12.1 FOR ASSEMBLY
49 GEARSHAFT OF MOTOR ASSEMBLY (61) AND SWITCH
(72).
11.1-29
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-13. Disassembly/Assembly - Cupola Traverse Mechanism Assembly - continued
2 DURING ASSEMBLY TIGHTEN BEARING 7 TORQUE BOLTS (10) TO 15 FT-LB.

RETAINER AND BEARING COVER
SCREWS (35), (39), AND (43) TO 10 FT-LB. 8 AFTER ASSEMBLY, FILL GEAR BOX
WITH OIL (GRADE 10, MIL-L-2104) TO
3 INSTALL SEAL (31) AS SHOWN IN VIEW COVER GEAR (23).
BB, Figure 11.1-15.
9 AFTER COMPLETE ASSEMBLY, AND
4 TORQUE SCREWS (18) TO 35 FT-LB. INSTALLATION IN VEHICLE, PERFORM
THE CUPOLA-TO-MAIN WEAPON PRO-
5 TORQUE NUT (15) TO 16 FT-LB. CEDURE IN PARAGRAPH 11.1-19.
6 INSTALL SEAL (14) AS SHOWN IN VIEW

AA, Figure 11.1-15.
11.1-30
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-14. Cupola Traverse Mechanism Assembly - Inspection and Repair Data (Refer to Fig. 11.1-14)

5 Spur Gear
Backlash with gearshaft at 3.7000 center .002 to .004 .006
distance.
Backlash with spur gear (61, Fig. 11.1-16) at .002 to .004 .006
3.850 center distance.
17 Ball Bearing
OD 1.8499 to 1.8504 1.8496
ID .7870 to .7874 .7876
20 Upper Housing (Matched with Lower Housing)
ID of bore for bearings (33). 1.8745 to 1.8750 1.8752
Fit of bearings (33) in housing. .0003T to .0012L .0015L
ID of bore for bearings (48 and 50). 1.6528 to 1.6534 1.6537
Fit of bearings (48 and 50) in housing. .004 to .007 *
ID of bore for bearings (51, 53, 5t, 56). 1.2597 to 1.2603 1.2605
Fit of bearings (51, 53, 54, 56) in housing). .0001 to .0010L *
23 Drive Spur Gear
Backlash with gearshaft (49). .002 to .004 .006
29 Drive and Anti-Backlash Spur Gearshaft
Backlash with cupola ring gear. .006 to .010
OD of upper seal contact surface. 1.372 to 1.375 1.371
OD for bearing race (30). 1.1241 to 1.1245 1.1240
OD for bearing (33). .7867 to .7871 .7863
OD for lower seal contact surface. .718 to .719 .716
Fit of bearing (33) on shaft. .001T to .0007L .0009
30 Bearing Race
ID 1.1245 to 1.1250 1.1542
OD 1.3735 to 1.3741 1.3733
Fit of race on shaft (29). .0000 to .0009L .0013L
11.1-31
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-14. Cupola Traverse Mechanism Assembly - Inspection and Repair Data - continued

33 Needle Bearings
ID 1.3760 to 1.3769 1.3772
OD 1.8745 to 1.8750 1.8742
Fit of bearing on race (30). .0019L to .0034L .0005L
48, 50 Ball Bearing
ID .7870 to .7874 .7877
OD 1.6530 to 1.6535 1.6527
49 Large Spur Gearshaft
Small gear dia. over two .1440 dia. pins. 1.4368 to 1.4384 1.4343
Large gear dia. over two .1080 dia. pins. 4.5837 to 4.5863 4.5817
OD of shaft-to fit bearings (48 and 50). .7873 to .7877 .7870
Fit of bearings on shaft. .0007T to .0001L .0004L
51, 53, Ball Bearings
54, 56 ID .5902 to .5906 .5909
OD 1.2593 to 1.2598 1.2590
Fit of bearings on gearshafts (52 and 55). .006T to .0001L .0003L
52 Intermediate Spur Gearshaft
Small gear OD over two .1080 dia. pins. 1.3948 to 1.3971 1.3928
Large gear OD over two .0720 dia. pins. 3.3478 to 3.3504 3.3458
Small gear backlash with mating gear (49). .002 to .004 .006
Large gear backlash with mating gear (55). .001 to .003 .005
OD of gearshaft (52 and 55) to fit bearings (51, .5905 to .5908 .5902
53, 54, 56).
55 Small Spur Gearshaft
ID of spline over two .0600 dia. pins. .2176 to .2197 .2210
Backlash with mating gear (52). .0010 to .0030 .005
11.1-32
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
11.1-33
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
DISASSEMBLY 19 NO-BACK DEVICE 40 WASHER

CONSISTING OF: 41 BEARING
Follow Numerical Sequence 20 PIN KEY 42 SPACER
21 DRIVING MEMBER 43 SCREW (4)
1 PIN 22 SPRING (6) 44 GEAR
2 SCREW 23 LOCKING BAR 45 SHIM
3 WASHER 24 LOCK RING 46 SHAFT
4 RETAINER 25 DRIVEN MEMBER 47 KEY
5 SPRING 26 NUT 48 RING
6 RETAINER 27 WASHER 49 BEARING
7 SHAFT 28 RING 50 SPACER
8 BEARING 29 BEARING 51 MAGNETIC BODY
9 HANDLE 30 KEY 52 SPRING (3)
10 NUT 31 SHIM 53 SPACER
11 WASHER 32 GEARSHAFT 54 ARMATURE PLATE
12 CRANK 33 SCREW (5) 55 SCREW (4)
13 RING 34 WASHER (5) 56 SETSCREW (4)
14 BEARING 35 SCREW (4) 57 ADAPTER PLATE
15 KEY 36 WASHER (4) 58 SHIM
16 SHAFT 37 COVER 59 SHIM
17 KEY 38 BRUSH 60 BEARING
18 SPACER 39 NUT 61 GEAR
62 HOUSING
63 RESOLVER ASSEMBLY
& RELATED PARTS
CURTAILED DISASSEMBLY
(DISASSEMBLY OF MAGNETIC CLUTCH (CONSISTING OF ITEMS 51 THRU 61 AND NO-BACK DEVICE DOES NOT
REQUIRE REMOVAL OF COMPLETE TRAVERSE MECHANISM ASSEMBLY FROM CUPOLA.)
1. REMOVE HOUSING (62) BY REMOVING FIVE SCREWS (33) AND FIVE WASHERS (34) FROM RESOLVER
ASSEMBLY (63).
2. FOLLOW NUMERICAL SEQUENCE 10 THROUGH 32 FOR REMOVAL OF NO-BACK DEVICE.
3. FOLLOW NUMERICAL SEQUENCE 35 THROUGH 61 FOR REMOVAL OF MAGNETIC CLUTCH.
4. DRIVE OUT SHAFT (46) USING BLOCK OF WOOD AND HAMMER, BEING CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE
THREADS.
ASSEMBLY
Reverse Numerical Sequence
ASSEMBLY NOTES
1 CLEAN NO-BACK DEVICE (19) AND INSIDE OF HOUSING (62) WITH SOLVENT CR OR SD. DO NOT SOAK
DRIVING MEMBER (21) OR DRIVEN MEMBER (25). REMOVE ANY ROUGHNESS INSIDE HOUSING WITH
CROCUS CLOTH.
2 APPLY A LIGHT COAT OF OIL (PL-S) ON LOCKING BAR (23) AND INSIDE OF LOCK RING (24). ASSEMBLE
LOCKING BAR AND SPRINGS (22) AND PLACE ON DRIVEN MEMBER. INSTALL LOCK RING AND DRIVING
MEMBER.
3 APPLY A LIGHT COAT OF PL-S TO NO-BACK DEVICE AND INSIDE OF HOUSING. INSTALL NO-BACK
DEVICE IN HOUSING, HOLDING PIN KEY (20) IN GROOVE OF LOCK RING. DO NOT PACK EXTRA GREASE
IN HOUSING.
4 SHIM THICKNESS BETWEEN GEARSHAFT (32) AND BEARING (29): +0.001=U-X. "U" IS STAMPED ON
HOUSING. "X" IS ETCHED ON GEARSHAFT.
11.1-34
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-15. Disassembly/Assembly - Cupola Traverse Mechanism Assembly - continued
5 TORQUE NUT (39) TO 4-6 FT-LB IF 7 SHIM THICKNESS (58):

LOCK TANG OF WASHER (40) DOES ±0.001=L+M+0.006- K.
NOT ALIGN, CONTINUE TORQUING "L" IS ETCHED ON MAGNETIC
TO NEXT SLOT. BODY (51).
"M" IS ETCHED ON MAGNE TIC
6 PREASSEMBLE GEAR (61), BEARING BODY.
(60), ADAPTER PLATE (57) AND "K" IS ETCHED ON SPACER (53).
SCREWS (55). TORQUE SCREWS TO
3-5 FT-LB.MEASURE GAP BETWEEN 8 SHIM THICKNESS (45): ±0.001=W-
GEAR AND PLATE. INSTALL SHIM(S) (Z+Y+B).
BETWEEN GEAR AND PLATE AS "W" IS STAMPED ON HOUSING (62).
REQUIRED: EQUAL TO A MIN GAP "Z" IS ETCHED ON SHAFT (47).
PLUS ZERO MINUS 0.001. "Y" IS ETCHED ON GEAR (44).
"B" IS MEASURED WIDTH OF BELARING
(49).

5 Spring
Free length. 1.38 in. *
Spring rate. 16.1 lb in. *
Replace if broken, cracked, or distorted.
8 Bearing
ID .635 to .640 *
OD of bearing surface. .752 to .754 *
14 Ball Bearing
ID .7870 to .7874 .7877
OD 2.0467 to 2.0472 2.0464
16 Shaft
OD for ball bearing (14). .7873 to .7877 .7870
Fit of bearing on shaft. .0007T to .0001L .0004L
11.1-35
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-16. Cupola Traverse Mechanism Assembly - Inspection and Repair Data - continued.

19 No- Back Device

ID of members .625 to .626 .628
Fit of shaft (16) into no-back device. .001L to .003L .005L
Spring must not be deformed, cracked, or
broken.
Maximum lash of driven member (unloaded) 2 degrees *
Maximum lash of driving member (un- 4.5 degrees *
loaded)
29 Ball Bearing
ID .7870 to .7874 .7877
OD 1.8504 to 1.8509 1.8501
32 Gearshaft
OD for ball bearing (29). .7873 to .7877 .7870
Fit of bearing on gearshaft. .0007T to .0001L .004L
Backlash with bevel gear (44). .002 to .004 .006
38 Electrical Contact Brush
Replace if insulator or brush is cracked or
broken.
Spring force on brush in operating position. .5 lb (approx) *
41 Ball Bearing
ID .6247 to .6250 .6253
OD 1.3745 to 1.3750 1.3742
44 Bevel Gear
ID for shaft (47). .8120 to .8130 .8135
Backlash with shaft. .002 to .004 .006
47 Shaft
OD for bearing (41). .6249 to .6252 .6242
Fit of bearing (41) on shaft. .0005T to .0001L .0004L
OD for bearing (60). .6692 to .6695 .6690
Fit of bearing (60) on shaft. .0005T to .0001L .0004L
11.1-36
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10

49 Ball Bearing
ID .9839 to .9843 .9845
OD 2.0467 to 2.0472 2.0464
54 Armature Plate
Replace if teeth are worn. Backlash 0°12' 0°14'
between plate and magnet body (51)
with complete reversal and 2 ft lbs
of torque.
60 Ball Bearing
ID .6690 to .6693 .6696
OD 1.5743 to 1.5748 1.5740
61 Spur Gear
Backlash with spur gear (5) at 3.850 center .002 to .004 .006
distance.
ID for bearing (60). 1.5747 to 1.5753 1.5755
Fit of bearing on shaft. .0001T to .0010L .0013L
62 Housing
ID for bearing (14). 2.0471 to 2.0477 2.0480
ID for bearing (29). 1.8503 to 1.8509 1.8512
Fit of bearing (29). .0006T to .0000 .0003L
ID for bearing (49). 2.0471 to 2.0477 2.0480
Fit of bearing (49). .0001T to .0010L .0014L
11.1-37
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
11.1-38
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
DISASSEMBLY

1 SCREW (4) 43 RECEPTACLE
2 WASHER (4) 44 GASKET
3 COVER 45 SCREW (2)
4 NUT (PART OF SWITCH, ITEM 8) (2) 46 WASHER (2)
5 WASHER (PART OF SWITCH, ITEM 8) 47 SCREW (3)
(2) 48 WASHER (3)
6 SCREW (PART OF SWITCH, ITEM 8) 49 HOUSING (MATCHED SET WITH
(2) ADAPTER, ITEM 65)
7 ACTUATOR 50 BEARING
8 SWITCH, LS-1 51 SCREW (2)
9 NUT (PART OF SWITCH, ITEM 12) (2) 52 CAM
10 WASHER (PART OF SWITCH, ITEM 12) 53 CAM
(2) 54 BEARING
11 SCREW (PART OF SWITCH, ITEM 12) 55 GEARSHAFT ASSEMBLY
(2) 56 SHAFT
12 SWITCH, LS-2 57 GEAR
13 ACTUATOR 58 RING
14 NUT (PART OF SWITCH, ITEM 17) (2) 59 BEARING
15 WASHER (PART OF SWITCH, ITEM 17) 60 BEARING
(2) 61 GEARSHAFT ASSEMBLY
16 SCREW (PART OF SWITCH, ITEM 17) 62 GEAR
(2) 63 SHAFT
17 SWITCH, LS-3 64 GEAR
18 ACTUATOR 65 SCREW (2)
19 SCREW 66 WASHER (2)
20 WASHER 67 PIN
21 WASHER 68 PIN
22 WASHER (2) 69 ADAPTER (MATCHED SET WITH
23 BUSHING HOUSING, ITEM 46)
24 RING 70 GASKET
25 PLATE 71 BEARING
26 NUT 72 BEARING
27 CAM 73 GEARSHAFT ASSEMBLY
28 PACKING 74 GEAR
29 RING 75 SHAFT
30 PLATE 76 GEARSHAFT
31 NUT 77 HOUSING
32 CAM
33 PACKING ASSEMBLY
34 SCREW
35 WASHER Reverse Numerical Sequence
36 SCREW
37 WASHER ASSEMBLY NOTE
38 PLATE
39 SPACER (IF NEEDED) ASSEMBLE GEAR (57) WITH THREAD
40 NUT (4) CHAMFERS FACING TOWARD CAM (53).
41 WASHER (4)
42 SCREW (4)
11.1-39
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10

3 Cover
ID for bearing (50). .4779 to .5004 .5009
Fit of bearings in cover. .0001T to .0008L .0012L
23 Bushing
ID .249 to .250 *
OD of bearing surface .329 to .330 *
50, 54, Ball Bearing
59, 60 ID .1872 to .1875 .1878
OD .4996 to .5000 .4993
56 Shaft
OD for bearings (50 and 54). .1873 to .1876 .1870
57 Spur Gear
OD of gear over two .05400 pins. 3.5744 to 3.5752 3.5736
Backlash with gear (57) at 2.0625 center .0010 to .0016 .0019
distance.
62 Spur Gear
OD of gear over two .05400 pins. .6979 to .6986 .6972
Backlash with gear (57) at 2.0625 .0010 to .0016 .0019
center distance.
63 Shaft
OD for bearings (59 and 60). .1872 to .1876 .1870
64 Spur Gear
Backlash with gear (74) at .89605 center .0005 to .0011 .0014
distance.
69 Adapter
ID for bearings (54, 59, 60). .4999 to .5004 .5009
Fit of bearings (54, 59, 60) in adapter. .0001T to .008L .0012L
ID for bearing (71). 1.5747 to 1.5753 1.5756
Fit of bearing (71) in adapter. .0001T to .0010L .0014L
11.1-40
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10

71, 72 Bearing
ID .6690 to .6693 .6696
OD 1.5743 to 1.5748 1.5740
74 Spur Gear
Backlash with gear (64) at .89065 center .0005 to .0011 .0014
distance.
75 Shaft
Minor OD .1250 to .1253 *
76 Spur Gearshaft
Backlash with spur gear (5, fig. 11.1-14) at .002 to .004 .006
3. 7000 center distance.
OD for bearing (71 and 72). .6692 to .6695 .6690
Fit of bearings on shaft. .000 5T to .0001L .0004L
77 Housing
ID for bearing (41, fig. 11.1-16). 1.3749 to 1.3755 1.3758
Fit of bearing (41, fig. 11.1-16) in housing. .0001T to .0010L .0014L
ID for bearing (71 and 72). 1.5747 to 1.5753 1.5756
Fit of bearings (71 and 72) in housing. .0001T to .0010L .0014L
11.1-41
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-18. Traverse alignment mechanism - schematic and wiring diagrams.
11.1-42
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Table 11.1-19. Wiring Chart for Alignment Mechanism Assembly (Refer to Fig. 11.1-18)
Wire Length-
no. Gage tolerance From To
a + 0.500-inch
Unit Term Unit Term
1 22 As reqd J1 A LS1 NO
2 22 As reqd J1 B LS2 NO
3 22 As reqd J1 C LS1 C
4 22 As reqd J1 E LS3 NO
5 22 As reqd J1 F LS3 C
6 22 As reqd J1 D LS2 C
7 22 As reqd J1 D LS1 NC
a. MIL-W-16878, TYPE E
11.1-19. Alignment of Cupola to Main Weapon (7) Scribe t line on housing and cover;
remove four screws, four washers and
a. Initial Adjustment. resolver cover assembly.
(1) Boresight gun-launcher on 1200 meter (8) Rotate cam shaft so that cam, which
target (TM 9-2350-230-102-3). actuates two micro- switches, is
(2) At commander's control, set azimuth positioned s o that actuators are just over
control at "0". high lobes of cam.
NOTE
(3) Manually align cupola so that laser
reticule is centered on 1200 meter target The above condition can only exist
in azimuth. Adjust elevation control as in one position.
required. (9) Install resolver cover assembly with four
(4) Place vehicle MAS TE R switch in OFF washers and four screws, making sure
position (5) Place cupola power switch in cover assembly is oriented to the same
OFF position. position as when removed. Do not tighten
screws at this time.
(6) DISCONNECT cable from resolver
receptacle (80J1) (fig. 11.1-19). (10) With a multimeter set on lowest
resistance scale, connect one lead to
80J1 pin E. The multimeter
11.1-43
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
should show zero (0) resistance between NOTE

pins E and F. This indicates that LS-3 in If alignment of cupola to main
the resolver is closed. LS-3 activates weapon is no t sufficient perform the
relay K1 in the resistor box 11678967, steps listed in b. below. One degree
which in turn applies a series resistance to at commander's control is equal to
the cupola drive motor causing the cupola 23 meters at boresight target (1200
to run at slow speed. Disconnect meters).
multimeter.
b. Final Adjustment of Cupola to Main Weapon
(11) Adjust resolver alignment cover so that, with Resolver Installed.
when a multimeter is connected
alternately between pins A and C, 80J1 (1) Perform steps listed in a (4), (5), (6), and
and pins B and D, 80J1, an infinite (10) above.
resistance (open circuit) is indicated.
When a resolver alignment cover position
is established, (when an open circuit is (2) Perform steps listed in a (1), (2), and (3)
indicated between both pins A and C, and above. A multimeter will show a closed
pins B and D) tighten four screws. circuit between pins E and F and an open
circuit between pins A and C and between
pins B and D.
(12) Connect cable to 80J1.
(3) Manually traverse cupola slowly 2°
(13) Place vehicle MASTER switch and clockwise off boresight target.
CUPOLA/LASER POWER switch to the
ON position.
(4) Loosen left cam micro-
switch(LS2)adjusting screw locknut (fig.
(14) Energize cupola ROTATION switch and r 11.1-19). Adjust screw until multimeter
o t a t e cupola approximately 90 indicates a closed circuit between pins B
(clockwise or counterclockwise). and D, 80J1. Tighten locknut.
(15) Activate CUPOLA ALIGN switch. Cupola (5) Manually traverse cupola slowly 2°
will align itself to gun-launcher. counterclockwise off boresight target.
(16) Repeat steps (14) and (15) in opposite (6) Loosen right cam micro-switch (LS-1)
direction. adjusting screw locknut (fig 11.1-19).
Adjust screw until multimeter indicates a
closed circuit between pins A and C,
80J1. Tighten locknut.
(7) Perform steps in a (13), (14), and (15)

above.
11.1-44
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
Figure 11.1-19. Alignment of cupola to main weapon.
11.1-45
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
DISASSEMBLY
1. SCREW
2. WASHER
3. HANDLE
ASSEMBLY
Reverse Numerical Sequence.
Figure 11.1-20. Disassembly/assembly - cupola traverse handle (M551A1 only).
11.1-46
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
CHAPTER 12
REPAIR OF TURRET MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
12-1. General
Table 12-1. Turret Miscellaneous Components- Repair

Elevation Quadrant Bracket 12-1 Fig. 12-1
Turret Traverse Bearing Assembly 12-2 Fig. 12-2
Turret Ratable Floor Bearing 12-3 Fig. 12-3
Gun Trunnion Bearings 12-4 Fig. 12-4
Telescope Mounting Bracket 12-5 Fig. 12-5
Gunner's Control Handle Bracket 12-6 Fig. 12-6
Grenade Launcher Electrical Control 12-7 Fig. 12-7
Grenade Launcher Tube Assembly 12-8 Fig. 12-8
Closed Breech Scavenging System - 12-9 Fig. 12-9, 12-10

Vehicle Mounted and 12-10.1
Closed Breech Scavenging System - 12-9.1 Fig. 12-10.3

Slave Charging
Closed Breech Scavenging System 12-9.2 Fig. 12-10.4 thru

(M551A1 only) 12-10.8
Portable Fire Extinguisher and 12-10 Fig. 12-11
Hose Guard Bracket
Turret Protective Screens 12-11 Fig. 12-12
Transmitter Protective Cover 12-12 Fig. 12-13
Searchlight Adaptation Kit 12-13 Fig. 12-14
Commander's Lower and Upper 12-14 Fig. 12-15
Control Handle Bracket Assembly and 12-16
Rear Ballistic Shield Assembly 12-15 Fig. 12-17
Commander's Ballistic Shield Posts 12-15.1 Fig. 12-17.1
(M551A1 only)
Bustle Rack Support Blocks 12-15.2 Fig. 12-17.2
(M551A1 only)
Commander's Platform 12-16 Fig. 12-18
Oddment Stowage Box 12-17 Fig. 12-19
7.62-MM Machine Gun 12-18 Fig. 12-20
Ammunition Box
Gas-Particulate Filter Unit (GPFU) 12-19 Fig. 12-21
and 12-22
12-1/(12-2 blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Section 12-1. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION- ELEVATION QUADRANT BRACKET
Figure 12-1. Removal/installation - elevation quadrant mounting bracket
12-2.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Section 12-2. TURRET TRAVERSE BEARING ASSEMBLY
Figure 12-2. Repair of turret traverse bearing assembly
12-2.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Section 12-3. TURRET ROTATABLE FLOOR BEARING
Fig. 5-1 to 5-3
Figure 12-3. Removal/installation - turret rotatable floor bearing
12-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Section 12-4. REPAIR OF GUN TRUNNION BEARINGS
Figure 12-4. Repair of gun trunnion bearings
Section 12-5. REPAIR OF M119 TELESCOPE MOUNTING BRACKET
Figure 12-5. Removal/installation -M119 telescope mounting bracket
12-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Section 12-6. REPAIR OF GUNNER'S CONTROL HANDLE BRACKET ASSEMBLY
Figure 12-6. Disassembly/assembly - gunner's control handle bracket assembly
12-5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Section 12-7. REPAIR OF GRENADE PROJECTOR ELECTRICAL CONTROL ASSEMBLY
Figure 12-7. Disassembly/assembly - grenade projector electrical control assembly
12-6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Table 12-2. Grenade Launcher Electrical Control Assembly (Figure 12-7)
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY - REPLACE UNSERVICEABLE COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED. .
LEGEND
1. NUT (8) 15. KEY WASHER (2) 30. KNOB
2. FLAT WASHER (8) 16. SEAL (2) 31. SEAL
3. INSULATOR 17. NUT 32. SETSCREW
4. RECTIFIER (CR1, CR2, CR3, 18. SCREW (8) 33. NDICATCR (DS2)
CR4, CR5, CR6, CR7, & CR8) 19. GASKET (4) 34. GASKET
5. LOCK WASHER (2) 20. LAMP (2) 35. CONNECTOR (J2)
6. SCREW (2) 21. INDICATOR (DS1) 36. FLAT WASHER (12)
7. SEAL 22. SCREW 37. NUT (12)
8. SWITCH (S1) 23. GUARD 38. CONNECTOR (J3)
9. RESISTOR (R1 AND R2) (2) 24. GASKET 39. GASKET
10. FLAT WASHER (6) 25. COTTER PIN 40. CONTROL BOX
11. SCREW (4) 26. RING 41. CONNECTOR (J1)
12. COVER 27. CORD 42. GASKET
13. GASKET 28. SCREW 43. PREFORMED PACKING (2)
14. SWITCH (S3) 29. GUARD 44. SWITCH (S2)
NOTE
1. AFTER MAKING ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS, COAT ALL SCREW TYPE TERMINATIONS
AND ALL MOUNTING SCREWS WITH INSULATING ENAMEL (MIL-E-22118).
2. AT ASSEMBLY, APPLY SEALING COMPOUND (GRADE C, MIL-S-22473) TO SWITCH STUDS
(ITEM 8).
3. WIRE ENDS AT CONNECTORS ARE TO BE INSULATED WITH INSULATING SLEEVING (FIG. 4-
3).
12-7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Section 12-8. REPAIR OF GRENADE LAUNCHER TUBE ASSEMBLY
Figure 12-8. Grenade launcher tube assembly
12-8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Table 12-3. Grenade Launcher Tube Assembly (Refer to Figure 12-8)
Disassembly/Assembly - Replace Unserviceable Components as Required.
LEGEND
1. Screw (32) 10. Cover 20. Nut 31. Screw (3)

2. Washer (32) 11. Screw 21. Rod 32. Guard
3. Shim (As Req'd) 12. Solenoid (Position 22. Cotter Pin 33. Pin (6)
4. Tube Assembly (8) Leads as Shown) 23. Pin 34. Boss (3)
5. Screw (2) 13. Screw (2) 24. Clevis 35. Spring (3)
Use Sealing Compound 14. Plate 25. Actuator 36. Pin (3)
Grade AA MIL-S-22473 15. Spring 26. Cotter Pin 37. Lever (3)
on Screw 16. Pin 27. Pin 38. Ring
6. Washer (2) 17. Pin 28. Clevis 39. Ring
7. Washer (2) 18. Pin 29. Guard 40. Pin (3)
8. Washer (2) 19. Nut 30. Cap 41. Tube
9. Spacer (2)
Repair Instructions
1. Add shims (3. fig. 12-8) as required to either top or bottom ears only. Tighten screws (1) to 90 foot-pounds.
2. Tighten screw (5) to 9 foot-pounds.
3. Adjust rod (21) so actuator head (25) is in position as shown in inset when guard (29) and cap are seated against
solenoid.
4. Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 for adjustment of solenoid (12).
5. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant MIL-M-7866 freely on outside diameter of tube at mating surface of ring (39).
6. A replacement boss has two pilot holes (0.06-inch dia). When replacement of tube boss (34) is required, proceed as
follows:
a. Enlarge one hole using 1,/8-inch (0.125) diameter drill.
b. Use one pin MS 16562-36 (33) and attach boss to tube.
c. Align remaining hole in boss with tube hole. Drill through pilot hole in boss using 1/8-inch (0.125) diameter drill.
d. Insert second pin (33).
NOTE
After drilling second hole check inside of tube for enlarged tube hole due to misalignment. If
enlarged, the next larger size pin may be required. If so, redrill with 5/32-mch (0.156) diameter
drill, and use pin MS 16562-42 NSN 5315-00-240-1008.
e. After replacing boss drill and tap to mount ring guard as follows:
(1) Position guard (32) on end of tube.
(2) Attach ring to two tube bosses previously drilled and tapped with two screws (31).
f. Center punch replacement boss through guard hole. Use a 9/32-inch transfer punch to locate center of hole.
CAUTION
In the following step do not drill through pins in tube boss.
g. Remove guard from tube and drill a 1/8-inch (0.125) diameter pilot hole in boss, 9/32-inch (0.281) deep. Enlarge
hole using a No. 3 (0.213-inch) drill. Tap 1//4-28UNF-3B using a bottom tap to finish hole.
h. Attach guard with three screws (31).
7. Tighten screws (31) 9 to 11 foot-pounds.
12-9
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 12-9. REPAIR OF CLOSED BREECH SCAVENGING SYSTEM-VEHICLE MOUNTED
Figure 12-9. Repair of closed breech scavenging system - vehicle mounted (1 of 4)
12-10
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
LEGEND
1. Hose assy 30. Tube assy 59. Screw 87. Strap (4)
2. Screw (4) 31. Elbow 60. Packing 88. Pad (2)
3. Pin (2) 32. Screw 61. Deleted. 89. Cradle assy
4. Bracket 33. Nut 62. Deleted. 90. Pad (6)
5. Hose assy 34. Wire rope assy 63. Deleted. 91. Screw (3)
6. Screw (2) 35. Clamp 64. Elbow 92. Washer (3)
7. Nut (2) 36. Screw 65. Adapter 93. Plate assy
8. Screw (2) 37. Clamp 66. Valve 94. Pad (2)
9. Bracket 38. Hose assy 67. Nipple 95. Screw (4)
10. Elbow 39. Screw (2) 68. Adapter 96. Washer (8)
11. Locknut 40. Nut (2) 68.1. Screw 97. Nut (4)
12. Packing 41. Washer (2) 69. Seal nut 98. Gage (See fig. 12-10.1)
13. Packing 42. Retainer 70. Limiter 99. Screw (2)
14. Nipple 43. Bracket 71. Hose assy 100. Washer (2)
15. Packing 44. Elbow 72. Tee 101. Nut (2)
16. Cap 45. Locknut 73. Locknut 102. Bracket
17. Tee 46. Packing 74. Retainer 103. Screw (2)
18. Locknut 47. Packing 75. Packing 104. Washer (2)
19. Packing 48. Elbow 76. Shutoff valve assy 105. Wire rope assy
20. Packing 49. Locknut 77. Tube (2) 106. Chain assy
21. Valve 50. Packing 78. Cylinder 107. Hook
22. Screw 51. Packing 79. Screw (2) 108. Chain
23. Washer 52. Valve 80. Washer (4) 109. Hook
24. Nut 53. Screw 81. Nut (2) 110. Bracket
25. Washer 54. Nut 82. Rivet (6- 111. Pin (2)
26. Clamp 55. Clamp 83. Bracket
27. Screw 56. Hose assy 84. Bracket
28. Washer 57. Screw (2) 85. Bracket (2)
29. Bracket 58. Guard 86. Rivet (6)
Repair Instructions
1. Prior to disconnecting any component of system, turn vehicle master and compressor switches OFF. Bleed off
system air by actuating lever on solenoid valve (21).
2. Replace unserviceable components as required.
3. When replacing hose or tube assemblies, coat threads with oil MIL-L-6084.
4. Use antiseizing tape MIL-T-27730 on all male pipe threads prior to assembly.
5. Use adhesive type II, MIL-A-5092 on pads (90 and 94).
6. Tighten screws (6, 22, 32, 36, and 53) 9 to 10 foot-pounds.
7. Tighten screws (2, 27, and 91) to 35 foot-pounds.
8. Deleted.
9. Bleed system after repairs (refer to TM 9-2350-230-12).
Figure 12-9. Repair of closed breech scavenging system - vehicle mounted (1 of 4) - continued.
Table 12-4 - deleted.
12-11
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 12-10. Repair of closed breech scavenging system - vehicle mounted {2 of 4)
12-12
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
LEGEND
1. Screw (3) 22. Packing 42. Ring 62. Clamp

2. Washer (3) 23. Housing 43. Packing 63. Nut
3. Nut (1) 24. Spring 44. Screw 64. Washer
4. Screw (2) 25. Cartridge 45. Washer 65. Screw
5. Washer (2) 26. Plug 46. Nut 66. Air storage cylinder
6. Guard 27. Washer 47. Bracket 67. Nut (2)
7. Tube 28. Packing 48. Clamp 68. Washer (2)
8. Tee 29. Washer 49. Hose 69. Screw (2).
9. Packing 30. Screw (2) 50. Deleted. 70. Washer (2)
10. Clamp 31. Washer (2) 51. Screw 71. Bolt (3)
11. Screw 32. Bracket 52. Guard 72. Washer (3)
12. Washer 33. Bolt (3) 53. Screw 73. Support assembly
13. Wire rope 34. Washer (3) 54. Packing (See fig. 12-10.2)
14. Nut 35. Compressor 55. Deleted. 74. Nut (2)
15. Screw 36. Nut 56. Deleted. 75. Washer (2)
16. Nut 37. Tube 57. Shutoff valve 76. Bracket
17. Clamp 38. Sleeve assy 77. Screw 2)
18. Hose assy (at air drier) 39. Hose assy (at 58. Tube 78. Washer (2)
19. Elbow manifold) 59. Nut 79. Plate
20. Nut 40. Nut 60. Washer 80. Nipple
21. ing 41. Tee 61. Screw 81. Packing
Repair Instructions
1. Prior to disconnecting any component of system, turn vehicle master and compressor switches OFF. Bleed off
system air by actuating lever on solenoid valve (21, fig. 12-9).
3. When replacing hose or tube assemblies, coat threads with oil MIL-L-6084.
4. Use antiseizing tape MIL-T-27730 on all male pipe threads prior to assembly.
5. Tighten screws (1, 15, 30, and 44, fig. 12-10) 9 to 10 foot-pounds.
6. Torque nuts on items 7, 8, and 80 to 100 to i50 inch-pounds.
7. Tighten screws (33 and 71) to 35 foot-pounds.
8. Tighten plug (26) to 240 foot-pounds.
9. Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 for replacement of cartridge (25) and maintenance or replacement of compressor (35).
10. Bleed system after repairs (TM 9-2350-230-12).
Figure 12-10. Repair of closed breech scavenging system - vehicle mounted (2 of 4) - continued.
Tables 12-5 and 12-6 - deleted.
12-12.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Figure 12-10.1. Repair of closed breech scavenging system - vehicle mounted (3 of 4).
12-12.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Fig. 12-10
(ITEMS 13, 14, 15, AND 16)
Figure 12-10.2 Repair of closed breech scavenging system -

vehicle mounted ( 4 of 4)
12-13
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C9
Section 12-9.1. CLOSED BREECH SCAVENGING SYSTEM - SLAVE CHARGING
Fig 12-9
Fig 12-10
Figure 12-10-3. Closed breech scavenging system - slave charging
12-14
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 12-9.2. CLOSED BREECH SCAVENGING SYSTEM (M551A1 ONLY)
Figure 12-10.4. Repair of closed breech scavenging system (M551A1 only) (1 of 5)
12-14.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
12-14.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
LEGEND
5. Hose assembly
6. Nut 36. Washer
7. Screw 37. Screw
8. Clamp 38. Washer
9. Nut 39. Clamp
10. Screw 40. Tube assembly
11. Clamp 41. Elbow
12. Hose assembly 42. Locknut
13. Elbow 43. Retainer
14. Locknut 44. Packing
15. Retainer 45. Elbow
16. Packing 46. Hose assembly
17. Tee 47. Nipple
18. Locknut 48. Packing
19. Retainer 49. Tee
20. Packing 50. Locknut
21. Elbow 51. Retainer
22. Nipple 52. Packing
23. Valve 53. Hose assembly
24. Nipple 54. Elbow
25. Plug 55. Locknut
26. Adapter 56. Retainer
27. Limiter 57. Packing
28. Screw (2) 58. Nut (2)
29. Guard 59. Screw (2)
30. Bolt 60. Valve
31. Packing 61. Screw (2)
32. Manifold 62. Bracket
33. Tube 63. Pin, spring (2)
34. Cylinder, air 64. Screw (4)
35. Nut 65. Bracket
Figure 12-10.5. Repair of closed breech scavenging system (M551A1 only) (2 of 5)-Continued
12-14.3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
12-14.4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
LEGEND
66. Nut (2) 90. Washer

67. Washer (2) 91. Screw
68. Bolt (2) 92. Washer
69. Retainer 93. Bracket
70. Valve 94. Screw (2)
71. Bracket 95. Chain assembly
72. Nut (2) 96. Hook
73. Washer (2) 97. Chain
74. Screw (2) 98. Bracket
75. Washer (2) 99. Nut
76. Bracket 100. Screw
77. Nut (2) 101. Spacer
78. Washer (2) 102. Clamp
79. Screw (2) 103. Bracket
80. Washer (2) 104. Nut
81. Gage 105. Washer
82. Screw (2) 106. Screw
83. Washer (2) 107. Washer
84. Wire rope (2) 108. Screw
85. Screw 109. Washer
86. Washer 110. Cradle and strap
87. Washer 111. Plate assembly
88. Bracket 112. Pad (2)
89. Nut 113. Identification plate
12-14.5
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
12-14.6
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
LEGEND
114. Nut 139. Adapter (2) 164. Washer

115. Screw 140. Screw (part of 143) 165. Wire rope
116. Washer 141. Handle (part of 143) 166. Nut
117. Clamp 142. Nut (part of 143) 167. Screw
118. Clamp 143. 3-Way ball valve 168. Washer
119. Nut 144. Nut (2) 169. Screw
120. Screw 145. Washer (2) 170. Washer
121. Washer 146. Screw (2) 171. Bracket
122. Clamp 147. Bracket 172. Clamp (2)
123. Nut 148. Tee 173. Plug
124. Washer 149. Locknut 174. Packing
125. Screw 150. Retainer 175. Packing
126. Clamp 151. Packing 176. Cartridge
127. Nut 152. Hose 177. Packing
128. Screw 153. Valve 178. Spring
129. Clamp 154. Packing 179. Housing
130. Hose assembly 155. Tee 180. Guard
131. Hose assembly 156. Nut 181. Screw (3)
132. Hook 157. Packing 182. Washer (3)
133. Cap 158. Elbow 183. Tube assembly
134. Coupling half 159. Locknut 184. Nut
135. Identification plate 160. Retainer 185. Sleeve
136. Instruction plate 161. Packing 186. Compressor
137. Packing (2) 162. Nut
138. Tube assembly 163. Screw
12-14.7
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
12-14.8
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
LEGEND
187. Screw (2) 201. Washer (2)

189. Guard 202. Screw (2)
191. Packing 203. Washer (2)
193. Tube 204. Bracket
195. Nut (2) 205. Screw (3)
197. Screw (2) 206. Washer (3)
199. Plate 207. Support
188. Washer (2) 208. Pad (2)
190. Bolt 209. Hose
192. Manifold shutoff 210. Bag
194. Air cylinder 211. Bolt
196. Washer (2) 212. Washer
198. Washer (2) 213. Bracket
200. Screw (2)
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
1. Prior to disconnecting any component of the system, turn vehicle master and compressor switches OFF. Bleed
off system air by actuating lever on solenoid valve.
3. Apply antiseizing tape MIL-T-27730 to all male threads prior to assembly.
4. Tighten screws (37, 59, 74, 115, 120, 128, 167, AND 169) to 9 to 10 foot-pounds.
5. Tighten screws (202) to 35 foot-pounds.
6. Tighten hose (152) and valve (153) to 125+ 12 inch-pounds.
7. Tighten coupling half (134), adapters (139), and nut (156) to 100 to 150 inch-pounds.
8. Tighten screws (64) to 378 to 462 inch-pounds.
9. Tighten nipple (47) to 475 to 525 inch-pounds.
10. Tighten elbow (54) to 200 to 250 inch-pounds.
11. Refer to TM 9-2350-230-12 for replacement of cartridge (176) and maintenance or replacement of compressor
(186).
12. Use adhesive, type II, MIL-A-5092 on pads (112 and 208).
13. Bleed system after repair.
12-14.9/(12-14.10 blank)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Section 12-10. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND HOSE GUARD BRACKET
Figure 12-11. Repair of fire extinguisher and hose guard bracket.
12-15
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 12-11. REPAIR OF TURRET PROTECTIVE SCREENS
Figure 12-12. Turret protective screens
12-16
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Section 12-12. REPAIR OF TRANSMITTER PROTECTIVE COVER
Figure 12-13. Repair of transmitter protective cover
12-17
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Section 12-13. REPAIR OF SEARCHLIGHT ADAPTATION KIT
Figs. 4-1 and 4-2
Figure 12-14. Searchlight adaption kit
12-18
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Section 12-14. COMMANDER'S LOWER AND UPPER CONTROL HANDLE BRACKET ASSEMBLY
Figure 12-15. Commander's lower control handle bracket assembly
Figure 12-16. Commander's upper control handle bracket assembly
12-19
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C5
Section 12-15. REAR BALLISTIC SHIELD ASSEMBLY
Figure 12-17. Rear ballistic shield assembly
12-20
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 12-15.1. COMMANDER'S BALLISTIC SHIELD POSTS

(M551A1 ONLY)
Figure 12-17.1. Replacement of commander's ballistic shield posts (M551A1 only)
12-20.1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 12-15.2. BUSTLE RACK

(M551A1 ONLY)
Figure 12-172. Replacement of bustle rack support blocks (M551A1 only)
12-20.2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Section 12-16. REPAIR OF COMMANDER'S PLATFORM
Figure 12-18. Repair of commander’s platform.
12-21
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Section 12-17. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF ODDMENT STOWAGE BOX
PRELIMINARY STEPS
A. TRAVERSE TURRET SO COMPRESSOR FACES DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT.

B. REMOVE LOADER'S SCREEN (TM 9-2350-230-12).
C. REMOVE FOUR SCREWS AND WASHERS, AND COMPRESSOR GUARD (TM 9-2350-230-12).
REMOVAL
1. LOOSEN HOSE CLAMPS SECURING AIR DRYER TO ODDMENT BOX.
2. REMOVE THREE SCREWS AND WASHERS FROM BOTTOM FLANGES OF THE THREE LEGS
WHICH ARE WELDED TO THE ODDMENT BOX. LOOSEN SCREW ON BOTTOM FLANGE OF THE
FOURTH LEG.
3. LIFT ODDMENT BOX STRAIGHT UP, USING CAUTION NOT TO DAMAGE COMPRESSOR.
INSTALLATION
REVERSE REMOVAL PROCEDURE.
WE 708611
Figure 12-19. Removal/installation - oddment stowage box.
12-22
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Section 12-18. REPAIR OF 7.62 MM MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION BOX
Figure 12-20. Repair of 7.62-mm machine gun ammunition box.
12-23
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 12-19. GAS-PARTICULATE FILTER UNIT-TEST AND ADJUSTMENT
Figure 12-21. Operation and connection of M39 airflow tester.
Figure 12-22. Access for adjustment of M2A2 air purifier.
TEST/ADJUSTMENT
Use the M39 airflow tester (NSN 66800-436-4212) figure 12-21 when testing the gas-particulate filter unit airflow.
Operating instructions for the M39 airflow tester are packed in the carrying case with the M39 airflow tester. Use a
screwdriver to turn the adjustment screw clockwise to decrease and counterclockwise to increase the airflow through the
gas-particulate filter unit air regulator, see figure 12-22. Be sure the air collective protector knob on loader control panel
is set between 3/4 and FULL ON when adjusting the air regulator.
NOTE
SOME GAS-PARTICULATE FILTER UNIT PRECLEANERS DO NOT HAVE AN ADJUSTABLE AIR
REGULATOR. IF AIRFLOW CANNOT BE ADJUSTED TO BETWEEN 3 AND 4-1/2 CFM, FOR ALL
STATIONS, THE AIR PURIFIER ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED.
12-24
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
CHAPTER 12.1
REPAIR OF TURRET MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS

(OPFOR VEHICLE ONLY)
12.1-1. General
Table 12.1-1. OPFOR Vehicle-Repair

Limit Switch Cam (No. 3) 12.1-1 Fig. 12.1-1
Safe to Fire Limit Switch 12.1-2 Fig. 12.1-2
Main Weapon Relay Box 12.1-3 Fig. 12.1-3
Wiring Harness
Firing Circuit Tester 12.1-4 Fig. 12.1-4
Electrical Cover 12.1-5 Fig. 12.1-5
Bar (Short Tube Configuration) 12.1-6 Fig. 12.1-6
Bar and Collar (Long Tube 12.1-7 Fig. 12.1-7

Configuration)
Section 12.1-1. ADJUSTMENT OF LIMIT SWITCH CAM (NO. 3)

Figure 12.1-1. Adjustment of limit switch cam (No. 3)
12.1-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 12.1-2. REPAIR OF SAFE TO FIRE LIMIT SWITCH

Figure 12.1-2. Repair of safe to fire limit switch
12.1-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 12.1-3. REPLACEMENT OF MAIN WEAPON RELAY BOX WIRING HARNESS

Figure 12.1-3. Replacement of main weapon relay box wiring harness
Section 12.1-4. REPLACEMENT OF FIRING CIRCUIT TESTER

Figure 12.1-4 Replacement of firing circuit tester
12.1-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 12.1-5. REPLACEMENT OF ELECTRICAL COVER

Figure 12.1-5. Replacement of electrical cover
Section 12.1-6. REPLACEMENT OF BAR (SHORT TUBE CONFIGURATION)

Figure 12.1-6. Replacement of bar (short tube configuration)
12.1-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Section 12.1-7. REPLACEMENT OF BAR AND COLLAR

(LONG TUBE CONFIGURATION)
Figure 12.1-7 Replacement of bar and collar (long tube configuration)
12.1-5 (12.1-6 blank)

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
CHAPTER 13
REPAIR OF MATERIEL USED IN CONJUNCTION

WITH MAJOR ITEM
13-1. Electronic Systems Test Set 13-2. Extractor Assembly
Refer to figures 13-1 through 13-3 for Repair is limited to the

disassembly/assembly,/repair. For electrical schematic, disassembly/assembly/replacement of parts shown in
refer to figure 13-4. figure 13-5.
Figure 13-1. Repair of test set (1 of 3).
13-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
13-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 13-4. Test set electrical schematic.
13-3
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C7
Figure 13-5. Repair of extractor assembly.
13-4
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
INDEX
Page Page
A C - Continued
Accessory box assembly: Convention weapon system
electric drive control circuits:
Repair ..................................................................8-13 Blasting machine ....................................................... 7-8.2
Schematic diagram ....................................................8-14 Breech "automatic open"
Airflow Tester, Gas-Particulate electrical control
Filter Unit 12-24 (CBS system).................................................... 7-6
Amplifier integrator assembly: Breech "close" electrical
electric drive control control ............................................................... 7-3
Repair ..................................................................8-15 Breech "open" electrical
Schematic diagram ....................................................8-16 control ............................................................... 7-2
Automatic relief and Coaxial machine gun firing
bypass valve: control ............................................................... 7-8.2
Disassembly/assembly ..............................................10-36 Conventional ammunition
Performance and calibration ......................................10-36.1 firing control ...................................................... 7-6.2
Azimuth indicator power supply Missile control............................................................ 7-8
Switch assembly .................................................................6-6 Conventional weapons system
wiring harness:
B Removal/installation................................................... 6-16
Ballistic curtain 5-8 Wiring schematic ...................................................... 6-18
Bar (short tube configuration) (OPFOR) ....................................12.1-4 Cupola bearing assembly........................................................... 11-5
Bar and collar (long tube configuration) Cupola, commander's power
(OPFOR) . 12.1-5 assist:
Blasting machine: convention Adjusting electric contact ring
weapon ..................................................................7-11 and brush assemblies ....................................... 5-22
Brush assemblies, and electric Functional operation (M551A1) ................................. 11.1-1
contact ring ..................................................................5-22 Removal/installation................................................... 5-15
Buffer assembly, gun mount.......................................................10-32 Cupola control assembly (M551)................................................ 11-4
Bustle rack(M551A) 12-20.2 Cupola control box assembly (M551) ......................................... 11-3
Cupola electrical system ............................................................ 11-1
C (M551) .................................................................. 11-1
(M551A1) .................................................................. 11.1-6
Cannon pressure vessel (CPV) replacement
Cupola laser range finder
and retubing/rechambering (on vehicle)
control box assembly (M551A1) ........................................ 11.1-14
procedures 10-42
Cupola remote switch assembly
Circuit cutout box 6-7
(M551A1) .................................................................. 11.1-20
Closed breech scavenging
Cupola resistor box assembly
system(M551A1)................................................................12-14.1
(M551A1) .................................................................. 11.1-21
Cupola special purpose cable
system - vehicle mounted...................................................12-10
assembly (M551A1):
Disassembly/assembly.............................................. 11.1-26
system - weapon mounted
Removal/installation................................................... 11.1-25
Check valve 10-38
Cupola traverse handle (M551A1).............................................. 11.1-46
Repair ..................................................................10-37
Cupola traverse mechanism
Striker ..................................................................10-39
assembly (M551):
Telescoping tubes..............................................................10-39
Adjustment ................................................................ 11-15
Clutch arbor tool assembly .........................................................2-6.3
Brake discs shimming procedure .............................. 11-14
Commander's ballistic shield posts
Disassembly/assembly.............................................. 11-6
(M551A1) 12-20.1
Inspection and repair data ......................................... 11-7
Commander's lower and upper
Motor .................................................................. 11-16
control handle bracket ........................................................12-19
Replace .................................................................. 5-21
Common tools and equipment.....................................................2-1
Cupola traverse mechanism
Communications system wiring,
assembly (M551A1):
harness ..................................................................6-20
Adjustment ................................................................ 11.1-43
Connector terminal, printed
Disassembly/assembly.............................................. 11.1-28
circuit ..................................................................8-7
Inspection and repair data ......................................... 11.1-29
Connectors (replacement) ..........................................................4-4
Motor .................................................................. 11-16
Control handle assembly,
Replace .................................................................. 5-21
gunner's or commander's:
Seal positioning ......................................................... 11.1-30
Adjustment.................................................................8-26
Cupola traverse mechanism control
Electrical schematic...................................................8-26
box assembly .................................................................. 11.1-8
Repair ..................................................................8-23
Wiring diagram ..........................................................8-25
I-1
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
INDEX - Continued
Page Page
D G - Continued
Data . ..................................................................1-3 Removal/installation................................................... 8-20
Description ..................................................................1-3 Repair .................................................................. 8-21
Gun elevation and depression limit
E switches .................................................................. 8-5
Electric contact ring and brush Gun-launcher and mount
assemblies, cupola: support fixture .................................................................. 2-6.1
Adjust ..................................................................5-22 Gun-launcher breech mechanism:
Removal/installation ...................................................5-16 Assembly .................................................................. 10-1
Repair ..................................................................11-2 Disassembly .................................................................. 10-6
Electric contact ring, turret: Hand crank handle assembly............................................. 10-15
Disassembly/assembly.......................................................6-2 Inspection and repair data.................................................. 10-18
Electrical schematic ...........................................................6-4 Gun-launcher holding tool .......................................................... 2-6.4
Removal/installation ...........................................................6-1 Gun-launcher,
Electric drive control system: Installation in mount ........................................................... 5-11
Functional operation...........................................................8-2 Removal from mount.......................................................... 5-12
Power supply/rate sensor Removal/installation with mount
checkout ..................................................................8-12.5 from turret.................................................................. .5-8
Schematic ..................................................................8-1 Repair .................................................................. 10-1
Servomotor checkout .........................................................8-12.9 Gun mount assembly
Technical description .........................................................8-6.3 Precharged pressure ......................................................... 10-27
Test set . ..................................................................8-1 Detent plunger adjustment................................................. 10-28.1
Test set checkout procedure..............................................8-9 Removal/installation ........................................................... 5-8
Electric drive control wiring Repair . .10-25
harness: Gun trunnion bearing ................................................................. 12-4
Removal/installation ...................................................6-12 Gunner's control handle bracket ................................................ 12-5
Wiring schematic.......................................................6-14 Gyro selector assembly:
Electrical component symbols ....................................................4-2 Electrical schematic........................................................... 8-28
Electrical contact ring assembly, Repair . .................................................................. 8-27
cupola ..................................................................11-2 H
Electrical contact ring brush
assembly, cupola ...............................................................11-2 Harness straps, turret ................................................................ 6-9
Electrical cover (OPFOR)...........................................................12.1-4
Elevating mechanism: I
Bearing shimming procedure .............................................9-12 Improvised tools .................................................................. 2-1
Disassembly/assembly.......................................................9-1 Inspection and repair data.......................................................... 4-3
Gear shimming procedure .................................................9-13 Insulation sleeving or solder
Inspection and repair data..................................................9-3 sleeve (replacement).......................................................... 4-6
Removal/installation ...........................................................5-6
Elevation limit switch assembly: L
Adjustment ..................................................................8-30
Limit switch cam (No. 3) (OPFOR)........................................... 12.1-1
Repair ..................................................................8-29
Loader's control box: convention
Elevation quadrant bracket .........................................................12-2.1
weapons:
Equipment improvement
Electrical schematic .................................................. 7-17
recommendations...............................................................1-1
Repair .................................................................. 7-16
Evacuator cylinder .5-12
F
M
Firing circuit tester (OPFOR) .....................................................12.1-3
Maintenance allocation............................................................... 1-1
Forms, records, and reports .......................................................1-1
Maintenance; general ................................................................. 4-1
G Main weapon relay box wiring harness
(OPFOR) .................................................................. 12.1-3
Gas-Particulate Filter Unit ..........................................................12-24 Motor - generator: electric
Grenade launcher electrical drive control .................................................................. 8-33
control assembly ................................................................12-6 Adjusting amplifier ............................................................. 8-46
Grenade launcher tube assembly...............................................12-8 Amplifier 8-42
Gun and turret control Amplifier analysis............................................................... 8-33
selector: electric drive control Amplifier schematic ........................................................... 8-43
Electrical schematic...................................................8-20 Motor-generator schematic ................................................ 8-44
I-2
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
INDEX
Page Page
M- Continued S - Continued
Pre-setting amplifier...................................................8-45 Special tools and equipment . .................................................... 2-1

Repair ..................................................................8-38 Stabilized mode .................................................................. 8-5
Mount, gun-launcher:
Disassembly/assembly.......................................................10-28.2 T
Establishing precharged Telescope, M119 .................................................................. 5-8
pressure. ..................................................................0-27 Telescope (M 119) mounting
Installation in gun-launcher ................................................5-11 bracket .................................................................. 12-4
Removal from gun-launcher ...............................................5-12 Telescope reticle dimmer box:
Removal/installation with Conventional weapons ....................................................... 7-19
gun-launcher from turret ............................................5-8 Telescope reticle emergency
N power supply .................................................................. 7-9
Terminal board, cupola............................................................... 5-16
Non-stabilized mode 8-2 Test set - repair .................................................................. 2-1
Transmitter protective cover....................................................... 12-17
P Traverse mechanism, cupola ..................................................... 5-20
Pintle support assembly .............................................................11-17 Troubleshooting:
Power distribution wiring harness: Azimuth indicator switch assy............................................ 3-1
Removal/installation ...........................................................6-10 Circuit cutout box............................................................... 3-2
Wiring schematics .............................................................6-11 Commander's power assist
Power supply electric drive control cupola .................................................................. 3-13
Electrical schematic ...........................................................8-19 Conventional weapons system........................................... 3-3
Repair ..................................................................8-17 Cupola electrical system .................................................... 3-14
Cupola traverse mechanism .............................................. 3-15
R Electrical contact ring ........................................................ 3-2
Electric drive control system .............................................. 3-4
Rear ballistic shield ..................................................................12-20
Elevating mechanism......................................................... 3-8.1
Recoil guard screen ..................................................................5-8
Gun-launcher .................................................................. 3-10
Recoil mechanism assembly
Gun mount .................................................................. 3-11
Assembly ..................................................................10-26.1
Turret traversing mechanism ............................................. 3-8.3
Disassembly ..................................................................10-26
Trunnion bearing cap......................................................... 5-10
Recoil sleeve holding tool ...........................................................2-6.3
Turret - removal/installation................................................ 5-2
Relay box, conventional weapon:
Turret electrical block diagram........................................... 6-8
Adjust ..................................................................7-14
Turret electrical component
Electrical schematic ...........................................................7-12
symbols .................................................................. 4-2
Repair . 7-10
Turret floor lifting fixture..................................................... 2-6.5
Repair parts 2-1
Turret improvised stand ..................................................... 2-5
Reticle dimmer box assembly.............................................7-19
Turret protective screens ................................................... 12-16
Retubing/rechambering (on vehicle)
Turret rotatable floor bearing.............................................. 12-3
and cannon pressure vessel (CPV)
Turret stand floor support .................................................. 2-6
replacement procedures . ..........................................10-42
Turret traverse bearing assembly:
S Removal/installation ........................................................... 5-5
Repair .................................................................. 12-2.2
Safe-to-fire and pressure indicator Turret traverse mechanism:
group: Adjust 9-30
Calibration..................................................................10-28 Disassembly/assembly.............................................. 9-14
Disassembly/assembly . ............................................10-30 Gear shimming procedure......................................... 9-30
Safe to fire limit switch (OPFOR) ...............................................12.1-2 Inspection and repair data ......................................... 9-15
Safety switch assembly ..............................................................5-21 Removal/installation................................................... 5-7
Searchlight adaption kit ..............................................................12-18 Slip clutch adjustment ............................................... 9-31
Servomotor:
Brush neutral setting . ......................................................9-33 V
Brush setting ..................................................................9-33
Ventilating fan, turret .................................................................. 6-5
Repair ..................................................................9-34
Tachometer generator........................................................9-36 W
Scope. ..................................................................1-1
Slave charging system repair .....................................................12-14 Wiring harness shield (M551A1) ............................................... 6-17
Solder sleeve or insulation sleeving: Wiring harnesses .................................................................. 6-8
Replacement ..................................................................4-6
I-3/(I-4 blank)
Official: W. C. WESTMORELAND,
General, United States Army,
Chief of Staff
VERNE L. BOWERS
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-37 (qty rqr block No. 171) direct and general support maintenance
requirements for Armored Reconnaissance Assault Vehicle XM551.
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1993-342-421-62621

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 6-8.1. (Added) Turret electrified block diagram less missile

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 6-8. (Superseded) Turret electrical block diagram

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 6-8.2 Turret electrical block diagram - closed breech scavenging system.
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 6-24. Turret electrical schematic (1 of 10)

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 6-26. Turret electrical schematic (3 of 10).

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C12

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C12
Figure 6-28.1. Turret electrical schematic (5.1 of 10)

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
AR 900225

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10
AR 900226

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C10

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13
Figure 6-34. Turret electrical schematic (1 of 4) (OPFOR only)

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C13

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Figure 7-6.3. Weapon system circuit diagram - closed breech scavenging system.
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C6
Figure 7-6.4. Weapon system wiring diagram - closed breech scavenging system
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
Figure 8-1. Turret electrical drive control system schematic (using accessory box 11635617)
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C2
Figure 8-6. Accessory Box Electrical Schematic.

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 8-9. Amplifier Integrator Electrical Schematic

TM 9-2350-230-35/2
C1
WE 11601
Figure 8-12. Power supply electrical schematic
TM 9-2350-230-35/2
Figure 11-3. Commander’s Cupola Electrical Wiring Diagram.

PIN: 028655-013

TM 9-2350-230-35 - 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 9-2350-230-35 - 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 9-2350-230-35 - 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 9-2350-230-35/2

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL MANUAL

DIRECT SUPPORT, GENERAL SUPPORT,

AND DEPOT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TURRET, ELEVATIG AND TRAVERSING SYSTEMS,

CUPOLA, GUN-LAUNCHER AND MOUNT

ARMORED RECONNAISSANCE/AIRBORN ASSAULT VEHICLE:

FULL-TRACKED, 152MM, M551 (2350-00-873-5408),

This copy is a reprint which includes current

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

CARBON MONOXIDE POISONING CAN BE DEADLY

CARBON MONOXIDE IS A COLORLESS, ODORLESS, DEADLY POISONOUS GAS, WHICH,

IT OCCURS IN THE EXHAUST FUMES OF FUEL-BURNING HEATERS AND

1. DO NOT OPERATE HEATER OR ENGINE OF VEHICLE IN AN ENCLOSED AREA UNLESS

THE BEST DEFENSE AGAINST CARBON MONOXIDE POISONING IS ADEQUATE VENTILATION.

JOHN A. WICKHAM, JR.

Direct Support, General Support, and

TM 9-2350-230-35/2, 22 July 1966, is changed as follows:

The title is changed as shown above.

Remove Pages Insert Pages

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

Direct Support, General Support, and Depot Maintenance Manual

TM 9-2350-230-35/2, 22 July 1966, is changed as follows:

Title is changed as shown above.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

Direct Support, General Support, and

TM 9-2350-230-35/2, 22 July 1966, is changed as follows:

1. Title is changed as shown above.

TECHNICAL MANUAL ) HEADQUARTERS,

DS, GS, AND DEPOT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section 1-1. Scope, Maintenance Allocation, and Reports .......................................................................... 1-1

CHAPTER 2. PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND EQUIPMENT....................................................................... 2-1

CHAPTER 3. TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................................ 3-1

CHAPTER 4. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND REPAIR DATA

Section 4-1. Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 4-1

CHAPTER 5. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF TURRET AND TURRET MAJOR COMPONENTS

Section 5-1. Turret and Turret Traverse Bearing Assembly......................................................................... 5-2

CHAPTER 6. REPAIR OF TURRET ELECTRIC CONTACT RING, ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES,

Section 6-1. Electric Contact Ring .............................................................................................................. 6-1

CHAPTER 7. REPAIR OF CONVENTIONAL WEAPONS CONTROL SYSTEM

Section 7-1. Functional Operation............................................................................................................... 7-1

CHAPTER 8. REPAIR OF ELECTRIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM

Section 8-1. Functional Operation............................................................................................................... 8-2

CHAPTER 9. REPAIR OF GUN-LAUNCHER ELEVATING AND TURRET TRAVERSE MECHANISMS

Section 9-1. Gun-Launcher Elevating Mechanism....................................................................................... 9-1

CHAPTER 10. REPAIR OF 152MM GUN-LAUNCHER M81E1 AND MOUNT

Section 10-1. Breech Mechanism ................................................................................................................. 10-1

CHAPTER 11. REPAIR OF COMMANDER'S POWER ASSIST CUPOLA (M551 ONLY)

Section 11-1. Electrical System .................................................................................................................... 11-1

CHAPTER 11.1. REPAIR OF COMMANDER'S POWER ASSIST CUPOLA (M551AI ONLY)

CHAPTER 12. REPAIR OF TURRET MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS

Section 12-1. Elevation Quadrant Bracket .................................................................................................... 12-2.1

CHAPTER 12.1 REPAIR OF TURRET MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS (OPFOR VEHICLE ONLY)

Section 12.1-1. Limit Switch Cam (No. 3) ........................................................................................................ 12.1-1

CHAPTER 13. REPAIR OF MATERIEL USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH MAJOR ITEM

Section 1-1. SCOPE, MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION, AND REPORTS

1-1. Scope 1-3. Forms, Records, and Reports

b. Refer to TM 9-1430-465-30 for troubleshooting c. Weapon Record Book. For instructions,